MSD Merged

13872 Item Bank Name MSU Baroda//...
/Journalism
Option Text 1 Option Text Option Text
Item Text Option Text 2 3 4
Recommende value of ф for heavy duty
1.12 1.26 1.56 1.14
machine tools and automats--
Number of spindle speed stepsin machine None from
Z ф Rn
tool gear box indicated by letter-- given options
The normally selected value/ s of Z is /are All given
4 6 8
-- options
Which of the following is not true about Positive drive Constant Transmit large Bulky
gears? velocity ratio power construction
The basic series of preferred numbers are R5, R10, R20, R40 R10, R20, R30, R5, R10, R15, None from
and R80 R40 and R50 R20 and R25 given options
Series factor for R20 series is, 1.16 4.47 1.12 2.71
For construction of kinematic diagram of Zmin>18 Z1i +Z1o = Z2i Z2i +Z1i> 4 All given
multispeed gear box, which of following +Z2o=Z3i +Z3o = equations
equation is correct. C
Permissible speed deviation is .. ± 10 (ø - 1) ± 10 (ø + 1) ± 10 (ø x 1) ± 10 (ø /1)

line graph of class
Set of
What is frequency polygon frequency plotted against Bar chart Histogram
rectangles
class marks
Root mean Root mean
Root mean square square square
What is a standard deviation Variance
deviation from the mode deviation from deviation from
the median the mean
Process of converting the bulk load into a All given
Materialization containerization Transportation
unit load using container is options
A triple ply belt conveyor is required to
transport 2 ton of iron ore per hour at a
conveyor speed of 90 m/min through a
15 16.7 17.4 18.2
distance of 1000m and a height of 300 m.
what is the maximum suitable inclination
for the conveyor.
Which of the following is a property of Cake forming
weight Lump size density
unit load? tendency
The point where material is loaded on the Discharge
Head end Tail end Feed point
belt conveyor is known as point
Which of the following is the least Continuous Pneumatic Screw
Belt conveyor
preferred conveyor for handling glue? flow conveyor conveyor conveyor
Chains for material handling equipment
cast iron wrought iron mild steel carbon steel
are generally made of
Surface and
In material handling equipment through Hoisting
Conveying Equipment overhead Elevators.
belt conveyors is classified as Equipment
Equipment
Volumetric capacity of horizontal belt
Q= Mb2 v m3/s Q= kb2v m3/s Q= Cb2 v m3/s M = ρQ
conveyor is given as
The angle of surcharge (f) will always be - None from
Greater Less Equal
---------- than the angle of repose(Y) given options
Circumferential (hoop) stress in a thin
cylindrical vessel under internal pressure is
__________ the longitudinal stress. Half Equal to Twice Eight times
Unit-1 Design of Machine Tool Geraox
1. What is the maximum percentage loss of economic cutting speed if geometric progression ratio = 1.06 ?
a) 17 b) 11.5 c) 5.7 d)2.9
Ans: d
2. Diameter range is high in geometric progression due to _________ spindle speed.

a) Low b) High c) Constant d) all of these
Ans: a
3. What is harmonic progression?

a) Difference between reciprocal of two successive spindle speeds is constant
b) Difference between two successive spindle speeds is constant
c) Ratio of two successive spindle speeds is constant.
d) Ratio of two successive spindle speeds is variable.
Ans: a
4. What is arithmetic progression?

Ans: b
5. What is geometric progression?

Ans: c
6. What is the purpose of using a gear box?

a) To increase torque
b) To increase speed
c) Converts single input speed into multiple output speeds
d) All of above
Ans: d
7. Which of the following statements is true for structure/speed diagrams?

a) Structure diagrams gives range ratio of spindle speeds
b) Speed diagrams do not give range ratio of spindle speeds
c) Speed diagrams consider motor speed
d) All of above
Ans: c
8. A machine tool has minimum speed of 100 r.p.m. How many speed steps are required by it to achieve
speed of 200 rpm? (Geometric progression ratio = 1.06)
a) 11 b) 12 c) 13 d) 14
Ans: b
9. Maximum and minimum diameter of a shaft to be machined is 100 mm and 80 mm respectively. What is
the maximum spindle speed if cutting velocity is 40 m/min?
a) 120 b) 127 c) 160 d) 636
Ans: c
10. Economic cutting speed is minimum if geometric ratio is _________

a) Minimum b) Maximum c) Equal to economic cutting speed d) All of above
Ans: a
11. What is the geometric progression ratio if maximum and minimum spindle speeds are 500 r.p.m and 300
r.p.m respectively? (Number of speed steps = 7)
a) 2 b) 1.5 c) 1.08 c) None of these
Ans: c
12. Ratio of two spindle speeds is constant in _________ progression.

a) Arithmetic b) Harmonic c) Geometric d) All of the above
Ans: c
13. Which of the following is the need of the gearbox?

a) To vary the speed of the vehicle
b) To vary the torque of the vehicle
c) To vary the power of the vehicle
d) To vary the acceleration of the vehicle
Ans: b
a) 17.0% b) 11.5% c) 5.7 % d) 2.9%
Ans: d
15. Higher the value of geometric progression, ____________ is loss of economic cutting speed.
a) Higher
b) Lower
c) Constant
d) None of the above
Ans: a
a) 17.0% b) 22.5% c) 5.7 % d) 2.9%
Ans: b
17. What is the maximum percentage loss of economic cutting speed if geometric progression ratio = 2 ?
a) 17.0% b) 22.5% c) 5.7 % d) 33.3%
Ans: d
18. If number of spindle speed steps, z = 27, then Number of stages of the gearbox is,
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4
Ans: c
a) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4
Ans: c
b) 1 b) 2 c) 3 d) 4
Ans: c
21. For a three stage, twelve speed gearbox the total number of structural formulae that can be written are
a) 3 b) 6 c) 12 d) 36
Ans: d
22. For a two stage, four speed gearbox the total number of structural formulae that can be written are
a) 2 b) 4 c) 12 d) 36
Ans: b
23. Lower is the speed of shaft, higher is the torque that shaft has to transmit and hence __________ is its
diameter.
a) Higher b) Lower c) Constant d) None of the above
Ans: a
a) 1.5 b) 2 c) 2.5 d) 3
Ans: a
25. What is the Range ratio if maximum and minimum spindle speeds are 100 r.p.m and 1800 r.p.m
respectively?
a) 15 b) 18 c) 20 d) 22
Ans: b
26. Identify the optimum structure diagram from the following structural formulae.
a) 2(3) 3(1) b) 2(1) 3(2) c) 3(1) 2(3) d) 3(2) 2(1)
Ans: b
27. Identify the optimum structure diagram from the following structural formulae.
a) 2(1) 2(2) 3(4) b) 2(1) 2(6) 3(4) c) 2(2) 3(1) 3(4) d) 3(1) 2(4) 2(2)
Ans:a
28. In node method of optimization, for optimum structure diagram the sum of diameter of all shafts be,
a) Minimum b) Maximum c) Constant d) None of the above
Ans: a
29. Loss of economic cutting speed is

a) Difference between actual cutting speed and optimum cutting speed
b) Ratio of actual cutting speed to optimum cutting speed
c) Difference between reciprocal of actual cutting speed and optimum cutting speed
Ans: a
30. Deviation of actual spindle speeds from calculated spindle speeds must not exceed
a) 10(Φ-1)% b) 15(Φ-1)% c) 20(Φ-1)% d) 10(Φ-10)%
Ans: a
31. Spacing between two adjacent gears on the shaft must be greater than__________ the facewidth.
a) Thrice b) Twice c) half d) None of these
Ans: b
32. Percentage speed deviation is given by,

a) nact-nth/nth*100 b) nact-nth/nact*100 c) nth-nact/nact*100 d) None of the above
Ans: a
33. What is the geometric progression ratio if gearbox based on R5 series is designed?
a) 4 b) 2 c) 1.58 d) 2.5
Ans: c
a) 4 b) 2 c) 2.5 d) 1.46
Ans: d
a) 4 b) 2 c) 1.26 d) 2.5
Ans: c
a) 4 b) 2 c) 1.06 d) 2.5
Ans: c
37. Advantage of the arithmetic Progression is

a) It is good in High spindle speed range
b) It is poor in low spindle speed range
c) All of the above
Ans: a
38. Disadvantage of the arithmetic progression is

a) It is good in High spindle speed range
c) All of the above
Ans: b
39. Advantage of the harmonic Progression is

a) It is good in low spindle speed range
b) It is poor in high spindle speed range
c) All of the above
Ans: a
40. Disadvantage of the arithmetic progression is

a) It is good in low spindle speed range
b) It is poor in high spindle speed range
c) All of the above
Ans: b
41. Advantage of the Geometric Progression is

a) It gives constant loss of economic cutting speed in total speed range
b) Gives better gearbox design features
c) All of the above
Ans: c
42. Disadvantage of the geometric progression is

a) It is good in high spindle speed range
c) All of the above
Ans: b
43. For a six speed gear box following can be one of the a structural formula,
a) 3(1) 2(3) b) 3(1) 3(3) c) 2(1) 2(2) d) None of the above
Ans: a
44. For a nine speed gear box following can be one of the a structural formula,
Ans: b
45. For a four speed gear box following can be one of the a structural formula,
Ans: c
46. For a eight speed gear box following can be one of the a structural formula,
a) 2(1) 2(2) 2(4) b) 3(1) 3(3) 2(9) c) 2(1) 2(2) 3(4) d) None of the above
Ans: a
47. For a eight speed gear box following can be one of the a structural formula,
Ans: a
48. For a twelve speed gear box following can be one of the a structural formula,
Ans: a
49. For a eighteen speed gear box following can be one of the a structural formula,
Ans: a
50. For a twenty seven speed gear box following can be one of the a structural formula,
Ans: b
51. Following is a purpose of gearbox:

a) To increase the torque
b) To increase the speed
c) To convert the single input speed to multiple output speeds
d) All of the above
Ans: d
52. The minimum number of teeth on the pinion can be taken as

a) 14 b) 20 c) 10 d) all of the above
Ans: b
53. What is Range ratio if, nmax=2880rpm, nmin= 60rpm,
a) 48 b) 60 c)85 d)100
Ans: a
54. Vertical lines in the structure diagram represent

a) Shafts b) Gears c) Speed steps d) None of the above
Ans: a
55. Number of vertical lines in structure diagram is equal to

a) N b) N+1 c) N+2 d) N-1
Unit 2 Statistical Consideration in Design
Sr. No
1. 1) What causes infant mortality in mechanical equipments?
a. Design errors
b. Manufacturing defects
c. Installation defects
d. All of the above
Ans d. All of the above
2. A plain carbon steel has mean yield strength of 300 N/mm2 and standard
deviation of 50 N/mm2. What is the mean and standard deviation of margin of
safety, if mean tensile stress of 250 N/mm2 and standard deviation of 65
N/mm2 acts on it?
a. 23.45 N/mm2, 50 N/mm2
b. 50 N/mm2, 82 N/mm2
c. 82 N/mm2, 7.07 N/mm2
d. 7.07 N/mm2, 50 N/mm2
Ans b. 50 N/mm2, 82 N/mm2
3 What is meant by mean time to failure (MTTF)?
a. Mean time between two successive failure components

b. Maximum time between two successive failure components
c. Sum of survival time for number of components divided by number of failures
d. Sum of number of failures divided by survival time for number of components
Ans c. Sum of survival time for number of components divided by number of failures
4 If a relief valve has reliability of 0.989, how many failures are expected in
testing 1000 such relief valves?
a. 111
b. 100
c. 10
d. 11
Ans d. 11
5 Failure rate for safety valve working for 400 hours is 3 x 10–6 failures/hour.
What is the reliability of safety valve?
a. 0.998
b. 0.989
c. 0.888
d. 0.899
Ans a. 0.998
6 What is meant by hazard rate?
a. Number of failures per unit time per number of items when exposed for same
time
b. Probability of test specimen fails between time t1 and t1 + dt1 which survives
for time t1
c. Both a. and b.
d. None of the above
Ans c. Both a. and b.
7 What is the standard deviation of clearance population for the diameter of
shaft and hole assembly specified below?
Shaft diameter = 30 ± 0.15
Hole diameter = 30.5 ± 0.25
a. 0.097 mm
b. 0.059 mm
c. 0.036 mm
d. 0.390 mm
Ans a. 0.097 mm
8 Which of the following curves have the mean value equal to zero in the
graph of frequency vs random variable?
a. Normal distribution curve

b. Standard normal distribution curve
c. Both a. and b.
Ans b. Standard normal distribution curve
9 What is the relation between standard deviation(σ) and arithmetic mean
(μ) to determine coefficient of variation (C)?
a. C = σ + μ
b. C = σ – μ
c. C = σ / μ
d. C = σ x μ
Ans c. C = σ / μ
10 Assignable causes are caused due to changes in _________
a. manufacturing process
b. material
c. inspection process
d. all of the above
Ans d. all of the above
11 Which of these does not come into the general model of a process?
a) Input
b) Controllable input factors
c) Uncontrollable inputs factors
d) Acceptance sampling
Ans d) Acceptance sampling
12 The uncontrollable factors are the factor ___
a) That varies according to a normal distribution
b) That does not vary at all
c) That can be controlled by the user
d) That cannot be changed according to the wish of the user
Ans d) That cannot be changed according to the wish of the user
13 The uncontrollable factors are also called ____
a) Designed factors
b) Noise factors
c) Acceptance factors
d) Sound factors
Ans b) Noise factors
14 Which of these steps are not conducted when the design of experiment procedure
is adopted?
a) Determining which variable is most influential to output
b) Determining where to set the influential controllable factors so that output is near
the nominal requirement
c) Deleting the uncontrollable factors
d) Determining where to set the influential controllable inputs so that the variability
in the output is smallest
Ans c) Deleting the uncontrollable factors
15 Experimental design methods are not used ____
a) Evaluating the process capability
b) In process development
c) In process troubleshooting to improve process performance
d) To obtain a process that is robust and insensitive to external sources of
variability
Ans a) Evaluating the process capability
16 The designed experiments are the part of ___ step of DMAIC process.
a) Define
b) Measure
c) Analyze
d) Control
Ans c) Analyze
17 The design of experiment is used to determine the variables which are ___ affecting
the state of the process.
a) The most
b) The least
c) Not
d) Not changing or
Ans a) The most
18 Which of these can be used to develop a new process?
a) Design of experiments
b) Acceptance sampling
c) Control charts
d) Histogram
Ans a) Design of experiments
19 The types of frequency distribution are
A. a) 3
B. b) 4
C. c) 5
D. d) 2
Ans E. d) 2
20 The minimum value in the class limit is called
A. a) primary limit
B. b) upper limit
C. c) lower limit
D. d) secondary limit
Ans E. c) lower limit
21 The total of frequency up to an upper class limit or boundary is known as
A. a) average frequency
B. b) cumulative frequency
C. c) frequency distribution
D. d) frequency polygon
Ans E. b) cumulative frequency
22 The data presented in the form of frequency data is known as
A. a) grouped data
B. b) ungrouped data
C. c) secondary data
D. d) calculated data
Ans E. a) grouped data
23 A tabular arrangement for classifying data into different groups is called
A. a) standard deviation
B. b) frequency distribution
C. c) class mn
D. d) arithmetic mean
Ans E. b) frequency distribution
24 Why is it sometimes easier to use a frequency table to interpret data than to examine
a distribution of raw scores?
A. A frequency table transforms the raw scores by showing the means.
B. Frequency tables display patterns, organizing the data by how often each score
occurs.
C. Raw scores are not based on the sample.
D. Raw scores do not represent the data.
Ans B. Frequency tables display patterns, organizing the data by how often each score
occurs
25 In comparing frequency tables with grouped frequency tables for the same set of
data, which of the following would be true?
a) Depending on the width of class intervals it is possible that some scores
may not be counted in a grouped frequency table.
b) If the data set is large the grouped frequency table would be easier to
decipher.
c) Because of overlapping class intervals, the total frequency for a grouped
frequency table would exceed that of a frequency table.
d) It is generally harder to spot patterns in the data when using a grouped
frequency table.
Ans b) If the data set is large the grouped frequency table would be easier to decipher.
26
A bar graph is usually used with __________ data while a histogram is used with
_________ data.
a) Interval; nominal
b) Ratio; scale
c) Nominal; scale
d) Nominal; ordinal
Ans a) Interval; nominal

27
A normal distribution is:
a) Symmetric.
b) Bell-shaped, symmetric, and unimodal.
c) Unimodal.
d) Bell-shaped.
Ans e) Bell-shaped.
28 The sum of frequencies for all classes will always equal
a. 1
b. the number of elements in a data set
c. the number of classes
d. a value between 0 and 1
Ans c. the number of classes
29 A bar chart constructed in which the area of each bar is proportional to the
number of items in each group is known as
A. a) pi chart
B. b) histogram
C. c) frequency distribution table
D. d) polygon
Ans E. b) histogram
30 The table which shows the frequency of each score is called a
A. a) polygon
B. b) pi chart
C. c) histogram
D. d) frequency distribution table
Ans E. d) frequency distribution table
31 A many sided closed figure used in frequency distribution is termed as

A. a) frequency polygon
B. b) frequency hexagon
C. c) frequency pentagon
D. d) frequency decagon
Ans E. a) frequency polygon

32 The number of times each value appears is called the value's
A. a) range
B. b) mode
C. c) frequency
D. d) standard Deviation
Ans c) frequency
33 1. Normal Distribution is applied for ___________
a) Continuous Random Distribution
b) Discrete Random Variable
c) Irregular Random Variable
d) Uncertain Random Variable
Ans a) Continuous Random Distribution
34 The shape of the Normal Curve is ___________
a) Bell Shaped
b) Flat
c) Circular
d) Spiked
Ans a) Bell Shaped
35 Normal Distribution is symmetric is about ___________
a) Variance
b) Mean
c) Standard deviation
d) Covariance
Ans b) Mean
36 For a standard normal variate, the value of mean is?
a) ∞
b) 1
c) 0
d) not defined
Ans c) 0
37 The area under a standard normal curve is?
a) 0
b) 1
c) ∞
d) not defined
Ans b) 1
38 The standard normal curve is symmetric about the value ___________
a) 0.5
b) 1
c) ∞
d) 0
Ans d) 0
39 For a standard normal variate, the value of Standard Deviation is ___________
a) 0
b) 1
c) ∞
d) not defined
Ans b) 1
40 Normal Distribution is also known as ___________
a) Cauchy’s Distribution
b) Laplacian Distribution
c) Gaussian Distribution
d) Lagrangian Distribution
Ans c) Gaussian Distribution
41 Skewness of Normal distribution is ___________
a) Negative
b) Positive
c) 0
d) Undefined
Ans c) 0
42 In Normal distribution, the highest value of ordinate occurs at ___________
a) Mean
b) Variance
c) Extremes
d) Same value occurs at all points
Ans a) Mean
43 The shape of the normal curve depends on its ___________
a) Mean deviation
b) Standard deviation
c) Quartile deviation
d) Correlation
Ans b) Standard deviation
44 In Standard normal distribution, the value of mode is ___________
a) 2
b) 1
c) 0
d) Not fixed
Ans c) 0
45 In Standard normal distribution, the value of median is ___________
a) 1
b) 0
c) 2
d) Not fixed
Ans b) 0
46 In a normal curve, the highest point on the curve occurs at the mean, μ, which is
also the:
(a) Median and mode
(b) Geometric mean and harmonic mean
(c) Lower and upper quartiles
(d) Variance and standard deviation
Ans (a) Median and mode
47 The shape of the normal curve depends upon the value of:
(a) Standard deviation
(b) Q1
(c) Mean deviation
(d) Quartile deviation
Ans (a) Standard deviation
48 The normal distribution is a proper probability distribution of a continuous random
variable, the total area under the curve f(x) is:
(a) Equal to one
(b) Less than one
(c) More than one
(d) Between -1 and +1
Ans (a) Equal to one
49 Process capability generally uses ____
a) Specifications
b) Control Limits
c) Process standard deviation
d) Mean of any one sample
Ans b) Control Limits
50 In case of a brittle material, the factor of safety is
(a) Real stress/unit stress
(b) Ultimate stress/allowable stress
(c) Allowable stress/ Yield stress
(d) None
Ans (b) Ultimate stress/allowable stress
51 What is accounted for by the factor of safety?
(a) Uncertainties
(b) Linear displacements
(c) Parabolic displacements
(d) None
Ans (a) Uncertainties
52 Other common name of the factor of safety is
(a) Strength
(b)Strain
(c)Ignorance
(d) None
Ans (c)Ignorance
53 Under exact analysis of stresses,what will be value of factor of safety in a body?
(a) More
(b) Less
(c) Zero
(d) None
Ans (c) Zero
54 Effect of higher factor of safety on cost of the material?
(a) Increases
(b) Decreases
(c) No change
(d) None
Ans (a) Increases
55 In normal distribution curve the random variable is
a) 0
b) X
c) Y
d) 1
Ans b) x
56 In standard normal distribution curve, the mean is equal to
a) 1
b) 0
c) -1
d) 2
Ans b) 0
57 In normal distribution curve, the area under curve is equal to the total population.
a) total population
b) standard deviation
c) mean
d) 1
Ans a) total population
58 In standard normal distribution curve, the area under curve is equal to the total population.
a) total population
b) standard deviation
c) mean
d) 1
Ans d) 1
59 In normal distribution curve, the standard deviation is any value.
a) total population
b) ̂σ
c) mean
d) 1
Ans b) ̂σ
60 In standard normal distribution curve, the standard deviation is any value.
a) total population
b) ̂σ
c) mean
d) 1
Ans d) 1
61 In normal distribution curve, the value in X-axis is
a) X
b) ̂σ
c) Z
d) no. of populations
Ans a) X
62 In standard normal distribution curve, the value in X-axis is

a) X
b) ̂σ
c) Z
d) no. of populations
Ans c) Z
63
Ans
64
Ans
65
Ans
66
Ans
67
Ans
Record No.:
Pimpri Chinchwad Education Trust’s ACAD/R/045
Pimpri Chinchwad College of Engineering Revision: 00
Date: 01/02/2017
Multiple Choice Question
Department: Mechanical Academic Year: 2019 - 2020 Semester: II

Subject-MSD Unit II- Statistical Analysis
1. The histogram is a method of representing frequency distribution between

a Class frequency and class width
b Class frequency and class midpoint
c Class width and class midpoint
d None of the above
2. Central tendency of population is measured by
a Mode
b Median
c Arithmetic mean
d All of the above
3. Dispersion of frequency distribution is measured in terms of
a Quartile deviation
b Standard deviation
c Mean deviation
d All of the above
4. Variance of population is determined by
a  (x i  )2
N 1
b
 (x  )i
2
N 1
c  xi fi
N
d None of the above
5. The equation of normal distribution curve in terms of standard variable is
a  1 2
1  2 z 
f ( z)  e  
2
Page 1 of 5
b  1  x 2 
   
1  2    
f ( x)  e
 2
c  1 2
1  2 z 
f ( z)  e 
 2
d None of the above
6. What is the area below normal curve from Z=-3 to Z=+3

a 95.45%
b 99.73%
c 68.27%
d 100%
7. When two population X and Y are subtracted, what is the standard deviation of resultant
Population
a
 r   x2  y2
b
 r   x2  y 2
c  r 2   x2   y2
d None of the above
8. The percentage rejection in any manufacturing process can be determined, when
a The design tolerance is equal to natural tolerance
b The design tolerance is greater than natural tolerance
c The design tolerance is less than natural tolerance
d None of the above
9. In statistical analysis frequency distribution characteristic is represented by
a Frequency polygon
b Skewness
c Kurtosis
d All the above
10. When time increases, the probability of failure of product
a Increases
b Decreases
c Constant
d None of the above
11. If diameter of beam is normally distributed with a mean of 50mm and a standard
deviations of 0.125mm, then coefficient of variance of diameter is
a 0.25  10 3
Page 2 of 5
b 2.5  10 3
c 25.0  10 3
d None of the above
12. Minimum factor of safety available in the components is determined by using
a Minimum strength /Maximum stress

b Maximum strength /Minimum stress
c Maximum strength /Maximum stress
d None of the above
13. A mechanical component is subjected to a mean stress of 207 N/mm2 with a standard of
55.2 N/mm2. The material has a mean yield strength of 276 N/mm2 with a standard
deviation of 41.4N/mm2. The mean and standard deviation of margin of safety population
is
a 6.9N/mm2 and 69N/mm2
b 69N/mm2 and 6.9N/mm2
c 69N/mm2 and 69N/mm2
d None of the above
14. The maximum and minimum diameter of spigot is 60.006 mm and 59.943 mm
respectively. The standard deviation of spigot diameter is
a 0.217  10 3 mm
b 21.7  10 3 mm
c 2.17  10 3 mm
d None of the above
15. The relation between stress population σ, strength population S and third population
Margin of safety is
a M=S - σ
b M=S + σ
c M=σ - S
d None of the above
16. In hydrodynamic bearing, if the diameters of journal and bearing is normally distributed
With standard deviation of 0.0035 and 0.0055 respectively. Then the standard deviation of
clearance population is
Page 3 of 5
a 0.00652mm
b 0.0652mm
c 0.652mm
d None of the above
17. When the design tolerance is greater than natural tolerance, there is
a Partial rejection of component
b No rejection of component
c Partial acceptance of component
d 100% rejection of component
18. The natural tolerance  3 of the process is the spared of normal distribution curve
that includes
a 100% of the population
b 95.45% of the population
c 68.27% of the population
d 99.73% of the population
19. The total area below the normal distribution curve from x   to x   represents the
total population is
a   1  x 
2
1   
A 
 2
e  2  
dx
b   1 x    
2
1   
A 
 2
e  2   
dx
c   1 x    
2
1   
A

 2
e  2   
dx
d None of the above

20. In order to analyze the different statistical cases, it is convenient to define a standard
variable Z with mean μ and standard deviation σ is expressed as
a X 
Z

b X 
Z

c X 
Z

d None of the above
21. The mathematical form of standard deviation is expressed as
Page 4 of 5
a
  Xi   
2

N
b
  Xi   
2

N 1
c
  Xi   
2

2N
d None of the above
22. In statistical analysis confidence limit of standard distribution curve is
a Z  
b Z  1
c Z  2
d Z  3
23. A type of ball bearing has a normally distributed time to failure with mean of 8100 hrs
and a standard deviation of 300hrs. If there are 100 such bearings filled at a time, how
many be expected to fail within the first 9000hrs
a 100%
b 50%
c 25%
d None of the above
24. A shaft and bearing assembly have a diameter of  40  0.3mm and  40.5  0.3mm with
Same standard deviation of 0.1mm. The standard deviation of population clearance is
a 0.14142mm
b 1.4142mm
c 14.142mm
d None of the above
25. A machine member made of plain carbon steel has probability of failure equal to 0.37%,
then reliability is
a 99.63%
b 0.63%
c 63%
d None of the above
Page 5 of 5
Multiple Choice Questions : Mechanical System Design
Unit 3: Belt Conveyor Systems
Sr. Question
Answer
No.
Any Material Handling Process consists of: (a) Picking up the load (b)
1 d
Transporting the load ( c)Setting the load down (d) All of the above
Which of the following is the type of Bulk Load: (a)Boxes (b)sand (
2 b
c)machines (d)Containers
Which of the following is the type of Bulk Load: (a)Boxes (b)machines (
3 c
c)Coal (d)Containers
Which of the following is the type of Unit Load: (a)Boxes (b)Sand ( c)Coal
4 a
(d)Cement
Which of the following is the type of Unit Load: (a) Stones (b)Sand (
5 c
c)Machine (d)Cement
Objectives of Material Handling Systems: (a) Accuracy in
6 d
transportation(b)Low Cost ( c)Safety (d)All of the Above
Material Handling Equpments are: (a) Hoists(b)Conveyors ( c)Both of them
7 c
(d) None
pulley Coupled to drive unit and drives the belt convyor is called as: (a) head
8 a
pulley(b)tail pulley ( c)crown pulley (d) flat pulley
Which of the following is not a belt conveyor:(a) troughed(b) blanket ( c)
9 c
chain (d)flat belt
If inclination angle is 55⁰ the belt conveyor used is called as: (a) troughed(b)
10 b
blanket ( c) chain (d)flat belt
To calculate capacity of Horizontal Belt Conveyor----- factor is used :
11 c
(a)flowability Factor (b)Inclination Factor ( c) Surcharge Factor (d) None
To calculate capacity of inclined Belt Conveyor----- factor is used :
12 a
(a)flowability Factor (b)Inclination Factor ( c) Surcharge Factor (d) None
If the material is poured on the Stationary belt the angle made by top surface
13 of belt with the horizontal is called as : (a)Angle of Repose (b) Angle of a
Surcharge ( c)Angle of Inclination (d)Angle of Declination
If the material is poured on the moving belt the angle made by top surface of
14 belt with the horizontal is called as : (a)Angle of Repose (b) Angle of b
Surcharge ( c)Angle of Inclination (d)Angle of Declination
The minimum Diameter of Head Pulley is given by: (a) Dmin=
15 d
K2Zp(b)Dmin= K1+K2+Zp ( c)Dmin= K1Zp (d) Dmin= K1K2Zp
The minimum Diameter of tail Pulley is given by: (a) Dmin= K2Zp(b)Dmin=
16 d
K1+K2+Zp ( c)Dmin= K1Zp (d) Dmin= K1K2Zp
Function of Snub Pulley is: (a)Changing the path of Carrying run of the belt
17 (b) Changing the path of return run of the belt ( c)Faciliating the loading and d
unloading operations (d) All of the above
Function of Idler is:(a)Changing the path of Carrying run of the belt (b)
Changing the path of return run of the belt ( c) To support belt on the
18 c
Carrying run and return run ( d)Faciliating the loading and unloading
operations
On carrying run the spacing between the idlers is: (a)1m to 1.5 m (b) 2m to
19 a
3m ( c) 0.5m to 0.75m(d)3m to 4m
On return run the spacing between the idlers is: (a)1m to 1.5 m (b) 2m to 3m
20 b
( c) 0.5m to 0.75m(d)3m to 4m
At loading point the spacing between the idlers is: (a)1m to 1.5 m (b) 2m to
21 c
3m ( c) 0.5m to 0.75m(d)3m to 4m
Method of feeding to flat belt conveyor is: (a)By hopper (b) by preceeding
22 d
Conveyor ( c)by process equipment (d)All of the above
Carrying capacity of horizontal flat belt conveyor is calculated by :
23 a
(a)Q=Cb^2V (b) Q=Kb^2V ( c)Q=C^2bV (d)Q=K^2bV
Carrying capacity of inclined flat belt conveyor is calculated by : (a)Q=Cb^2V
24 b
(b) Q=Kb^2V ( c)Q=C^2bV (d)Q=K^2bV
Frictional Resistance at unloading station is given by: (a)Fr=(2.1 to
25 3.6)MmgB (b)Fr=(3.1 to 3.6)MmgB ( c) Fr=(4.1 to 4.6)MmgB(d)Fr=(3.6 to b
4.6)MmgB
Frictional Reistance at cleaning Station is given by: (a)Fcl=KclgB (b)
26 a
Fcl=Kclgb ( c)Fcl=Kcl+gB (d)Fcl=Kclg+B
which belt conveyor does prevents sliding down of material at an inclination
of more than 35 degrees with the horizontal: (a)Flat belt Conveyor
27 c
(b)Troughed belt Conveyor ( c) Blanket belt Conveyor (d)Woven Wire belt
Conveyor
Which of the following statement is false for Troughed belt conveyors :(a)
28 Used as a flexible belts(b) Depth deceases with incereasing no. of idlers ( b
c)They contains 5 idlers (d) They contains 3 idlers
What is the mass carrying capacity of flat belt conveyor if the volumetric
29 capacity is 0.55m3/hr and density of the material is 1500 kg/m3? : (a) 825 b
tons/hr (b)825kg/hr ( c) 2727 tons/hr (d) 2722 kg/hr
The mass carrying capacity of a conveyor is 200 ton/hr, if the speed of the
belt is 4m/s then what is the width of horizontal flat belt conveyor carrying
30 c
the load?( surcharge Factor= 0.075 and density=1000kg/m3) : (a)499.23
mm (b) 500 mm ( c)533.7 mm (d) Insufficient Data
The mass carrying capacity of a conveyor , if the speed of the belt is 1.75m/s
, the width of horizontal flat belt conveyor carrying the load is 650 mm ?(
31 a
surcharge Factor= 0.1 and density=1200kg/m3) : (a)216.38 tons/hr
(b)316.38 tons/hr ( c)216.38 kg/hr (d) Insufficient Data
The mass carrying capacity of a conveyor , if the speed of the belt is 1.75m/s
, the width of horizontal flat belt conveyor carrying the load is 800 mm ?(
32 a
surcharge Factor= 2.35*10^-4 and density=2 ton/m3) : (a)1.329 tons/hr
(b)1.32 tons/hr ( c)1.33 kg/hr (d) Insufficient Data
A horizontal belt conveyor is to be used for transporting 450 tons/hr of iron
33 ore with a mass density of 1750 kg/m3. if the surcharge factor is 0.06, b
determine the belt width?: (a)900 mm (b) 915 mm ( c)930 mm (d)950 mm
Length of pulley is given by : (a)Lp= 2B+S (b) Lp= B*2S ( c)Lp= B+S (d)Lp=
34 d
B+2S
A horizontal belt conveyor is to be used for transporting 500 tons/hr of iron
ore with a mass density of 1800 kg/m3. if the surcharge factor is 0.075,
35 b
determine the belt width?Belt Speed= 1.5 m/s: (a)900 mm (b) 980 mm (
c)1000 mm (d)1100 mm
Out of the following is not the standard belt width? :(a)900 mm (b)1000mm
36 d
( c)1200mm (d)1300 mm
Out of the following is not the standard belt width? :(a)400 mm (b)450mm
37 d
( c)500mm (d)550 mm
Out of the following is the standard belt width? :(a)200 mm (b)250mm (
38 c
c)300mm (d)350 mm
39 a
c)550mm (d)470 mm
40 c
c)1800mm (d)1900 mm
Cranes are the-----: (a)Hoisting Equipments (b)Surface and overhead
41 a
Equipments ( c) Conveyors(d) None
Angle of Lap factor for pulley when Ө<90° is : (a)0.02 to 0.03 (b)0.03 to 0.04
42 a
( c)0.05 to 0.06 (d) 0.01 to 0.02
Angle of Lap factor for pulley when 90°<Ө<180° is : (a)0.02 to 0.03 (b)0.03
43 b
to 0.04 ( c)0.05 to 0.06 (d) 0.01 to 0.02
Angle of Lap factor for pulley when Ө>=180° is : (a)0.02 to 0.03 (b)0.03 to
44 c
0.04 ( c)0.05 to 0.06 (d) 0.01 to 0.02
Frictional Resistance at loading station is given by: (a)F=(3.1 to 3.6)MmgB
45 d
(b)F=(3.1 to 3.6)MmgB ( c) F=(4.1 to 4.6)MmgB (d)F=M(V-Vi)
Method of unloading for flat belt conveyors is: (a)Plow Discharge (b) Tripper
46 d
dischrge ( c) Head Pulley Discharge(d) All
It is not the type of idler: (a)Impact idler (b) Spring Idler ( c) Disc Idler (d)
47 d
Grooved Idler
Angle of Surcharge is always ------ than angle of repose: (a)less (b)more (
48 a
c)equal to (d)none
Angle of Repose is always ------ than angle of Surcharge: (a)less (b)more (
49 b
c)equal to (d)none
What is the mass carrying capacity of flat belt conveyor if the volumetric
50 capacity is 0.45m3/hr and density of the material is 1200 kg/m3? : (a) 54 d
tons/hr (b)450kg/hr ( c) 540 tons/hr (d) 540 kg/hr
Which of the following is the type of take up device? : (a)Screw type
51 d
(b)Vertical Gravity type ( c)Horizontal Gravity type (d) All
The rate at which material is carried by the conveyor is called as: (a)Density
52 c
of the Conveyor (b) Volume ( c)Capacity of the conveyor (d) Mass
The width on which material is present on the belt is called as: (a)Width of
53 b
belt (b)Effective beltwidth ( c)Both (d) None
Relationship between effective belt width and width of belt is: (a) b= 0.09B-
54 c
0.05 (b)b= 0.5B-0.09 ( c)b= 0.9B-0.05 (d)b= 0.9B-0.5
Flowability factor when belt inclination angle is 16° to 20° is: (a)2.65*10^-4
55 b
(b)2.5*10^-4 ( c)2.35*10^-4 (d)2.20*10^-4
56 a
(b)2.5*10^-4 ( c)2.35*10^-4 (d)2.20*10^-4
57 c
(b)2.5*10^-4 ( c)2.35*10^-4 (d)2.20*10^-4
58 d
(b)2.5*10^-4 ( c)2.35*10^-4 (d)2.20*10^-4
The------conveyors consists of a pair of parallel endless roller chains running
59 a
on tracks supported by frames.: (a)Apron (b)screw ( c)Chain (d) Falt Belt
Which of the following Coveyor has highest probability of Slip? (a) Flat Belt
60 a
(b) Troghed Belt ( c) Chain (d) Apron
The ---- devices are used in belt conveyors to maintain adequate tension in
61 c
the belt? : (a) Idlers(b) Snub Pulleys ( c) Belt Take up Devices (d) Cleaner
MSD
Unit 4 Design of Cylinders and Pressure Vessels.
Sr. No Questions
1. Internal pressure of 2.5 Mpa acts on a pressure vessel of thickness 15 mm and internal
diameter of 1500 mm. What is the stress induced in longitudinal direction?
a. 36.63 N/mm2
b. 59.13 N/mm2
c. 65.62 N/mm2
d. 131.25 N/mm
Ans c. 65.62 N/mm2
2. Which type of formed threads are used for vertical pressure vessels in the pressure
range of 0.1 N/mm2 to 1.5 N/mm2?
a. Plain formed head
b. Torispherical dished head
c. Semi-elliptical dished head
d. All of the above
Ans b. Torispherical dished head
3 Design pressure for unfired pressure vessels is 1.05 times of _______
a. minimum working pressure
b. maximum working pressure
c. hydrostatic test pressure
d. none of the above
Ans b. maximum working pressure
4 Class 3 pressure vessels having welded joints are _________
a. fully radio-graphed
b. partially radio-graphed
c. spot radio-graphed
d. not radio-graphed
Ans d. not radio-graphed
5 Which type of welded joints are not included in class 3 pressure vessels?
a. Double welded butt joint with full penetration
b. Single welded but joint with back strip
c. Single full fillet lap joints
Ans c. Single full fillet lap joints
6 In unfired pressure vessels, category A consists of _________
a. joints connecting flanges and flat heads
b. welded joints connecting nozzles with main shell
c. circumferential welded joints joints
d. longitudinal welded joints
Ans d. longitudinal welded joints
7 What is the weld joint efficiency if pressure vessel is fabricated with single full fillet
lap joint?
a. 1.0
b. 0.55
c. 0.65
d. 0.85
Ans b. 0.55
8 A cylindrical pressure vessel is subjected to an internal pressure of 3 MPa on internal
diameter of 1000 mm. The vessel is fabricated with single weld butt joint with back
strip and is not radio-graphed. What is the thickness of flat head, if head made of alloy
steel has an ultimate tensile strength of 400 N/mm2 ? (corrosion allowance = 2)
a. 110 mm
b. 120 mm
c. 150.23 mm
d. 152.13 mm
Ans a. 110 mm
9 A cylindrical pressure vessel is subjected to operating pressure of 0.55 Mpa and
corrosion allowance of 2. What is the thickness of pressure vessel shell if its internal
diameter is 2000 mm? (σall = 120 N/mm2 & ηl = 0.75)
a. 6.5 mm
b. 7 mm
c. 9 mm
d. 9.5 mm
Ans c.9 mm
10 A vessel is said to be thin if
a. Its wall has less thickness
b. Stresses are uniform over the entire thickness
c. Stresses vary at inner and at outer radius
Ans b. Stresses are uniform over the entire thickness
11 In a thin vessel, the true ratio of D/t is
a. D/t =20
b. D/t=10
c. D/t >20
d. D/t >10
Ans c. D/t >20
12 Hoop stress in a thin vessel is
a. pD/2t
b. pD/4t
c. pD/3t
d. None
Ans a. pD/2t
13 Radial stress in a thin shell is given by

a. pD/2t
b. pD/4t
c. pD/3t
d. None
Ans d. None
14 A thin cylindrical shell under internal pressure can fail by
a. Shear
b. Compression
c. Tension
d. None
Ans b. Tension
15 Failure of a thin spherical shell under internal pressure will be due to
a. Maximum shear stress
b. Principal compressive stress
c. Principal tensile stress
d. None
Ans C. Principal tensile stress
16 Stresses in a thin cylindrical shell under internal pressure is independent of
a. Diameter
b. Thickness
c. Length
d. Diameter and thickness
Ans c. Length
17 Design of a thin shell under pressure is done on the basis of
a. Radial stress
b. Longitudinal stress
c. Hoop stress
d. All the three stresses
Ans c. Hoop stress
18 The thickness of thin cylinder is determined on the basis of
(a) radial stress
(b) longitudinal stress
(c) circumferential stress
(d) principal shear stress
Ans (c) circumferential stress
19 The end-closure for tankers of milk, petrol or diesel is
(a) hemispherical head
(b) conical head
(c) torispherical head
(d) flat head
Ans (c) torispherical head
20 Weld joint efficiency is maximum when the pressure vessel is welded by (a)
single-welded butt joint with backing strip (b) single-welded butt joint without
backing strip (c) double-welded butt joint with full penetration (d) none of the
above
Ans (c) double-welded butt joint with full penetration
21 While designing pressure vessels according to ‘Code for unfired vessel IS2825’,
the design pressure is taken as
(a) 1.05(maximum operating pressure)
(b) 1.5(maximum operating pressure)
(c) 2(maximum operating pressure)
(d) 1.3(maximum operating pressure)
Ans (a) 1.05(maximum operating pressure)
22 Class 3 pressure vessels are to be designed according to ‘Code for unfired vessel
IS-2825’ when,
(a) operating pressure is less than 17.5 kgf/cm2
(b) operating temperature is more than 0°C and less than 250°C
(c) thickness of shell is less than 16 mm
(d) any one of the above
Ans (d) any one of the above
23 Class 1 pressure vessels are to be designed according to ‘Code for unfired vessel
IS-2825’ when,
a. hydrocyanic acid, carbonyl chloride or mustard gas are stored
b. operating temperature is more than -20°C
c. liquefied petroleum gas is stored
d. thickness of shell is less than 38 mm
Ans a. hydrocyanic acid, carbonyl chloride or mustard gas are stored
24 According to Lame’s equation, the thickness of cylindrical shell is given by,
Ans
25 According to Birnie’s equation, the thickness of cylindrical shell is given by,
Ans
26 According to Clavarino’s equation, the thickness of cylindrical shell is given by,
Ans
27 In thick cylinders, the tangential stress across the thickness of cylinder
(a) remains uniform throughout
(b) varies from internal pressure at the inner surface to zero at the outer surface
(c) varies from maximum value at the inner surface to minimum value at the
outer surface
(d) varies from maximum value at the outer surface to minimum value at the
inner surface
Ans (c) varies from maximum value at the inner surface to minimum value at the
outer surface
28 In thick cylinders, the radial stress across the thickness of cylinder (a) remains
uniform throughout (b) varies from internal pressure at the inner surface to
zero at the outer surface (c) varies from maximum value at the inner surface to
minimum value at the outer surface (d) varies from maximum value at the
outer surface to minimum value at the inner surface
Ans (b) varies from internal pressure at the inner surface to zero at the outer surface
29 In thick cylinders, the axial stress across the thickness of cylinder
(a) remains uniform throughout
(b) varies from internal pressure at the inner surface to zero at the outer surface
(c) varies from maximum value at the inner surface to minimum value at the
outer surface
(d) varies from maximum value at the outer surface to minimum value at the
inner surface
Ans (a) remains uniform throughout
30 Autofrettage is,
(a) a surface coating process of cylinders for corrosion resistance
(b) a heat treatment process for cylinders to relieve residual stresses
(c) a process of pre-stressing the cylinder to develop residual compressive stress
at the inner surface
(d) a surface hardening process of cylinder to improve wear resistance 22
Ans (c) a process of pre-stressing the cylinder to develop residual compressive stress
at the inner surface
31 Autofrettage is achieved by,
(a) compound cylinder
(b) overloading the cylinder before putting it in service
(c) winding a wire under tension around the cylinder
(d) any one of the above methods
Ans (d) any one of the above methods
32 The thickness of thick cylindrical shell with closed ends and made of brittle
material is determined by,
(a) Lame’s equation
(b) Clavarino’s equation
(c) Birnie’s equation
(d) Barlow’s equation
Ans (a) Lame’s equation
33 The thickness of thick cylindrical shell with closed ends and made of ductile
Ans (b) Clavarino’s equation
34 The thickness of thick cylindrical shell with open ends and made of ductile
Ans (c) Birnie’s equation
35 In thin cylinders, the longitudinal stress is,
(a) 2(circumferential stress)
(b) 1/2(circumferential stress)
(c) 1/4(circumferential stress)
(d) 4(circumferential stress)
Ans (b) 1/2(circumferential stress)
36 The thickness of thin cylinder is determined on the basis of,
(a) radial stress
(b) longitudinal stress
(c) circumferential stress
(d) principal shear stress
Ans (c) circumferential stress
37 The piston rod of a hydraulic cylinder exerts an operating force of 10kN. The
allowable stress in the cylinder is 45N/mm². Calculate the thickness of the
cylinder using Lame’s equation. Diameter of the cylinder is 40mm and pressure
in cylinder is 10MPa.
a) 2.05mm
b) 4.2mm
c) 5.07mm
d) None of the listed
Ans c) 5.07mm
t=D/2[√[σ+ P /σ-P] -1 ].
38 The piston rod of a hydraulic cylinder exerts an operating force of 10kN. The
allowable stress in the cylinder is 70N/mm². Calculate the thickness of the
cylinder using Clavarinoe’s equation. Diameter of the cylinder is 240mm.μ=0.3
and pressure in cylinder is 15MPa.
a) 35mm
b) 30mm
c) 27mm
Ans c) 27mm
t=D/2[√[σ+(1-2μ) P /σ-(1+μ)P] -1 ].
39 A seamless cylinder of storage capacity of 0.03mᵌis subjected to an internal
pressure of 21MPa. The ultimate strength of material of cylinder is
350N/mm².Determine the thickness of the cylinder if it is twice the diameter of
the cylinder.
a) 12mm
b) 4mm
c) 8mm
d) 16mm
Ans c) 8mm
t=PD/2σ.
40 A seamless cylinder of storage capacity of 0.03mᵌis subjected to an internal
pressure of 21MPa. The ultimate strength of material of cylinder is
350N/mm².Determine the length of the cylinder if it is twice the diameter of the
cylinder.
a) 540mm
b) 270mm
c) 400mm
d) 350mm
Ans a) 540mm
0.03=πd²L/4 and L=2d.
41 A thin cylindrical pressure vessel with closed-ends is subjected to internal
pressure. The ratio of circumferential (hoop) stress to the longitudinal stress is
a)0.25
b)0.50
c)1.0
d)2.0
Ans d)2.0
42 What is the condition to avoid joint separation of connected members in
cylinders.
a) Fm<0
b) Fm>0
c) Fm=0
Ans a) Fm<0
43 _______________closure is the weakest enclosure for cylindrical vessels.
a.)Hemispherical
b) Torispherical
c) Conical or flat plate
d) Elliptical
Ans c) Conical or flat plate
44 In hydrostatic testing of welded pipe (for leakage, strength etc.) the ratio of
minimum hydrostatic test pressure to internal design pressure is around
a. 0.5
b. 1.5
c. 2.5
d. 3.5
Ans b.1.5
45 A certain pressure vessel manufacturer avoids doing reinforcements calculations
for openings by always providing a reinforcing pad extending upto double the
diameter of the opening and of the same material and thickness as that of the
shell wall. If area compensation is accepted as a code guideline, his approach
leads to safe design
a. Only if the opening is on spherical vessel
b. Only if the opening is on a vertical cylindrical vessel
c. Only if the opening is on a horizontal cylindrical vessel
d. Irrespective of the shape of the vessel
Ans d. Irrespective of the shape of the vessel
46 Safety valves are provided in chemical equipments to guard against excessive
a. Temperature
b. Pressure/pressure fluctuation
c. Turbulence
d. Noise
Ans b. Pressure/pressure fluctuation
47 Welded joint efficiency in the design of chemical process equipment is taken as

a. 0.55
b. 0.75
c. 0.85
d. 0.95
Ans c. 0.85
48 Circumferential (hoop) stress in a thin cylindrical vessel under internal pressure
is __________ the longitudinal stress.
a. Half
b. Equal to
c. Twice
d. Eight times
Ans c. Twice
49 Cylindrical pressure vessels in horizontal condition is generally supported on a
__________ support.
a. Lug
b. Skirt
c. Saddle
d. Guy wire
Ans c. Saddle
50 For high pressure process equipments/vessels, the connected nozzle should be
a. Welded
b. Screwed
c. Flanged
d. Brazed
Ans c. Flanged
Unit –4 Design of Cylinders and Pressure Vessels
1. A cylinder is considered as thin cylinder when the ratio of inner diameter to the wall thickness is,
a. more than 15
b. less than 15
c. equal to 15
d. none of these criteria
2. A cylinder is considered as thick cylinder when the ratio of inner diameter to the wall thickness
is,
a. more than 15
b. less than 15
c. equal to 15
d. none of these criteria
3. In thin cylinders, the longitudinal stress is,
a. 2(circumferential stress)
b. 1/2(circumferential stress)
c. 1/4(circumferential stress)
d. 4(circumferential stress)
4. The thickness of thin cylinder is determined on the basis of,
a. radial stress
b. longitudinal stress
c. circumferential stress
d. principal shear stress
5. The thickness of thin cylindrical shell is given by,
a. P i D i ∕ 2 σ t
b. P i D i ⁄ 4 σ t
c. 2 P i D i ⁄ σ t
d. 4 P i D i ⁄ σ t
where D i , P i , and σ t are inner diameter, internal pressure and permissible
tensile stress respectively.
6. The thickness of thin spherical shell is given by,
a PiDi ∕ 2σt
b. P i D i ∕ 4 σ t
c. 2 P i D i ∕ σ t
d. 4 P i D i ∕ σ t
where D i , P i , and σ t are inner diameter, internal pressure and permissible tensile
stress respectively.
7. In thick cylinders, the tangential stress across the thickness of cylinder
a. remains uniform throughout

b. varies from internal pressure at the inner surface to zero at the outer surface
c. varies from maximum value at the inner surface to minimum value at the outer surface
d. varies from maximum value at the outer surface to minimum value at the inner surface
8. In thick cylinders, the radial stress across the thickness of cylinder

9. In thick cylinders, the axial stress across the thickness of cylinder

10. In thin cylinders, the tangential stress across the thickness of cylinder

11. The thickness of thick cylindrical shell with closed ends and made of brittle material is
determined by,
a. Lame’s equation
b. Clavarino’s equation
c. Birnie’s equation
d. Barlow’s equation
12. The thickness of thick cylindrical shell with closed ends and made of ductile material is
determined by,
13. The thickness of thick cylindrical shell with open ends and made of ductile material is
determined by,
14. The thickness of high-pressure oil and gas pipes is determined by,
15. Autofrettage is,
a. a surface coating process of cylinders for corrosion resistance

b. a heat treatment process for cylinders to relieve residual stresses
c. a process of pre-stressing the cylinder to develop residual compressive stress at the inner surface
d. a surface hardening process of cylinder to improve wear resistance
16. Autofrettage is achieved by,
a. compound cylinder
b. overloading the cylinder before putting it in service
c. winding a wire under tension around the cylinder
d. any one of the above methods
17. A gasket is made of,
a. asbestos or cork
b. lead, copper or aluminum
c. vulcanized rubber
d. any one of the above
18. Welded pressure vessels made of steel plates should be designed according to ‘Code for unfired
vessel IS-2825’ when,
a. internal pressure is from 1 kgf/cm 2 to 200 kgf/cm 2

b. internal diameter is less than 150 mm
c. water container is to be designed with capacities less than 500 litres
d. steam boilers and nuclear pressure vessels are to be designed
19. Class 1 pressure vessels are to be designed according to ‘Code for unfired vessel IS-2825’ when
a. hydrocyanic acid, carbonyl chloride or mustard gas are stored

b. operating temperature is more than -20 0 C
c. liquefied petroleum gas is stored
d. thickness of shell is less than 38 mm
20. Class 3 pressure vessels are to be designed according to ‘Code for unfired vessel IS-2825’ when,
a. operating pressure is less than 17.5 kgf/cm 2

b. operating temperature is more than 0 0 C and less than 250 0 C
c. thickness of shell is less than 16 mm
21. While designing pressure vessels according to ‘Code for unfired vessel IS- 2825’, the design
pressure is taken as
a. 1.05(maximum operating pressure)

b. 1.5(maximum operating pressure)
c. 2(maximum operating pressure)
d. 1.3(maximum operating pressure)
22. Weld joint efficiency is maximum when the pressure vessel is welded by
a. single-welded butt joint with backing strip

b. single-welded butt joint without backing strip
c. double-welded butt joint with full penetration
23. Type of domed heads for the pressure vessel is
a. hemispherical head
b. semi-ellipsoidal head
c. torispherical head
24. The end-closure for tall vertical pressure vessel is
b. conical head
d. flat head
25. The end-closure for tankers of milk, petrol or diesel is
b. conical head
d. flat head
26. Design for unfired pressure vessels is 1.05 times of -------

d. none of the bove
27. Class 3 pressure vessels having welded joints are ----
a. full radio graphed

b. partially radio graphed
c. spot radio graphed
d. not radio graphed
28. which type of welded joints are not included in class 3 pressure vessels?

29. Which type of formed threads are used for vertical pressure vessels in the pressure range of 0.1
N/mm2 to 1.5 N/mm2?

b. Torisherical dished head
c. Semi elliptical dished head
d. All of the above
30. Internal pressure of 2.5 Mpa acts on a pressure vessel of thickness 15 mm and internal diameter
of 1500 mm . What is the stress induced in longitudinal direction?
a. 36.63 N/mm2
b. 59.13 N/mm2
c. 65.62 N /mm2
d.131.25 N/ mm2
31. In unfired pressure vessels, category A consists of------

b. weldwd joints connecting nozzels with main shell
c. circumferential welded joints
32. Which of the following is not an unfired pressure vessel?
a. Heat exchanger
b. Storage vessels
c. Steam boilers
33. What is the wed joint efficiency if pressue vessel is fabricated with single full lap joint ?
a. 1.0
b. 0.55
c. 0.65
d. 0.85
34. A cylindrical pressure vessel is subjected to an internal pressure of 3 Mpa on internal diameter
of 1000 mm. The vessel is fabricated with single weld butt joint with back strip and is not radio
graphed . What is the thickness of flat head , if head made of alloy stell has an ultimate tensile
strength of 400 N/mm2 ? ( corrosion allowance =2 )
a. 110 mm
b. 120 mm
c. 150.23 mm
d. 152.13 mm
35. A cylindrical pressure vessel is subjected to operating pressure of 0.55 Mpa and corrosion
allowance of 2. What is the thickness of pressure vessel shell if its internal diameter is 2000 mm?
(σall=120 N/mm2 and ηl= 0.75)
a. 6.5 mm
b. 7 mm
c. 9 mm
d. 9.5 mm
36. A cylinder made of plain carbon steel has inner diameter 100 mm. What is the thickness of
cylinder if maximum internal pressure of 20 Mpa acts on it (σall =100 N/mm2 & poissons ratio =
0.3)
a. 11 mm
b. 15.36 mm
c. 22.32 mm
d. 80 mm
37. The ratio of di /t for thick cylinder is --------

(Where di = inner diameter , t= wall thickness )
a. greater than 20
b. less than 20
c. equal to 20
38. Which criteria of failure is used to indicate St Venent’s theory?

a. Maximum principle stress theoru
b. Maximum principle Strain theory
c. Shear stress theory
39. Selection of welding process does not depend on ----
a. thicness of material
b. availability of equipments
c. economics of the process
40. Which equation is used to determine wall thickness for brittel materials ?
a. Brinies equation
b. Claviros equation
c. Lames equation
d. All of the above
41. Claviros equation is applicable to cylinders with ----
a. close ends
b. open ends
c. both a and b
42. Why is autofrettage process used in pressure vessels?
a. Increase fatigue lifetime

b. To enhance carrying capacity
c. To introduce compressive residual stessin them
d.All of the above
43. Which equation is used to calculate thickness of an alloy steel cylinder with open ends?
a. Clavarinos equation
b. Birnies equation
c. lames equation
44. Example/ s of unfired pressure Vessels ?

a. Storage vessels
b. Reaction Vessels
c. Heat Exchanger
d. All of the above
45. Which of following pressure vessels do not come under unfired pressure vessels?
1. Steam boilers
2. Nuclear pressure Vessels
3. Storage Vessells
a. (1) and (2)

b. (1) and (3)
c. (3) and (2)
d. (1) (3) and (2)
46. Which statement is correct regarding Category A welded joints ?
a. longitudinal weldwe joint within the main shell, communnating chambers or nozzels
b. Circumferntial welded joint within main shell
c. Connecting flanges and flat heads
d. Connecting coo=mmunicating chamber
47. Pressure Vessels Classified in how many class / s--
a. Class 1
b. Class 2
c. Class 3
d. All of the above
48. Class 3 pressure Vessels operating at temp?
a. - 20 0 c
b. 0 to 250 0 c
c. 300 to 400 0 c
d. 400 to 500 0 c
49. Operating condition /s for pressure vessel as follows. Choose correct?
1. High or very low temp

2. High pressure
3. High flow rate
4. Corrosive Atomshpere
5. Sometimes corrosive fluid.
a. (1) (2) (3)

b. (1) (4) (5)
c. (3) (4) (5)
d. (1) (2) (3) (4) and (5)
50. The design of the unfired pressure vessels begins with selection of the design parameter/s such
as
a. Maximum working pressure (P max) and design pressure
b. Hydrostatic test pressure (Pi) and allowable design stress (σall)
c. corrosion Allowance (c)
d. All of the above
51. What is the meaning of Design pressure in pressure vessels----
a. The maximum pressure to which pressure vessels is subjected

b. It is the pressure of vessels is tested before put into use
c. Design pressure (Pi) is equal to 1.05 times maximum pressure
d. Hydrostatic test pressure is equal to 1.3 times design pressure
52. In how many ways pressure vessels shell designed--
a. Pressure vessel shell is subjected to Internal pressure

b. Pressure vessel shell under combined loading
c. Both (a) and (b)
d. Neither (a) and (b)
53. Which are different loads acting on cylindrical pressure vessel shell , While designing under
combined loading--
1. Internal pressur due to fluid

2. Weight of the vessel with its content
3. Wind load
4. Load due to offset piping
a. (1) (2) (4)

b. (2) (4) (3)
c. (3) (1) (2)
d. (1) (2) (3) (4)
54. Design of end closures in unfired pressure vessel /s classified as follows ...
1. Flat heads
2. Formed Heads
3. Plan formd heads
4. Conical head
a. (1) (2)
b. (2) (3)
c. (3) (4)
d. (1) (4)
55. Opening are provided in pressure vessels for, which purposes.Choose incorrect option
a. Inlet ang outlet connection and drain pipe connection

b. Pressure gauge connection and safety device connection
c. Manhole
d. Providing the additional thickness to the nozzel
56. Which of following sentence /s correct for area for area method compensation.
1. In the portion of the shell as exess thickness

2. In the portion of the nozzle outside the vessel as exess thickness
3. In the portion of the nozzle inside the vessls as excess thickness and in the reinforcement pad
4. All of the above
57. Method /s of reniforcement classified as belows ?
a. External reniforcement
b. Internal Reniforcement
c. Balanced reniforcement
d. All of the above
58. How Increases pressure capacity (Pre – Stressing) of thick cylinder . Choose correct method /s
a. Autofrettage
b. Wire wound cylinder and Tap wound cylinder
c. Compound Cylinder
d. All of the above
59. According to Lame’s equation, the thickness of cylindrical shell is given
by,
a. P i D i ⁄ 2 σ t
b. t = D i ⁄ 2 ( √σ t + ( 1 − 2 μ ) P i ∕ √σ t − ( 1 + μ ) P i - 1 )
c. t = D i ⁄ 2 ( √σ t + ( 1 − μ ) P i ∕ √σ t − ( 1 + μ ) P i - 1 )
d. t = D i ⁄ 2 ( √σ t + P i ∕ √σ t − P i - 1 )
where D i , P i , σt and μ are inner diameter, internal pressure, permissible tensile

stress and Poisson’s ratio respectively.
60. According to Clavarino’s equation, the thickness of cylindrical shell is

given by,
a. P i D i ⁄ 2 σ t
b. t = D i ⁄ 2 ( √σ t + ( 1 − 2 μ ) P i ∕ √σ t − ( 1 + μ ) P i - 1 )
c. t = D i ⁄ 2 ( √σ t + ( 1 − μ ) P i ∕ √σ t − ( 1 + μ ) P i - 1 )
d. t = D i ⁄ 2 ( √σ t + P i ∕ √σ t − P i - 1 )

61. According to Birnie’s equation, the thickness of cylindrical shell is given

by,
a. P i D i ⁄ 2 σ t
b. t = D i ⁄ 2 ( √σ t + ( 1 − 2 μ ) P i ∕ √σ t − ( 1 + μ ) P i - 1 )
c. t = D i ⁄ 2 ( √σ t + ( 1 − μ ) P i ∕ √σ t − ( 1 + μ ) P i - 1 )
d. t = D i ⁄ 2 ( √σ t + P i ∕ √σ t − P i - 1 )

UNIT – I Design of Machine Tool Gear Boxs
1. Diameter range is high in geometric progression due to _________ spindle speed.

a. Low
b. High
c. Constant
Ans: a

a. Difference between reciprocal of two successive spindle speeds is constant
b. Difference between two successive spindle speeds is constant
c. Ratio of two successive spindle speeds is constant.
d. Ratio of two successive spindle speeds is variable.
Ans: a
3. Ratio of two spindle speeds is constant in _________ progression.
a.Arithmetic
b.Geometric
c.Harmonic
d.None of the above
Ans: b
4. What is the purpose of using a gear box?
a.To increase torque
b.To increase speed
c.Converts single input speed into multiple output speeds
d.All of the above
Ans: d
5. Which of the following statements is true for structure/speed diagrams?
a.Structure diagrams gives range ratio of spindle speeds
b.Speed diagrams do not give range ratio of spindle speeds
c.Speed diagrams consider motor speed
d.All of the above
Ans: b
6. What is the maximum percentage loss of economic cutting speed if geometric progression
ratio = 1.06 ?
a.17.0 %
b.11.5 %
c.5.7 %
d.2.9 %
Ans: d
7. A machine tool has minimum speed of 100 r.p.m. How many speed steps are required by
it to achieve speed of 200 rpm? (Geometric progression ratio = 1.06)
a.11
b.12
c.13
d.14
Ans: b
8. Maximum and minimum diameter of a shaft to be machined is 100 mm and 80 mm
respectively. What is the maximum spindle speed if cutting velocity is 40 m/min?
a.120 r.p.m
b.127 r.p.m
c.160 r.p.m.
d.636 r.p.m.
Ans: c
9. Economic cutting speed is minimum if geometric ratio is _________
a.Minimum
b.Maximum
c.Equal to economic cutting speed
d.None of the above
Ans: a
10. What is the geometric progression ratio if maximum and minimum spindle speeds are
500 r.p.m and 300 r.p.m respectively? (Number of speed steps = 7)
a.0.91
b.1.5
c.1.08
d.2.0
Ans: c
11. In machine tool gear box, optimum number of speed steps with increments between---
a. 5 to 10 %
b. 10 to 15 %
c. 15 to 20 %
d. 20 to 25 %
Ans: c
12. In case of single speed gear box for every input speed there is/are only -----output speed.
a. Three
b. Two
c. One
Ans: c
13. In arthmetic progression the------between any two successive spindle speed is constant.
a. Addition
b. Substraction
c. Reciprocal
Ans: a
14. Multispeed drive with arithmetic progression is /are good in -----spindle speed range.
a. High
b. Low
c. Both a and b
Ans: a
15. Multispeed drive with arithmetic progression is /are poor in -----spindle speed range.
a. High
b. Low
c. Both a and b
Ans: b
16. In geometric progression the ------of any two successiv espindle speed is constant.
a. Addition
b. Substraction
c. Ratio
Ans: c
17. Multispeed drive with geometric progression is / are poor in------spindle speed range.
a. High
b. Low
c. Both a and b
Ans: b
18. Multispped drive with geometric progression gives better gear box design feature.
a. True
b. False
Ans: a
19. In which laws of stepped regulation of speeds gives constant loss of economic cutting
speed.
a. Geometric progression
b. Arthmetic progression
c. Harmonic progression
Ans: a
20. In harmonic progression the -----between reciprocal of any two successive spindle speed
is constant.
a. Addition
b. Difference
c. Insufficiant data
Ans: b
21. Multispeed drive with harmonic progression is / are poor in------spindle speed range.
a. High
b. Low
c. Both a and b
Ans: a
22.Multispeed drive with harmonic progression is / are good in------spindle speed range.
a. High
b. Low
c. Both a and b
Ans: b
23. If speed steps are obtained by arithematic or harmonic progression the number of gear
pairs required are equal to the number of speed steps.
a. This makes gear box bulky
b. Gear shifiting time consuming as well as inconvenient
c. Entire arrangement economically infeasible
d. All of the above
Ans: d
24. The constant loss of economic cutting speed over the total spindle speed range,the
spindle speed must be in----
Ans: a
25. Compact and better gear box designed obtained in which law---
Ans: a
26. The multispeed drive with ---- law is commanly used in machine tool drive.
a. Arthmetic progression
b. Harmonic progression
c. Geometric progression
Ans: c
27. The range ratio for the multispeed gear box is ---
a. The ratio of maximum output speed of gear box to the minimum output speed of the gear
box.
b. The ratio of minimum output speed of gear box to the maximum output speed of the gear
box.
Ans: a
28. The value of range ratio Rn is large for general purpose machine tools--
a. True
b. False
Ans: a
29. The value of range ratio Rn is small for secial purpose machine tools--
a. True
b. False
Ans: a
30. The smaller value of geometric progression ratio ф is / are used in---
a. Large sized heavy duty machine
b. Automats
c. Both a and b
Ans: c
31.The larger value of geometric progression ratio ф is used in---
a. Small sized special purpose machine tools
b. Large sized heavy duty machine
c. Automats
d.None of the above
Ans: a
32. For the higher the value of geometric progression ratio ф the loss of economic cutting
speed is--
a. Low
b. High
c. Moderate
d. Insufficiant data
Ans: a
33. For the lower value of geometric progression ratio ф the loss of economic cutting speed
is--
a. Minimum
b. Maximum
c. Moderate
d. Insufficiant data
Ans: b
34. For the lower value of geometric progression ratio ф the number of speed steps or
spindle speeds Z is---
a. Large
b. Small
Ans: a
35. For the higher value of geometric progression ratio ф the number of speed steps or
spindle speeds Z is---
a. High
b. Low
Ans: b
36. Standard values of geometric progression ratio ф for series ф20/3 equal to----
a. 1.41
b. 1.56
c. 1.78
d. 2
Ans: a
37. In order to compromise between the loss of economic cutting speed and the compactness
of the drive the value of ф is selected.
a. 2 < ф ≤ 3
b. 3 < ф ≤ 4
c. 4 < ф ≤ 5
d. 1 < ф ≤ 2
Ans: d
38. Recommende value of ф for heavy duty machine tools and automats--
a. 1.12
b. 1.26
c. 1.14
d. 1.58
Ans: a
39. Recommende value of ф for medium size general purpose machine tools--
a. 1.12
b. 1.26
c. 1.14
d. 1.58
Ans: c
40. Number of spindle speed stepsin machine tool gear box indicated by letter--
a. Z
b. ф
c. Rn
Ans: a
41. The normally selected value/ s of Z is /are --
a. 4
b. 6
c. 8
d. All of the above
Ans: d
42. letter P indicates in machine tool gear box as ?
a. Number of speed steps per stage
b. Number of spindle speed steps
c. Geometric ratio
d. Range ratio
Ans: a
43. When structural formulae to be feasible , the product PkXk must be a factor of Z--
a. True
b. False
Ans: a
44. For machine tool gear box the transmission range should not be grater than ---
a. 9
b. 10
c. 11
d. 8
Ans: d
45. In structural digram, Each zone between two adjacent vertical lines reperesents a---
a. Transmission group
b. Stage
c. Both a and b
Ans: c
46.In speed diagram, Each horizontal line represents a---
a. Spindle speed
b. Spindle steps
c. Both a and b
Ans: a
47. What is /are the limitation/s of structure diagram---
a.It gives, The spindle speeds
b. It gives, The motor speeds
c. It gives ,The geometric progression ratio
d. All of the above
Ans: d
48. Number of speed steps in any stage should not be more than---
a. 3
b. 4
c. 5
d. 6
Ans: a
49. The speed ratio in last stage should be as ---------as possible.
a. Maximum
b. Minimum
c. Insufficient data
Ans: a
50. Sailent feature/ s of speed diagram is / are---
a. It gives ,The number of shaft in the gera box
b. It gives ,The number of gears on each shaft
c. It gives , the spindle speeds
d. All of the above
Ans: d
51. To avoid interference on gears ,the number of teeth on the smallest gear of the gear box
is---
a. 21
b. 16
c. 18
d. 20
Ans: c
52. If gear pairs on parallel shafts have same module the sum of number of teeth on mating
gear must be same---
a. Correct
b. Incorrect
Ans: a
53. Minimum difference between number of teeth of adjacent gears in a change gera block
must be at least---
a. 6
b. 3
c. 4
d. 5
Ans: c
54. Spacing between two adjacent gear on the shaft must be grater than -----the face width.
a. Twice
b. Thrice
Ans: a
55. If the line is inclined upwards from left to right in speed diagram repersent the----
a. Increment in speed
b. Decrement in speed
c. There is no speed change
Ans: a
56. If the line is inclined downwards from left to right in speed diagram repersent the----
Ans: b
57. If the line is straight from left to right in speed diagram repersent the----
Ans: c
58. Conditiom for optimum structure diagram---
a. X1 < X2 < X3
b. X3 < X2 < X1
c. X2 < X1 < X3
d. X3 < X1 < X2
Ans: a
59. Letter N indicate in machine tool gear box design ?
a. Number of stages of gear box
b. Number of spindle speed steps
c. Range ratio
d. geometric progression ratio
Ans: a
60. Range ratio for central lathe is --
a. 8-10
b. 15-25
c. 15-30
d. 40-60
Ans: d
61. Deviation of actual spindle speeds from calculated spindle speeds must not exceed--
a. 10 (ф-1)
b. 20 (ф-1)
c. 30 (ф-1)
d. 40 (ф-1)
Ans: a
62. The speed diagram contains the number of horizontal lines required for locating ?
a. All spindle speds
b. Electric motor speed
c. Both a and b
Ans: c
63. Zth Spindle speed in Arithematic progression ----
a. nz = nmax- nmin/(Z-1)
b. nz = (nmax/nmin)1/Z-1
c. nz = 1/nz - 1/n1
Ans: a
64. Zth Spindle speed in geometric progression ----
c. nz = 1/nz - 1/n1
Ans: b
65. Zth Spindle speed in harmonic progression ----
c. nz = 1/nz - 1/n1
Ans: c
66. ф Geometric progression ratio is equal to
a. ф = (nmax/nmin)1/Z-1
b. ф = Rn1/Z-1
c. Both a and b
Ans: c
UNIT II Statistical Considerations in Design
1. Histogram is
a. A set of rectangles
b. A line graph of class frequency plotted against class marks
c. A bell shaped smooth curve
Ans: a
2. Frequency polygon is
a. A set of rectangles
b.A line graph of class frequency plotted against class marks
c. A bell shaped smooth curve
Ans: b
3. Central tendency of population is
a. Spread of data or extend to which the observations are scattered
b. Mid point of distribution where most of the data cluster
c. Concentration of data at either low or high end
d. Distribution with sharp peak
Ans: b
4. Dispersion of population is
d. Distribution with sharp peak
Ans: a
5. Skewness of population is

d. Measure of sharp peak
Ans: c
6. Kurtosis of population is
d. Measure of sharp peak
Ans: d
7. Central tendency of population is measured in units of
a. Standard deviation
b. Arithmetic mean
c. Standard variable
d. Square of standard de
Ans: b
8. Dispersion of population is measured in units of
b.Arithmetic mean
c.Geometric mean
d. Square of standard deviation
Ans: a
9. Standard variable is
a. Square of standard deviation
b.Arithmetic mean
c. Root mean square deviation from the mean

d. Deviation from mean in units of standard deviation
Ans: d
10. Standard deviation is
a. Square of standard variable
b.Arithmetic mean
c. Root mean square deviation from the mean
d. Deviation from mean in units of standard deviation
Ans: c
11. The area below normal curve from (Z = - ∞) to (Z = + ∞) is
a.1
b.0.6827
c. 0.9545
d. 0.9973
where Z is standard variable
Ans: a
12. The area below normal curve from (Z = - 1) to (Z = + 1) is
a. 1
b. 0.6827
c. 0.9545
d. 0.9973
Ans: b
a.1
b. 0.6827
c. 0.9545
d. 0.9973
Ans: c
a.1
b. 0.6827
c. 0.9545
d. 0.9973
Ans: d
15. When two populations with means μ X and μ Y are added, the mean of resultant
population is given by,
a. ( μ X + μ Y )
b. ( μ X − μ Y )
c. ( μ X μ Y )
d. ( μ X / μ Y )
Ans: a
16. When population Y with means μ Y is subtracted from population X with mean μ X , the
mean of resultant population is given by,
a. ( μ X + μ Y )
b. ( μ X − μ Y )
c. ( μ X μ Y )
d. ( μ X / μ Y )
Ans: b
17. When two populations with means μ X and μ Y are multiplied, the mean of resultant
a. ( μ X + μ Y )
b. ( μ X − μ Y )
c. ( μ X μ Y )
d. ( μ X / μ Y )
Ans: c
18. When population X with mean μ X , is divided by population Y with mean μ Y , the
mean of resultant population is given by,
a. ( μ X + μ Y )
b. ( μ X − μ Y )
c. ( μ X μ Y )
d. ( μ X / μ Y )
Ans: d
19. When two populations X and Y are added, the standard deviation of resultant population
is given by,
a. ( σ ˆ X + σ ˆ Y )
b. ( σ ˆ 2X + σ ˆ 2Y )
c. √( σ ˆ 2X + σ ˆ 2Y )
d. √( σ ˆ 2X − σ ˆ 2Y )
Ans: c
20. When population Y is subtracted from population X, the standard deviation of resultant
a. ( σ ˆ X + σ ˆ Y )
b. ( σ ˆ 2X + σ ˆ 2Y )
c. ( σ ˆ 2X + σ ˆ 2Y )
d. ( σ ˆ 2X − σ ˆ 2Y )
Ans: c
21. The resultant population is normally distributed,
a. When populations of two normally distributed random variables are added

b. When populations of two normally distributed random variables are subtracted
c. When populations of two normally distributed random variables are multiplied
d. Any one of above
Ans: d
22. In statistically controlled system,
a. Variations due to assignable causes are corrected
b. Variations due to chance causes are corrected
c. Variations due to assignable and chance causes are corrected
d. None of these
Ans: a
23. There is no rejection of components when
a. Design tolerance is equal to ( ± 3 σ ˆ ) and the process is centered
b. Design tolerance is slightly more than ( ± 3 σ ˆ )
c. Design tolerance is ( ± 4 σ ˆ )
d. Any one of above
Ans: d
24. The reliability of ball bearing selected from manufacture’s catalogue is
(a) 90%
(b) 50%
(c) 99%
(d) More than 90%
Ans: a
25. What is the standard deviation of clearance population for the diameter of shaft and hole
assembly specified below?

a.0.097 mm
b.0.059 mm
c.0.036 mm
d.0.390 mm
Ans: b
26. Which of the following curves have the mean value equal to zero in the graph of
frequency vs random variable?
a.Normal distribution curve

b.Standard normal distribution curve
c.Both a. and b.
d.None of the above
Ans: b
27. What is the relation between standard deviation(σ) and arithmetic mean (μ) to determine
coefficient of variation (C)?
a.C = σ + μ
b.C = σ – μ
c.C = σ / μ
d.C = σ x μ
Ans: c
28. Assignable causes are caused due to changes in _________
a. Manufacturing process
b. Material
c. Inspection process
d. All of the above
Ans: d
29. If a relief valve has reliability of 0.989, how many failures are expected in testing 1000
such relief valves?
a. 111
b.100
c.10
d.11
Ans: d
30. Failure rate for safety valve working for 400 hours is 3 x 10–6 failures/hour. What is the
reliability of safety valve?
a.0.998
b.0.989
c.0.888
d.0.899
Ans: a
31. What is meant by hazard rate?
a.Number of failures per unit time per number of items when exposed for same time
b.Probability of test specimen fails between time t1and t1+ dt1which survives for time t1
c.Both a. and b.
d.None of the above
Ans: c
32. What causes infant mortality in mechanical equipments?

a.Design errors
b.Manufacturing defects
c.Installation defects
d.All of the above
Ans: d
33. A plain carbon steel has mean yield strength of 300 N/mm2 and standard deviation of 50
N/mm2. What is the mean and standard deviation of margin of safety, if mean tensile stress
of 250 N/mm2 and standard deviation of 65 N/mm2 acts on it?
a. 23.45 N/mm2, 50 N/mm2

b. 50 N/mm2, 82 N/mm2
c. 82 N/mm2, 7.07 N/mm2
d. 7.07 N/mm2, 50 N/mm2
Ans: b
34. What is meant by mean time to failure (MTTF)?

Ans: c
35. The variation in an apperantly identical componat are due to---
a. Variation in material
b. Variation in manufaturing process
c. Variation in workmanship
d. All of the above
Ans: d
36. It is practically imposible to produce exactly identical component of ---
a. Same geometrical properties
b. Same material properties
c. Same functional properties
d. All of the above
Ans: d
37. Assigenable cause do not occur at random but are the result of changes in the material,
manufacturing process, inpection process.
a. True
b. False
Ans: a
38. In a frequncy distribution , there are different measures of central value or central
tendancy. Choose correct option.
a. Arithematic mean
b. Median
c. Mode
d. All of the above
Ans: d
39. The dispression or variation or spread of a frequncy distribution is measured in number

of units like--
b. Number of units
c. Quartile Deviation
d. All of the above
Ans: d
40. Coefficient of variation is defined as----
a. Ratio of the standard deviation to the arithematic mean
b. Ratio of mean deviation to the arithematic mean
c. Ratio of quartile deviation to the arthematic mean
Ans: a
41. In standard normal distribution curve the mean is equal to---
a. 1
b. 0
c. -1
d. 2
Ans: b
42. In standard normal distribution curve the standard deviation is equal to---
a. 1
b. 2
c. -1
d. 3
Ans: a
43. In standard normal distribution curve the area under curve is always equal to---
a. 2
b. 3
c. 4
d. 1
Ans: d
44. In normal distribution curve the standard deviation is any value of ---
a. Ψ
b. ˆб
c. μ
d. z
Ans: b
45. In normal distribution curve the mean is only value of ---
a. Ψ
b. ˆб
c. μ
d. z
Ans: c
46. In normal distribution curve the random variable is--
a. X
b. ˆб
c. μ
d. z
Ans: a
47. In normal distribution curve the standard variable is--
a. X
b. ˆб
c. μ
d. z
Ans: d
48. Distribution of population under normal distribution curve population within band
μ + 3ˆб equal to
a. 99.73 %
b. 95.45 %
c. 68.27 %
d. 78.25 %
Ans: a
49. Distribution of population under normal distribution curve population within band
μ + 2ˆб equal to
a. 99.73 %
b. 95.45 %
c. 68.27 %
d. 78.25 %
Ans: b
50. The mode is / are obeservation/ s that occurs--------
a. Most frequntly
b. Not frequntly
Ans: a
51. When the design tolerance is grater than the natural tolerance there is---
a. No rejection
b. Rejection
Ans: a
52. When the design tolerance is equal to the natural tolerance there is---
a. No rejection
b. Rejection
Ans: a
53. When the design tolerance is less than the natural tolerance there is---
a. No rejection
b. Rejection
Ans: b
54. Reliability it is usually denoted by R and is expressed by a number within the range---
a. 0 ≤ R ≤ 1
b. -1 ≤ R ≤ 0
c. 1 ≤ R ≤ 2
d. 2 ≤ R ≤ 3
Ans: a
55. Reliability is defined as the probability that a component , system or device will perform
without failure for a specified period of time under the specified operating conditions.
a. Incorrect
b. Correct
Ans: b
UNIT III
Question 1 The Objective of Material Handling System* 1
Option A Accuracy in load transportation
Option B Transportation of load without damage
Option C Low initial and operating cost
Option D all of above
Answer D
Question 2 Economy in material handling can be achieved by______* 1
Option A employing gravity feed movements
Option B minimizing distance of travel
Option C by carrying material to destination without using manual labour
Option D all of the above
Answer D
Question 3 Unit load states that____ * 1
Option A materials should be moved in lots
Option B one unit should be moved at a time
Option C both ‘a’ and ‘b’
Option D none of the above
Answer A
Question 4 Match the following and the correct order is____* 3
Option A A-1, B-2, C-3

Option B A-2, B-1, C-3
Option C A-3, B-2, C-1
Option D A-2, B-3, C-1
Answer B
Question 5 Which of the following statements is false for troughed belt conveyors?* 2
Option A 1 and 2
Option B 2 and 3
Option C 3 and 4
Option D None of the above
Answer C
Question 6 Which of the following belt conveyors have low volume carrying capacity?* 1
Option A Flat belts
Option B Troughed belts
Option C Both of above
Answer A
Question 7 What is the mass capacity of flat belt conveyor if volumetric capacity 0.55 m3/hr? (ρ = 1500 kg/m3)* 3
Option A 825 tons/hr
Option B 825 kg/hr
Option C 2.727 tons/hr
Option D 2722 kg/hr
Answer B
An inclined belt conveyor is used for loading goods. If speed of the belt having 1500 mm width is 3 m/s
then what is the volumetric capacity of the conveyor?(For 21 degree, k= 2.35 x 10 2.5 x 10-3 m3/s–4)*
Question 8 3
Option A 1.75 x 10^-3 m3/s
Option B 1.5 x 10^-3 m3/s
Option C 1.19 x 10^-3 m3/s
Option D 2.5 x 10^-3 m3/s
Answer 1.19 x 10^-3 m3/s
Question 9 The capacity of a conveyor belt is depends on ______* 1
Option A belt speed
Option B a continuous supply of products
Option C distance between the products being conveyed
Option D all of above
Answer D
Question 10 Which type of conveyor is shown in figure below* 2
Option A Flat belt conveyor

Option B Blanket belt conveyor
Option C Troughed belt conveyor
Option D Woven wire belt conveyor
Answer C
Question 11 Angle of repose * 1
Option A Angle made by the surface of pile of material with horizontal
Option B Angle measured with respect to horizontal plane of surface of material by moving a belt
Option C Capacity to move by flow
Answer A
Question 12 For very loose and free material Angle of repose is _____* 1
Option A more
Option B less
Option C same as angle of surcharge
Option D None of above
Answer
Question 13 Describe the type of idler shown in figure* 2
Option A roller
Option B rubber covered
Option C Impact
Option D disc
Answer C
Question 14 Material factor for pile is represented by_____* 1
Option A K1
Option B K2
Option C K3
Option D K4
Answer A
Question 15 Where do adjust the tension on a conveyor belt?* 1
Option A at ending point of conveyor
Option B at starting point of conveyor
Option C at roller
Option D at the take-up pulley
Answer A
Question 16 Impact idlers are used in a belt conveyor at* 1
Option A the return point
Option B the loading points
Option C an interval of 15m on a conveyor run
Option D none of these
Answer B
Question 17 Volumetric capacity of inclined belt conveyor is___* 2
Option A Q=C*b^2*V
Option B Q=k*b^2*V
Option C Q= C*V*b^2
Option D Q=k*V*b^2
Answer C
Question 18 Which material is classified as bulk material * 1
Option A coal
Option B iron ore
Answer A
Question 19 Belt conveyors are operated in_____ * 1
Option A vertical plane
Option B horizontal plane
Option C inclined plane
Option D smooth surface on all of these planes
Answer D
Question 20 Resisting force on conveyor belt shown in below figure is at _________* 1
Option A Lifting of material

Option B Idlers
Option C Loading station
Option D Unloading station
Answer B
Question 20 Material handling consists of movement of material from 1
Option A one machine to another

Option B one shop to another shop
Option C stores to shop
Answer D
1
Question 21 The following is used to transport materials having flat bottoms
Option A Belt conveyor

Option B Roller conveyor
Option C Chain conveyor
Answer B
Question 22 Fork lift truck is used for 1
Option A lifting and lowering

Option B vertical transportation
Answer C
Question 23 Cranes are used for 1
Option A lifting and lowering

Option B vertical transportation
Answer C
Question 24 Which of the following is a property of bulk load? 1
Option A Hardness
Option B Cake forming tendency
Option C Suspension part
Option D Weight
Answer B
Question 25 What are bulk loads? 1
Option A Lump of material

Option B Single rigid mass
Option C Homogeneous particles
Option D Heterogeneous particles
Answer B
o
Question 26 Which belt conveyor prevents sliding down of material at an inclination of 55 with horizontal? 1
Option A Flat belt conveyor

Option B Troughed belt conveyor
Option C Blanket belt conveyor
Option D Woven wire belt conveyors
Answer C
Mass capacity of a conveyor is 200 ton/hr, if speed of the belt is 4 m/s then what is the width of
3
Question 27 horizontal flat belt conveyor carrying the load? (Surcharge factor = 0.075 & ρ = 1000 kg/m ) 3
Option A 499.23 mm
Option B 500.0 mm
Option C 533.7 mm
Option D Insufficient data
Answer 533.7 mm
Question 28 The angle of repose depends on 1
Option A shape of the material

Option B smoothness of the material
Option C degree of fineness of the material
Answer degree of fineness of the material
Question 29 Which of the following application is a belt conveyor used for?

1
Option A Material transportation over long distances
Option B Material transportation within premises
Option C Material transportation for processing
Option D All of the mentioned
Answer D
Question 30 Statement 1: It is generally not possible to change the direction of flow with belt conveyors. 2
Statement 2: If belt conveyors are to be used in the bent position, slat belts are used.
Option A True, False
Option B True, True
Option C False, False
Option D False, True
Answer B
UNIT IV
Sr No. Questions Marks
Question 1 A cylinder is considered as thin cylinder when the ratio of inner diameter to the wall thickness is 1
Option A more than 15
Option B less than 15
Option C equal to 15
Option D none of these criteria
Answer A
Question 2 A cylinder is considered as thick cylinder when the ratio of inner diameter to the wall thickness is 1
Option A more than 15
Option B less than 15
Option C equal to 15
Option D none of these criteria
Answer B
1
Question 3 In thin cylinders, the longitudinal stress is,
Option A 2(circumferential stress)
Option B 1/2(circumferential stress)
Option C 1/4(circumferential stress)
Option D 4(circumferential stress)
Answer B
Question 4 The thickness of thin cylinder is determined on the basis of 1
Option A radial stress

Option B longitudinal stress
Option C circumferential stress
Option D principal shear stress
Answer circumferential stress
C
Question 5 The thickness of thin cylindrical shell is given by, 2
Option A PiDi/2σt
Option B PiDi/4σt
Option C 2PiDi/σt
Option D 4PiDi/σt
Answer A
Question 6 The thickness of thin spherical shell is given by, 2
Option A PiDi/2σt
Option B PiDi/4σt
Option C 2PiDi/σt
Option D 4PiDi/σt
Answer B
Question 7 In thick cylinders, the tangential stress across the thickness of cylinder
1
Option A remains uniform throughout
Option B varies from internal pressure at the inner surface to zero at the outer surface
Option C varies from maximum value at the inner surface to minimum value at the outer surface
Option D varies from maximum value at the outer surface to minimum value at the inner surface
Answer C
Question 8 In thick cylinders, the radial stress across the thickness of cylinder 1

Answer B
Question 9 In thick cylinders, the axial stress across the thickness of cylinder 1

Answer A
Question 10 In thin cylinders, the tangential stress across the thickness of cylinder 1

Answer A
Question 11 The thickness of thick cylindrical shell with closed ends and made of brittle material is determined by,
1
Option A Lame’s equation
Option B Clavarino’s equation
Option C Birnie’s equation
Option D Barlow’s equation
Answer A
Question 12 The thickness of thick cylindrical shell with closed ends and made of ductile material is determined by, 1

Answer B
Question 13 The thickness of thick cylindrical shell with open ends and made of ductile material is determined by, 1

Answer C
Question 14 The thickness of high-pressure oil and gas pipes is determined by,
1
Answer D
Question 15 Autofrettage is,

2
Option A a surface coating process of cylinders for corrosion resistance
Option B a heat treatment process for cylinders to relieve residual stresses
Option C a process of prestressing the cylinder to develop residual compressive stress at inner surface
Option D a surface hardening process of cylinder to improve wear resistance
Answer C
Question 16 Autofrettage is achieved by, 2
Option A compound cylinder

Option B overloading the cylinder before putting it in service
Option C winding a wire under tension around the cylinder
Option D any one of the above methods
Answer D
Question 17 A gasket is made of, 2
Option A asbestos or cork

Option B lead, copper or aluminum
Option C vulcanized rubber
Option D any one of the above
Answer D
Welded pressure vessels made of steel plates should be designed according to ‘Code for unfired vessel IS-2825’
Question 18 when, 2
Option A internal pressure is from 1 kgf/cm2 to 200 kgf/cm2

Option B internal diameter is less than 150 mm
Option C water container is to be designed with capacities less than 500 litres
Option D steam boilers and nuclear pressure vessels are to be designed
Answer A
Question 19 Class 1 pressure vessels are to be designed according to ‘Code for unfired vessel IS-2825’ when 2
Option A hydrocyanic acid, carbonyl chloride or mustard gas are stored

Option B operating temperature is more than -200C
Option C liquefied petroleum gas is stored
Option D thickness of shell is less than 38 mm
Answer A
Question 20 Class 3 pressure vessels are to be designed according to ‘Code for unfired vessel IS-2825’ when, 2
Option A operating pressure is less than 17.5 kgf/cm2

Option B operating temperature is more than 00C and less than 2500C
Option C thickness of shell is less than 16 mm
Answer D
While designing pressure vessels according to ‘Code for unfired vessel IS- 2825’, the design pressure is taken as
Question 21
2
Option A 1.05(maximum operating pressure)
Option B 1.5(maximum operating pressure)
Option C 2(maximum operating pressure)
Option D 1.3(maximum operating pressure)
Answer A
Question 22 Weld joint efficiency is maximum when the pressure vessel is welded by 1
Option A single-welded butt joint with backing strip

Option B single-welded butt joint without backing strip
Option C double-welded butt joint with full penetration
Answer C
Question 23 Type of domed heads for the pressure vessel is
Option A hemispherical head

Option B semi-ellipsoidal head 1
Option C torispherical head
Answer D
Question 24 The end-closure for tankers of milk, petrol or diesel is

Option A hemispherical head 1
Option B semi-ellipsoidal head
Option D Flat head
Answer C
Question 25 The end-closure for tall vertical pressure vessel is 1

Option A hemispherical head
Option B semi-ellipsoidal head
Option D Flat head
Answer A
cylinder made of plain carbon steel has inner diameter 100 mm. What is the thickness of cylinder if maximum
Question 26 internal pressure of 20 Mpa acts on it? ( σall = 100 N/mm2 & poisson's ratio = 0.3) 3
Option A 11 mm
Option B 15.36 mm
Option C 22.32 mm
Option D 80 mm
Answer A
Question 27 Claviro's equation is applicable to cylinders with _______ 1

Option A close ends
Option B open ends
Option C both a. and b.
Answer A
1
Question 28 Why is autofrettage process used in pressure vessels?
Option A Increase fatigue lifetime
Option B To enhance carrying capacity
Option C To introduce compressive residual stress in them
Option D All of the above
Answer D
A seamless cylinder of storage capacity of 0.03mᵌis subjected to an internal pressure of 21MPa. The ultimate strength
Question 29 of material of cylinder is 350N/mm².Determine the length of the cylinder if it is twice the diameter of the cylinder. 3
Option A 540mm
Option B 270mm
Option C 400mm
Option D 350mm
Answer A
Internal pressure of 2.5 Mpa acts on a pressure vessel of thickness 15 mm and internal diameter of 1500 mm. What
Question 30 is the stress induced in longitudinal direction? 3
Option A 36.63 N/mm2
2
Option B 59.13 N/mm
2
Option C 65.62 N/mm
Option D 131.25 N/mm2
Answer 65.62 N/mm2
1
Question 31 Which of the following is not an unfired pressure vessel?
Option A Heat exchanger
Option B Storage vessels
Option C Steam boilers
Answer C
UNIT V
Question 1 I.C. engine cylinder is made of, 1
Option A cast iron
Option B plain carbon steel
Option C alloy steel
Option D copper
Answer A
1
Question 2 The ratio of length of stroke to cylinder bore (l/D) is usually,
Option A a. 1/2
Option B b. 5
Option C c. 1.5
Option D d. 1/4
Answer C
Question 3 Cylinder thickness is calculated on the basis of, 1

Option A radial stress
Option B residual stress
Option C whipping stress
Option D circumferential hoop stress
Answer D
Question 4 The length of cylinder is taken as, 1

Option A equal to cylinder diameter
Option B equal to length of stroke
Option C 1.15 times of stroke length
Option D 1.5 times length of piston
Answer C
Question 5 Piston is made of

Option A alloy steel 1
Option B plain carbon steel
Option C cast iron
Option D brass
Answer C
Question 6 The function of piston skirt is 1

Option A to provide bearing surface for side thrust
Option B to support gas load
Option C to support gudgeon pin
Option D to seal the cylinder and prevent leakage of oil past piston
Answer A
Question 7 The ratio of side thrust on piston to maximum gas force on piston head is, 1
Option A 1
Option B 0.5
Option C 0.25
Option D 0.1
Answer D
Question 8 For buckling consideration, the end conditions of connecting rod in plane of motion are, 1
Option A one end is free and the other fixed
Option B both ends are hinged
Option C both ends are fixed
Option D one end is fixed and the other hinged
Answer B
The condition for connecting rod to be equally strong in plane of motion (XX) and a plane perpendicular to
Question 9 plane of motion (YY) is, 2
Option A I xx = I yy
Option B I xx = 4 I yy
Option C 4 I xx = I yy
Option D I xx = 2 I yy
Answer B
Question 10 Connecting rod is made of, 1

Option A aluminium
Option B medium carbon steel
Option C cast iron
Option D babbits
Answer B
Question 11 The ratio of length of connecting rod to the crank radius (L/r) is usually, 2
Option A 1.5 to 2
Option B 10 to 12
Option C 4 to 5
Option D 1:1
Answer C
Question 12 The bolts for the cap of big end of connecting rod are subjected to 1
Option A only gas force
Option B only inertia force
Option C only side thrust
Option D inertia force, gas force and side thrust
Answer B
Question 13 Automotive crankshafts are made by, 1

Option A casting process
Option B machining from rolled stock
Option C drop forging process
Option D welding process
Answer C
Question 14 The function of valve gear mechanism is, 1

Option A to rotate the cam
Option B to reduce the speed of crankshaft
Option C to transmit the power
Option D open and close inlet and exhaust valve
Answer D
Question 15 At the top dead centre position, the crankshaft is subjected to, 1
Option A maximum torque
Option B maximum bending moment
Option C maximum torsional and bending moment
Answer B
Question 16 At the top dead centre position, the crankshaft is subjected to, 1
Option A maximum torque
Option B maximum bending moment
Option C maximum torsional and bending moment
Answer B
Question 17 For maximum torque condition, the crank angle is, 2

0
Option A 0 from top dead centre for petrol and diesel engines
0 0
Option B 33 before top dead centre for petrol engine and 1 after top dead centre position for diesel engine
Option C 25 0 to 35 0 for petrol engine and 30 0 to 40 0 for diesel engine from top dead centre
0
Option D 90 from top dead centre for petrol and diesel engines
Answer C
Question 18 The area of inlet valve is 1

Option A equal to the area of exhaust valve
Option B more than the area of exhaust valve
Option C less than the area of exhaust valve
Answer B
Question 19 Whipping stress is due to 1

Option A vibrations of crankshaft
Option B reciprocating motion of piston
Option C inertia force on connecting rod
Option D obliquity of connecting rod
Answer C
Question 20 When the length of connecting rod is small, it results in 1

Option A greater angular swing and greater side thrust on piston
Option B lesser angular swing and lesser side thrust on piston
Option C more chances of buckling failure
Option D no side thrust on piston
Answer A
Question 21 The design of piston head is based on 1

Option A strength and rigidity considerations
Option B bending and torsional moments
Option C buckling consideration
Option D strength and heat transfer considerations
Answer D
Question 22 The spring index for valve spring is usually 1

Option A 5
Option B 8
Option C 12
Option D 20
Answer B
Question 23 The main objective of providing two concentric valve springs, one inside another, in heavy duty engines is, 1
Option A to increase force on valve
Option B to eliminate surge
Option C to provide fail safe system
Option D to provide linear force-deflection characteristic
Answer B
Question 24 Push rod is designed on the basis of, 1

Option A tensile strength
Option B compression strength
Option C bending strength
Option D buckling strength
Answer D
Question 25 The valve lift depends upon 1

Option A bore and length of cylinder
Option B length of connecting rod and crank radius
Option C seat angle and diameter of port
Option D length of stroke and length of piston
Answer C
Question 26 Valve springs have 1

Option A plain ends
Option B plain and ground ends
Option C square ends
Option D square and ground ends
Answer D
SR.NO. UNIT NO.VI OPTIMUM DESIGN MARKS
Question 1 Which of the following is no expressed by primary design equation ? 1

Option A Functional parameters
Option B Material parameters
Option C Geometrical parameters d
Answer D
1
Question 2 The limit equatipn St= Sut /Nf is expressed as ----
Option A loose limit equation
Option B rigid limit equation
Option C rigid on one side and loose on other side
Answer D
Question 3 Which is / are the design parameter/ s in a design of any mechanical element ? 1
Option A Functional requirement parameter
Option B Material parameter
Option C Geometrical parameter
Answer D
Question 4 Functional requirement parameter are----- 1

Option A Positive
Option B Negative
Option C Both (a) and (b)
Option D Neither (a) and (b)
Answer C
Question 5 Functional requirement parameter are indpend on ----- 1

Option A Material Parameter
Option B Geometrical parameter
Answer C
Question 6 Individual functional requirement parameter on each other. 1

Option A Independent
Option B Dependent
Option C Independent or Dependent
Answer B
Question 7 Choose incorrect example of functional requirement parameters ? 1

Option A Power tansmitting capacity and gera ratio of gear pair
Option B Maximum force exerted by the spring stiffness for helical compression spring
Option C Cost
Option D Density
Answer D
Question 8 Choose desirable functional requirement parameter ? 1

Option A Weight
Option B Stress
Option C Deflection
Option D Power transmitting capacity and gear ratio for gear pair
Answer D
Question 9 The undesirable effect / s --- 1

Option A Negative functional requirement
Option B Positive functional requirement
Option C both (a) and (b)
Answer A
Question 10 Choose incorrect material parameter ? 1

Option A Cost per unit weight
Option B Density
Option C Yield strength
Option D Vibration
Answer D
Question 11 The material parameter are independet on ---- 1

Option A Functional requiremet parameter
Option B Geometrical Parameter
Answer C
Question 12 The material parameter are generally not of each other. 1

Option A Dependent
Option B Independent
Answer B
Question 13 The geometrical parameters are dependent on the ----

Option A material parameters 1
Option B Functionla requirement parameters
Answer C
Question 14 The geometrical parameter for a spur gear are--.Choose incorrect geometrical parameter 1
Option A Possions ratio
Option B Addendum
Option C Pressure angle
Option D Face width
Answer A
Question 15 Classification of Design Parameter/ s based on status in design problem. 1
Option A limited Parameters
Option B Specific Parameters
Option C Unspecified and Unlimited parameters
Answer A
Question 16 Specified Parameter as given below. Choose correct. 2

Option A P = 30 kw
Option B 30mm ≤ d ≤ 60 mm
Option C 60 mm ≤ l ≤ 90 mm
Answer A
Question 17 In adequte design available for single design problem 1

Option A There are number of adequate design
Option B Unique adequate design
Answer A
The optimum design targets a single paramete for optimizing while fulfilling the
Question 18 other requirement. 1
Option A a. Maximizing
Option B b. Minimizing
Option C c. Both (a) and (b)
Option D d. None of the above
Answer C
The objective in the optimum design might be to maximize one of the quanyity, consider the
Question 19 following parameters. Choose correct. 1
Option A Cost
Option B Deflection
Option C Center distance
Option D Load carrying capacity
Answer D
The objective in the optimum design might be to minimize one of the quanyity, consider the
Question 20 following parameters. Choose correct. 1
Option A Power transmitting Capacity
Option B Energy storing Capacity
Option C Load carrying capacity
Option D Deflection
Answer D
Question 21 How many design avialable in adeduate design. 1

Option A Number of design available
Option B Unique design available
Answer A
Question 22 How many design avialable in optimum design. 1
Option A Unique design available
Option B Number of design available
Answer B
Question 23 In design procedure, How many type/s of design equation use ?

Option A Primary design equation (P.D.E) 1
Option B Limit equation (L.E)
Option C Subsidiary Design equation (S.D.E)
Answer D
Question 24 The subsidiary design equations express----

Option A Material Parameters 1
Option B Geometrical Parameters
Option C Either Functional requirement or Undesirable effects
Answer C
Question 25 The primary design equation is the most important design equation Which Express---- 1
Option A The most significant functional requirement to be maximized
Option B The most significant undesirable effect to be minimized
Answer C
Which is the most significant undesirable effect to be minimized . Choose Incorrect

Question 26 Parameter. 1
Option A Cost
Option B Weigth.
Option C Vibration
Option D Module
Answer D
Question 27 Stess equations in any optimum design are gemerally-----

Option A Limit equation (L.E) 1
Option B Subsidiary design equation (S.D.E)
Option C Primary design equation
Answer B
If it is paooible to combine the effect of all subsidairy design eauaion, limit equation and
Question 28 specified parameters in primary design equation (P.D.E) then it is the case of------- 1
Option A Normal specifications
Option B Redudant Specifications
Option C Incompatible Specifications
Answer B
If it is paooible to combine the effect of all subsidairy design eauaion, limit equation and
Question 29 specified parameters in primary design equation (P.D.E) then it is the case of------- 1
Option A Normal specifications
Option B Redudant Specifications
Option C Incompatible Specifications
Answer B
Question 30 σt = F / A it is called as-----

Option A Limit equation
Option B Primary design Eauation
Option C Subsidary design equation
Answer C
Question 31 σt ≤ Syt /Nf it is called as ----

Option A Limit equation
Option B Primary design Eauation
Option C Subsidary design equation
Answer C
Question 32 Choose correct material parameters. 2

Option A w,ρ
Option B A,L
Option C F , Nf
Option D σt , Syt
Answer D
Question 33 Choose correct functional parameters. 2

Option A w,ρ
Option B A,L
Option C F , Nf
Option D σt , Syt
Answer C
Question 34 Choose correct geometrical parameters as limited value , unspecified and unlimited value ? 2
Option A w,ρ
Option B L, A
Option C F , Nf
Option D σt , Syt
Answer B
Question 35 Choose undesirable effect parameters as limited value, unspecified and unlimited value. 2
Option A σ,w
Option B L,A
Option C ρ , Syt
Option D F , Nf
Answer A
Question 36 Choose material selection factor/s--- 2
Option A σ/Sut
Option B σ/Syt
Answer C
operation to be performed
A Job shop production
B Batch production
C Mass production
D Limited volume production
Answer C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Subject :- Mechanical System Design

Unit 1 :- Design of Machine Tool Gear Boxes
Question What is the maximum percentage loss of economic cutting speed if

geometric progression ratio = 1.06
A 17.0 %
B 11.5 %
C 5.7 %
D 2.9 %
ANSWER D
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Diameter range is high in geometric progression due to _________

spindle speed.
A low
B high
C constant
D none of the above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question What is harmonic progression?

A Difference between reciprocal of two successive spindle speeds is
constant
B Difference between two successive spindle speeds is constant
C Ratio of two successive spindle speeds is constant.
D Ratio of two successive spindle speeds is variable.
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Ratio of two spindle speeds is constant in _________ progression.

A Arithmetic
B Geometric
C Harmonic
D None of the above
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question What is the purpose of using a gear box?

A To increase torque
B To increase speed
C Converts single input speed into multiple output speeds
D All of the above
ANSWER D
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Which of the following statements is true for structure/speed

diagrams?
A Structure diagrams gives range ratio of spindle speeds
B Speed diagrams do not give range ratio of spindle speeds
C Speed diagrams conser motor speed
D All of the above
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question A machine tool has minimum speed of 100 r.p.m. How many speed
steps are required by it to achieve speed of 200 rpm? (Geometric
progression ratio = 1.06)
A 11
B 12
C 13
D 14
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Maximum and minimum diameter of a shaft to be machined is 100

mm and 80 mm respectively. What is the maximum spindle speed if
cutting velocity is 40 m/min?
A 120 r.p.m
B 127 r.p.m
C 160 r.p.m
D 636 r.p.m.
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Economic cutting speed is minimum if geometric ratio is _________

A minimum
B maximum
C equal to economic cutting speed
D none of the above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question What is the geometric progression ratio if maximum and minimum

spindle speeds are 500 r.p.m and 300 r.p.m respectively? (Number of
speed steps = 7)
A 0.91
B 1.5
C 1.08
D 2.0
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Which of the following is not true about gears?

A Positive drive
B Constant velocity ratio
C Transmit large power
D Bulky construction
ANSWER D
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Which of the following is correct about series of range of speed in
simple lathe?
A Geometric progression
B Arithmetic progression
C Logarithmic progression
D Harmonic progression
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Multi speed drive with geometric progression is poor in low spindle
speed
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Which of the following is the need of the gearbox?

A To vary the speed of the vehicle
B To vary the torque of the vehicle
C To vary the power of the vehicle
D To vary the acceleration of the vehicle
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question In which of the gearbox all gears are always in contact?

A Constant-mesh gearbox
B Sling mesh gearbox
C Synchromesh gearbox
D Epicyclical gearbox
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question An optimum speed step is not basic conseration in design of

Multispeed gearbox?
A True
B false
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Arithmetic progression ratio is ……………

A The Difference between any two successive Spindle speed is constant
B Ratio of any two successive Spindle speed is constant
C The Difference between reciprocal of any two successive Spindle
speed is constant
D None of above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Which is the significance of geometric progression ratio from the

following
A Constant loss of economic Cutting speed in total speed range
B Compact and better gear box design
C Both A & B
D None of above
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Silent feature of Structure Diagram ……………

A The No. of Shaft in gear box
B No. of gears on each shaft
C Both A & B
D None of above
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Standard value of Geometric progression ratio for ø40

A 1.06
B 1.26
C 1.41
D 1.78
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Which types of gears are used in constant mesh gearbox?
A Spur gear
B Helical gear
C Bevel gear
D Worm gear
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Increase of torque in a vehicle is obtained by decreasing power

A True
B False
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Economic cutting speed is minimum if geometric progression ratio is

A Minimum
B Maximum
C Equal to economic cutting speed
D None of above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question What is the maximum percentage loss of economic cutting speed if

geometric progression ratio is 1.06?
A 17.0 %
B 11.05 %
C 5.7%
D 2.9%
ANSWER D
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The number of gear ratios in a vehicle

A Is more with high powered vehicle
B Is less with high powered cars
C Is more with diesel engine heavy vehicles
D None of the above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question As observed in harmonic progression the diameter range is constant

throughout….
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question If two meshing gears have 4:1 gear ratio and the smaller gear has 12
teeth, the large gear will have
A 12 teeth
B 24 teeth
C 48 teeth
D None of the above
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question In which of the gearbox sun and planet gear set is used?
A Constant-mesh gearbox
B Sling mesh gearbox
C Synchromesh gearbox
D Epicyclical gearbox
ANSWER D
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The top cover of all gear drive is_

A removable
B non-removable
C can‘t say anything
D none of the mentioned
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question In harmonic progrsssion the speed steps are too we at high spindle
speed is…
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question If a, G, b are in Geometric Progression then ‗G‘ is sa to be

A Arithmetic mean
B Geometric mean
C Standard deviation
D none of above
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Geometric Progression between −4 and −9 is

A ±8
B −8
C ±6
D −6
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Harmonic progression ratio is good in low spindle speed

no.33
A True
B false
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question A feed gear box for a screw cutting lathe is designed on the basis of
A Geometric progression
B Arithmetic progression
C Harmonic progression
D None of these
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The constant factor in case of R10 series of preferred numbers is
A 1.06
B 1.12
C 1.26
D 1.58
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question A ----------- diagram is a representation of structural formula, speed in

each stage, the transmission ratio in each stage
A Speed diagram
B Ray diagram
C Speed chart
D Stractural diagram
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Arithmetic progression is good in high spindle speed..

A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question As the module increases, index of size of gear decreases.

A True
B False
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Contact ratio is always

A 1
B >1
C <1
D Can‘t be determined
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The lower value of φ (Geometric progression ) are use in large size
no.40 heavy duty machine tools is….
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The size of a gear is usually specified by

A pressure angle
B pitch circle diameter
C circular pitch
D diametral pitch
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Which of the following is not true about gears?

A Positive drive
B Constant velocity ratio
C Transmit large power
D Bulky construction
ANSWER D
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Spur gears can be used only when the two shafts are parallel.
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question A pair of spur gears consist of 25 teeth pinion meshing with a 115
teeth gear. The module is 5mm. Calculate the gear ratio.
A 5
B 4.6
C 5.2
D 4
ANSWER B
MARKS 2
UNIT I
Question The higher value of φ (Geometric progression ) are use in small size
no.45 special purpose machine tools is….
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Which of the following can be used for power transmission in

intersecting shafts.
A Spur Gear
B Helical Gear
C Bevel Gear
D None of the listed
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Gear box is produced by

A Design by Drawing
B Design by craft evolution
C design synthesis
D simultaneous design
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The basic series of preferred numbers are

A R5, R10, R20, R40 and R80
B R10, R20, R30, R40 and R50
C R5, R10, R15, R20 and R25
D none of the above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Series factor for R20 series is,

A
B
C
D
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question When the axes of two shafts are perpendicular and intersecting, use
A Spur Gear
B Bevel Gear
C Worm Gear
D Helical Gear
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question For construction of kinematic diagram of multispeed gear box, which

of following equation is correct.
A Zmin>18
B Z1i +Z1o = Z2i +Z2o=Z3i +Z3o = C
C Z2i +Z1i> 4
D All above equations
ANSWER D
MARKS 2
UNIT I
Question An automobile gearbox has

A simple gear train
B compound gear train
C epicyclic gear train
D none of the above
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Spur gears used for machine tool gearboxes must have the contact
ratio
A equal to 1
B less than 1
C more than 1.4
D equal to 2
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The module of a gear is given by

A a. d/t
B b. 2d/t
C c. d/2t
D d. d/3t
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Which of the following does not give velocity ratio of gears?
A ω2/ω1
B N1/N2
C D1/D2
D T1/T2
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Which of the following pressure angle (in degrees) is commonly

used for gears?
A 15
B 20
C 25
D 30
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Multi speed gear box prove the required amount of power to spindle
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Permissible speed deviation is ..

A ± 10 (ø - 1)
B ± 10 (ø + 1)
C ± 10 (ø x 1)
D ± 10 (ø /1)
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Six speed gear box having output speeds are 160rpm Minimum and
1000 rpm maximum. value of geometric progression ratio is ..
A 1.4427
B 1.6623
C 1.5234
D 1,8722
ANSWER A
MARKS 2
UNIT I
Question Value of ø 20/3 is ….

A 1.66
B 1,41
C 1.56
D 1.31
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Ray diagram is a graphical representation of Structural formula

A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Maximum speed of six speed gear box are to be 160 rpm and
500rpm value of geometric progress is..
A 1.256
B 1.556
C 1.456
D 1.656
ANSWER A
MARKS 2
UNIT I
Question A multi speed gear box to be design for machine tool for a spindle
speed varying between 200rpm and 2000 rpm with ø 5 ,value of
number of speed steps (z) is …
A 8
B 9
C 6
D 12
ANSWER C
MARKS 2
UNIT I
Question Eight speed gear box having output speeds are 100rpm Minimum
and 1800 rpm maximum. value of geometric progression ratio is ..
A 1.5112
B 1.6518
C 1.8992
D 1.3452
ANSWER A
MARKS 2
UNIT I
Question Value of φ10 is ….

A 1.26
B 1.36
C 1.66
D 1.76
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
speed varying between 20 rpm and 3170 rpm with ø 5 ,value of
number of speed steps (z) is …
A 8
B 9
C 6
D 12
ANSWER D
MARKS 2
UNIT I
Question If gear pairs on parallel shafts have same module , the sum of
number of teeth on mating gears must be ……..
A higher
B lower
C Same
D None of above
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Formula for range ratio (Rn ) of spindle speed is…

A nmax / nmini
B nmini / nmax
C nmax + nmini
D nmax - nmini
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Value of ø5 is ….
A 1.68
B 1.58
C 1.88
D 1.78
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Six speed gear box having output speeds are 200 rpm Minimum and
1200 rpm maximum. Value of geometric progression ratio is ..
A 1.651
B 1.342
C 1,782
D 1.431
ANSWER D
MARKS 2
UNIT I
Question The Structural formula 2(1)2(2)3(4) contains how many number of

speed steps, number of stages
A 12,3
B 6,3
C 9,2
D 12,2
ANSWER A
MARKS 2
UNIT I
Question Number of structural formula for the 'N' number of stages is

calculated with the following equation
A (N!)
B (Z!)
C (N!)2
D (Z!)2
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The series based on the fact that the difference between two adjacent
rpm values is constant is termed as:
A Arithmetic progression
B Geometric progression
C Harmonic progression
D None of this
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Compact and economical gearbox design is possible with the

………progression.
A Arithmetic
B Geometric
C Harmonic
D None of this
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Structural formula represented by the special form of graph is known

as:
A Speed diagram
B Ray diagram
C Structural diagram
D Speed ray diagram
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Diameter range is high in geometric progression due to _________

spindle speed.
A Low
B High
C Constant
D None of this
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Ratio of two spindle speeds is constant in _________ progression.

A Arithmetic
B Geometric
C Harmonic
D None of this
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question What is the purpose of using a gear box

A To increase torque
B To increase speed
C Converts single input speed into multiple output speeds
D All of the above
ANSWER D
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Structural formula 2(1)3(2) contains how many number of speed
steps, number of stages
A 6,2
B 8,3
C 6,3
D 9,2
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Ratio of two spindle speeds is constant in Geometric progression.

A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I

A 8,3
B 12,3
C 6,3
D 9,3
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
A 6,3
B 4,2
C 8,2
D 6,2
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
A 9,2
B 6,2
C 8,2
D 12,2
ANSWER A
UNIT I

A 12,3
B 8,3
C 9,3
D 12,2
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Salient feature of structure diagram is..

A The number of shaft in the gear box
B The number of gear on each shaft
C Both A & B
D None of Above
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Structure diagram contains (N+1) vertical lines for input shaft,
intermediate shaft and output Shaft …
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Structure diagram contains number of horizontal lines equal to

the number of spindle speed steps..
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Structure diagram does not gives the spindle speed
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Structure diagram gives the range ratio of spindle speed
A True
B False
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Structure diagram does not gives the geometric progression ratio
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question General guelines in developing kinematic diagram (Gearing Diagram)

for multispeed gear box is..
A Overall dimensions of gear box should be minimum
B Avo interference of gears
C Both A&B
D None of above
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Speed diagram gives the all spindle speed

A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Speed diagram gives the range ratio of spindle speed
A True
B False
ANSWER 1
MARKS A
UNIT I
Question The Speed diagram does not gives the geometric progression ratio
A True
B False
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Speed diagram gives the electric motor speed

A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Spacing between two adjacent gears on the shaft must be greater than
twice the face wth
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Structure diagram does not gives the electric motor speed
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question What is the ― z ‖ indicate in Structure diagram

A Number of stages of gear box
B Number of spindle speed steps
C Transmission range
D None of above
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question What is the ― N ‖ indicate in Structure diagram

A Number of stages of gear box
B Number of spindle speed steps
C Transmission range
D None of above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Structure diagram represented in the form special graph

A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question What is horizontal line represents in the Structure diagram

A Spindle speed
B Speed steps
C Both A & B
D None of above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Transmission range of a stage (Transmission group)is the ratio of …

A Maximum speed ratio / Minimum speed ratio obtained in a stage
B Minimum speed ratio / Maximum speed ratio obtained in a stage
C Both A & B
D None of above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question For machine tool gear box ,the transmission range should be not
exceed than 8,
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The node is a point from which the ray starts or at which the ray
terminates …
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question An optimum structure diagram should satisfy the following

conditions
A Transmission range restrictions
B Minimum total shaft size
C Minimum number of gears on output shaft
D All of Above
ANSWER D
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question While selection of optimum structure diagram, number of speed steps

in any stage should not be more than three
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Which of the following is advantages of Geometric progression

A Constant loss of economic cutting speed in total speed range
B Compact an better gear box design
C Both A & B
D None of above
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Which of the following is not a advantages of Geometric progression

A Constant loss of economic cutting speed in total speed range
B Compact an better gear box design
C Bulky an heavy gear box design
D None of above
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Which of the following is parameters of Kinematic design of
multispeed gear box
A Maximum spindle speed
B Minimum spindle speed
C Range ratio
D All of above
ANSWER D
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Geometric progression is a parameter of Kinematic design of

multispeed gear box
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question For center lathe range ratio is

A 40-60
B 30-50
C 15-30
D 15-25
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question For milling machine range ratio is

A 40-60
B 30-50
C 15-30
D 15-25
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question For drilling machine range ratio is

A 40-60
B 30-50
C 15-30
D 15-25
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question For grinding machine range ratio is

A 1-10
B 30-50
C 15-30
D 15-25
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question For heavy duty machine tools recommended value of geometric

progression ratio (φ) is
A 1.12
B 1,26
C 1.41
D 1.58
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question For medium size, general purpose machine tools recommended value
of geometric progression ratio (φ) is
A 1.12
B 1,26
C 1.41
D 1.58
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question For medium to small size, general purpose machine tools

recommended value of geometric progression ratio (φ) is
A 1.12
B 1,26
C 1.41
D 1.58
ANSWER D
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Speed of electric motor ‗nem‘ is require to dece …

A The speed of input shaft of gear box
B The mode of transmission from electric motor to input shaft
C Both A & B
D None of above
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Deviation of actual spindle speed from calculated spindle speed must
not exceed ±10 (φ -1) %
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Minimum difference between number of teeth on adjacent gear block

must be at least four
A True
B False
ANSWER 1
MARKS A
UNIT I
Question Overall dimension of gear box should be minimum is…

A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question From the following which is the structural formulae for 12 speed gear
box
A 2(1)2(2)3(4)
B 2(1)2(2)2(4)
C 3(1)3(3) 4(9)
D 2(1)2(4)2(6)
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
box
A 2(1)2(2)3(4)
B 2(1)2(2)2(4)
C 3(1)3(3) 4(9)
D None of above
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
box
A 2(1)3(2)
B 2(2)3(1)
C Both A & B
D None of above
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
box
A 3(1)3(3)
B 3(3) 3(1)
C Both A & B
D None of above
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question From the following which is not a structural formulae for 9 speed
gear box
A 3(1)3(3)
B 3(3) 3(1)
C 3(1) 2(3)
D None of above
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The deviation diagram, which is the plot of….

A Percentage speed deviation against calculated spindle speed
B Percentage speed deviation against optimum spindle speed
C Calculated spindle speed against optimum spindle speed
D Calculated spindle speed against Percentage speed deviation
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question From the following which is not a structural formulae for 8 speed
gear box
A 2(1)2(2)3(4)
B 2(1)2(2)2(4)
C 2(1)2(4) 2(2)
D None of above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question How many numbers of stages in 9 speed gear box?

A 2
B 3
C 4
D None of above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I

A 2
B 3
C 4
D None of above
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I

A 2
B 3
C 4
D None of above
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Maximum speed of six speed gear box is to be 160 rpm and
1000rpm minimum speed & maximum speed respectively, value of
range ratio is
A 6.25
B 7.50
C 8.25
D 9.25
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Maximum speed of Eight speed gear box is to be 100 rpm and
range ratio is
A 24
B 18
C 28
D 24
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Z= P1(X1) P2(X2)P3(X3) This equation is suitable to find out of

A The number of stages of gear box.
B The number of transmission groups of gear box
C Decing the structural formula of gear box
D Decing the electric Motor for gear box
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Maximum speed of 12 speed gear box is to be 20 rpm and

range ratio is
A 158.5
B 168.5
C 178.5
D 188.5
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The Maximum speed of four speed gear box is to be 220 rpm and
1000 rpm minimum speed & maximum speed respectively. , value of
range ratio is
A 2.3434
B 3.2424
C 5.6878
D 4.5454
ANSWER D
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question The eal multi-speed gear box should satisfy which of following
conditions?
A Optimum number of speed steps with increments between 10%
and15%.
B Desired speed change without passing through intermediate speed
steps
C Ergonomically designed and centralized control unit.
D All of above
ANSWER D
MARKS 1
UNIT I
speed varying between 100 rpm and 3981rpm with ø = 1.585 ,value
of number of speed steps (z) is …
A 6
B 8
C 9
D 12
ANSWER C
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question If gear box operates with only one speed ratio or gear ratio is
called………
A Multi speed gear box
B Single speed gear box
C Both A&B
D None of above
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question If gear box operates with more than one speed ratio or gear ratio is
called………
A Multi speed gear box
B Single speed gear box
C Both A&B
D None of above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Following which are the type of multi speed gear box
A Constant mesh gear box
B Sling mesh gear box
C Synchromesh gear box
D All of above
ANSWER D
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question To increase a speed is not a purpose of gear box

A True
B False
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question To increase a torque is a purpose of gear box

A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Gear box is a ………………device used for transmitting power from
the prime over to the machine
A Mechanical
B Electrical
C Hydraulic
D None of above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question For obtaining number of output speeds with a single input speed , the
multi speed gear box is required in machine tool
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question In the formulae n = , is ……

A Cutting speed
B Spindle speed
C Both A & B
D None of above
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question In multi speed gear box one set of gears is engaged at one time is…
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question In multi speed drives, all speed steps should be obtained without
stopping the motor is....
A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question In arithmetic progression ,the ratio of two successive spindle speed is

constant …
A True
B False
ANSWER B
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Question Harmonic progression is poor in high spindle speed range is …..

A True
B False
ANSWER A
MARKS 1
UNIT I
Matoshri College of Engineering & Research Centre,Eklahare, Nashik

Department of Mechanical Engineering
Multiple Choice Questions
Subject :- Mechanical System Design

Unit 2 :- Statistical Conseration in Design
Question Histogram is
A set of rectangles
B a line graph of class frequency plotted against class marks
C a bell shaped smooth curve
D none of the above
ANSWER A
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question Frequency polygon is

A a set of rectangles
B a line graph of class frequency plotted against class marks
C a bell shaped smooth curve
D none of the above
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question Central tendency of population is

A spread of data or extend to which the observations are scattered
B m point of distribution where most of the data cluster
C concentration of data at either low or high end
D distribution with sharp peak
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question Dispersion of population is

C Concentration of data at either low or high end
D distribution with sharp peak
ANSWER A
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question Skewness of population is

D measure of sharp peak
ANSWER C
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question Kurtosis of population is

D measure of sharp peak
ANSWER D
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question Central tendency of population is measured in units of

A standard deviation
B arithmetic mean
C standard variable
D square of standard deviation
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question Dispersion of population is measured in units of

A standard deviation
B arithmetic mean
C geometric mean
D square of standard deviation
ANSWER A
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question Standard variable is

A square of standard deviation
B arithmetic mean
C root mean square deviation from the mean
D deviation from mean in units of standard deviation
ANSWER D
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question Standard deviation is

A square of standard variable
B arithmetic mean
C root mean square deviation from the mean
D deviation from mean in units of standard deviation
ANSWER C
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question The area below normal curve from (Z = - ∞) to (Z = + ∞) is ----,

A 1
B 0.6827
C 0.9545
D 0.9973
ANSWER A
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question The area below normal curve from (Z = - 1) to (Z = + 1) is ----,

A 1
B 0.6827
C 0.9545
D 0.9973
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2

A 1
B 0.6827
C 0.9545
D 0.9973
ANSWER C
MARK 2
Unit 2

A 1
B 0.6827
C 0.9545
D 0.9973
ANSWER D
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question When two populations with means X μ and Y μ are added, the mean
of resultant population is given by,
A μx+ μy
B μx- μy
C μx* μy
D μx/μy
ANSWER A
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question When population Y with means μy is subtracted from population X

with mean μx, the mean of resultant population is given by,
A μx+ μy
B μx- μy
C μx* μy
D μx/μy
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question When two populations with means μx and μy are multiplied, the mean
of resultant population is given by,
A μx+ μy
B μx- μy
C μx* μy
D μx/μy
ANSWER C
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question When population X with mean μx, is dived by population Y with

mean μy, the mean of resultant population is given by,
A μx+ μy
B μx- μy
C μx* μy
D μx/μy
ANSWER D
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question When two populations X and Y are added, the standard deviation of
resultant population is given by,
A σx+ σy
B σx2+ σy2
C √( σx2+ σy2)
D √( σx2- σy2)
ANSWER C
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question When population Y is subtracted from population X, the standard
deviation of resultant population is given by,
A σx+ σy
B σx2+ σy2
C √( σx2+ σy2)
D √( σx2- σy2)
ANSWER C
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question The resultant population is normally distributed,

A when populations of two normally distributed random variables are
added
B when populations of two normally distributed random variables are
subtracted
C when populations of two normally distributed random variables are
multiplied
D any one of above
ANSWER D
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question In statistically controlled system,

A variations due to assignable causes are corrected
B variations due to chance causes are corrected
C variations due to assignable and chance causes are corrected
D none of these
ANSWER A
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question There is no rejection of components when

A design tolerance is equal to (± 3σˆ ) and the process is centered
B design tolerance is slightly more than (± 3σˆ )
C design tolerance is (± 4σˆ )
D any one of above
ANSWER D
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question The reliability of ball bearing selected from manufacture‘s catalogue
is
A 90%
B 50%
C 99%
D more than 90%
ANSWER A
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question What is meant by hazard rate?

A Number of failures per unit time per number of items when exposed
for same time
B Probability of test specimen fails between time t1 and t1 + dt1 which
survives for time t1
C Both a. and b.
D None of the above
ANSWER C
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question Which of the following curves have the mean value equal to zero
in the graph of frequency vs random variable?
A Normal distribution curve
B Standard normal distribution curve
C Both a. and b.
D None of the above
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question What is the relation between standard deviation(σ) and

arithmetic mean (μ) to determine coefficient of variation (C)?
A C=σ+μ
B C=σ–μ
C C=σ/μ
D C=σxμ
ANSWER C
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question What is meant by mean time to failure (MTTF)?
A Mean time between two successive failure components
B Maximum time between two successive failure components
C Sum of survival time for number of components dived by number of
failures
D Sum of number of failures dived by survival time for number of
components
ANSWER C
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question If a relief valve has reliability of 0.989, how many failures are
expected in testing 1000 such relief valves?
A 111
B 100
C 10
D 11
ANSWER D
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question Failure rate for safety valve working for 400 hours is 3 x 10–
6
failures/hour. What is the reliability of safety valve?
A 0.998
B 0.989
C 0.888
D 0.899
ANSWER A
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question Factor of safety is the ratio of _________

A working stress and ultimate strength
B yield strength and endurance strength

C ultimate strength and yield strength
D yield strength and working stress
ANSWER D
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question Which of the following factors are not consered while selecting
values for factor of safety?
A Cost
B Failure consequences
C Degree of uncertainty about loading and material
D None of the above
ANSWER D
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question When all the assignable cause of variations are located and removed
one by one ,the desired state of stability is attained, the process is
called as
A Chance-Cause system
B Constant-Cause system
C Statistical Control system
D All of above.
ANSWER D
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question The entire group of apparently entical components or elements is

called as-
A Sample
B Random variables
C Population
D Median
ANSWER C
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question In standard normal distribution curve, the standard variable is

A x
B z
C µ
D π
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question In normal distribution curve ,the area under curve is equal to

A Total Population
B Standard deviation
C equal to 1
D equal to µ
ANSWER A
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question For two populations x and y, the standard deviation of resultant

population ,both for addition and substraction is given by-
A =
B =
C =
D =
ANSWER A
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question -------- is define as the process is the spread of normal distribution

curves that includes 99.73% of population which is +- 3
A Relative Value of Design
B Design Tolerance
C Natural Tolerance
D Mean
ANSWER C
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question When design tolerance is greater than the natural tolerance, Then-----
-------
A Manufacturing cost would be high
B Manufacturing cost would be low
C Manufacturing cost would be centered
D Manufacturing cost would be modrate
ANSWER A
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A batch of 100 deep –groove ball bearing have a mean of 10000
hours and standard deviation of 750 hours ,bearings are likely to fall
within first 11000 hours. Find variable Z1 ?
A 1.66
B 1.55
C 1.44
D 1.33
ANSWER D
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question The probability that a component ,system or device will perform

without failure for a specified period of time under the specified
operating condition is called as—
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A mechanical component is subjected to a mean stress of 207 N/mm2

with standard deviation 55.2 N/mm2 and the material has mean yield
strength of 276 N/mm2with standard deviation 41.4N/mm2.
Determine mean and standard deviation of the margin of safety
population.
A 79 N/mm2 ,65 N/mm2
B 65 N/mm2 ,69 N/mm2
C 69 N/mm2 ,69 N/mm2
D 65 N/mm2 ,79 N/mm2
ANSWER C
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question What is meant bt mean time to failure(MTTF)

A Mean time between two successive failure components
B Maximum time between two successive failure components
C Sum of survival time for number of components dived by number of
failures
D Sum of number of failure dived by survival time for number of
components.
ANSWER C
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question What is standard deviation of clearance population for the diameter
of shaft and hole assembly specified below?. Shaft diameter =30
+0.15, Hole diameter = 30.5+0.25
A 0.097
B 0.059
C 0.036
D 0.390
ANSWER A
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question What is the relation between standard deviation (Ϭ) and arithmetic
mean (µ) to determine coefficient of variation(C)?
A C = Ϭ+µ
B C = Ϭ-µ
C C = Ϭ/µ
D C = Ϭ Xµ
ANSWER C
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question Assignable causes are caused due to changes in----------------.

A Manufacturing process
B Material
C inspection process
D all of the above
ANSWER D
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A product is sa to be reliable when it performs its intended function

satisfactorily throughout its life.
A True
B False
C
D
ANSWER A
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A domestic refrigerator, which works continuously year after year

without any breakdown, is an example of ---
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question A Washing Machine, which works continuously year after year

A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question A ceiling fan, which works continuously year after year without any
breakdown, is an example of ---
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question A car, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question A lathe machine, which works continuously year after year without
any breakdown, is an example of ---
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question A IC engine, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question This definition of reliability contains following elements. Which one
is true
(i) The reliability of the product is expressed as a probability.
(ii) The product is required to perform its intended function.
(iii) The period during which the product has to perform the function
is specified.
(iv) The operating conditions under which the product has to
function are specified.
A i & ii
B ii & iii
C iii & iv
D All statements are true
ANSWER D
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question Statistical techniques are used for ---------- of numerical data.

A collection
B processing
C Analysis & interpretation
D All of above
ANSWER D
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question histogram consists of a set of --

A triangles
B lines
C circles
D rectangles
ANSWER D
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question The ----- is a line graph of class frequency plotted against class
marks or mpoints of class intervals.
A histogram
B reliability
C frequency polygon
D Factor of safety
ANSWER C
MARK
Unit 2
Question --- is the mdle point of distribution

A Mean
B Median
C Central tendency
D mode
ANSWER C
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question ---- is defined as the spread of the data in a distribution, that is, the
extent to which the observations are scattered
A Central tendency
B Dispersion
C Mean
D Median
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question The ---- and ----- are the two important characteristics of frequency
distribution.
A Reliability and design for assembly
B Factor of safety and reliability
C Standard deviation & population
D central tendency and dispersion
ANSWER D
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question
In figure Curve 1 is
---
A skewed leftt
B skewed right
C skewed mdle
D None of above
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question
In figure Curve 2 is ---

A skewed leftt
B skewed right
C skewed mdle
D None of above
ANSWER A
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question
From figure Curve 1 is called as -

A positively skewed curve
B negatively skewed curve
C None of above
D Both A & B
ANSWER A
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question
From figure Curve 2 is called as -

A positively skewed curve
B negatively skewed curve
C None of above
D Both A & B
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question
is
A Mean
B arithmetic mean
C standard deviation
D mode
ANSWER A
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question
is
A Mean
B arithmetic mean
D mode
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question
is
A Mean
B arithmetic mean
D mode
ANSWER C
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question The ---- is defined as the actual capabilities of the process, and can
be consered as limits within which all but a given allowable fraction
of items will fall.
A natural tolerance
B arithmetic mean
D mode
ANSWER A
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question When the design tolerance is less than ± 3σ^ the percentage of
rejected components is inevitable.
A True
B False
C
D
ANSWER A
MARK 1
Question When the design tolerance is equal to ± 3σ^ there is virtually no

rejection proved that the manufacturing process is centred.
A True
B False
C
D
ANSWER A
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question When the design tolerance is slightly greater than ± 3σ^ there is no
rejection even if the manufacturing process is slightly off-centre.
A True
B False
C
D
ANSWER A
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A piston, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A connecting rod which works continuously year after year without
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Question A crankshaft which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A bearing, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A screw jack, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A drilling machine which works continuously year after year without
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A milling machine, which works continuously year after year

A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A grinding machine, which works continuously year after year

A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A spring, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A boiler, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A shaft, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A chuck, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A conveyor, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A gear, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A belt, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A chain drive, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A pulley, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A flywheel, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A Cylinder, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A C clamp, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A lead screw, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A seal, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A safety valve, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 1
Unit 2
Question A crank pin, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question A gudgeon pin, which works continuously year after year without
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question A brake, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question A clutch, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question A bolt, which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
Question A nut which works continuously year after year without any
A Design value
B Reliability
C Factor of safety
D Mean stress
ANSWER B
MARK 2
Unit 2
MSD
Unit 3
Question Material handling consists of movement of material from
A one machine to another
B one shop to another shop
C stores to shop
D all of the above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Principle of ‘Unit load’ states that
A materials should be moved in lots
B one unit should be moved at a time
C both ‘a’ and ‘b’
D none of the above
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question What are bulk loads

A Lump of material
B Single rig mass
C Homogeneous particles
D Heterogeneous particles
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question The layer of a belt is generally called as

A Ply
B Layer
C Segment
D Sediment
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question A shortercentre distance is always preferred in belt drives.

A Yes due to stability
B No due to stability
C Yes due to instability
D No due to instability
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Which of the following is a property of bulk load?

A Hardness
B Cake forming tendency
C Suspension part
D Weight
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Which of the following is not a hoisting equipment with lifting

Question
gear?
A Cage elevators
B Jib cranes
C Pulleys
D Troughed belts
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Which belt conveyor prevents sling down of material at an

Question
inclination of 55o with horizontal?
A Flat belt conveyor
B Troughed belt conveyor
C Blanket belt conveyor
D Woven wire belt conveyors
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3
Which of the following statements is false for troughed belt

conveyors?
1. Troughed belt conveyors use flexible belts
Question
2. They contain five lers
3. Depth of trough decreases with increasing number of lers
4. Flexibility of belt increases as depth of trough decreases
A 1 and 2
B 2 and 3
C 3 and 4
D None of the above
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3
Which of the following belt conveyors have low volume
Question
carrying capacity?
A Flat belts
B Troughed belts
C Both a. and b.
D None of the above
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Which discharge method proves only intermediate discharge

Question
for low speed flat belt conveyor?
A Plow discharge
B Tripper discharge
C Both a. and b.
D None of the above
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Velocity ratio for chain drive is lesser than that for belts.
A Yes
B No
C In some cases
D Can’t be determined
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Fabric rubber belts are not wely used as they can’t be operated
Question
at high speeds.
A They can’t be used at velocities 50m/s
B They can be used at high velocities
C Limiting velocity is 20m/s
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Power transmitting capacity of V belts is more than that of flat

Question
belt.
A Yes
B No
C Only for V angle > 15
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Creep is the slight absolute motion of the belt as it passes over

Question
the pulley.
A Yes
B No, it is a relative motion
C None of the listed
D It is absolute motion
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question In horizontal belt, the loose se is generally kept on the bottom.
A True
B False
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Vertical drives are preferred over horizontal.

A True
B False
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
If velocity ratio is less than 3, then centre distance is given by

Question
D+.5d.
A True
B False
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Is it possible to reduce the centre distance as much as we

Question
want?
A Yes power transmission increases
B No
C Can’t be cited
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
The diameter of the shorter pulley in leather belt drive is

Question 265mm. It is rotating at 1440 rpm. Calculate the velocity of the
belt.
A 25m/s
B 20m/s
C 30m/s
D None of the mentioned
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
The ler pulley increases the power transmitting capacity of the

Question
belt drive.
A True
B False
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Economy in material handling can be achieved by

A employing gravity feed movements
B minimizing distance of travel
C by carrying material to destination without using manual
labour
D all of the above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Fork lift truck is used for

A lifting and lowering
B vertical transportation
D none of the above
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question The following is used to transport materials having flat bottoms

A Belt conveyor
B Roller conveyor
C Chain conveyor
D None of the above
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Special purpose material handling equipments are used in
A Process layout
B Line layout
D None of the above
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Mass capacity of a conveyor is 200 ton/hr, if speed of the belt is

Question 4 m/s then what is the wth of horizontal flat belt conveyor
carrying the load? (Surcharge factor = 0.075 & ρ = 1000 kg/m3)
A 499.23 mm
B 500.0 mm
C 533.7 mm
D Insufficient data
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 3
What is the mass capacity of flat belt conveyor if volumetric

Question
capacity 0.55 m3/hr? (ρ = 1500 kg/m3)
A 825 tons/hr
B 825 kg/hr
C 2.727 tons/hr
D 2722 kg/hr
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
Process of converting the bulk load into a unit load using

Question
container is
A Materialization
B containerization
C Transportation
D All of above
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Conveyors are mainly used for handling
A Unit load
B Bulk load
C Both a & b
D None of above
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Screw conveyors are

A Run at very high rpm
B Suitable for sticky materials
C Suitable for highly abrasive materials
D All of the above
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Dry powder sol materials are transported by a _______ conveyor

A Belt
B Bucket
C Screw
D None of these
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3
A horizontal belt conveyor is used for transporting the bulk

material having mass density of 2000 kg/m3. The surcharge factor
Question
‘C’ for the belt is 0.075, while the belt wth is 800 mm. If the belt
speed is 1.75 m/s, determine the Volumetric capacity of conveyor
A 208.35 m3/hr
B 212.10 m3/hr
C 215.68 m3/hr
D 220.56 m3/hr
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3

Question
A 420.5 ton/hr
B 416.35 ton/hr
C 424.25 ton/hr
D 428.5 ton/hr
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 3
A triple ply belt conveyor is required to transport 2 ton of iron ore

per hour at a conveyor speed of 90 m/min through a distance of
Question
1000m and a height of 300 m. what is the maximum suitable
inclination for the conveyor.
A 150
B 16.70
C 17.40
D 18.20
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3

Question
1000m and a height of 300 m. if the mass density of iron ore is 2.5
ton per cubic meter, the belt wth is
A 1000 mm
B 1050 mm
C 1200 mm
D 800 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3

Question per hour at a conveyor speed of 90 m/min through a distance of
ton per cubic meter, the diameter of drive pulley is (K1 = 2 & K2=
80)
A 450 mm
B 480 mm
C 525 mm
D 550 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3

Question 1000m and a height of 300 m. if the mass density of iron ore is 2.5
ton per cubic meter, if electric motor speed is 1440 r.p.m, the
reduction ratio of gear reducer would be ,
A 20
B 21.6
C 24.1
D 26.2
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Which of the following is a Hoisting equipment

A Cranes
B Elevators
C Hoisting machine
D All Of Above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
The following is used to transport materials if the length of

Question
material travel is large
A conveyor
B Hoisting equipment
C Overhead equipment
D None of the above
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
The following is used to transport materials if the length of

Question
material travel is small
A conveyor
B Hoisting equipment
C Overhead equipment
D None of the above
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Hoisting machines are suitable for

A Unit loads
B Bulk Loads
C Wet Material
D All of above
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Which of the following is a property of unit load?

A weight
B Cake forming tendency
C Lump size
D density
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question The belt conveyor rear end is known as

A Head end
B Tail end
C Feed point
D Discharge point
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question The belt conveyor front end is known as

A Head end
B Tail end
C Feed point
D Discharge point
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
The point where material is loaded on the belt conveyor is

Question
known as
A Head end
B Tail end
C Feed point
D Discharge point
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Methods of loading to flat belt

A By hooper
B By preceeding conveyor
C By travelling macnine
D All of above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Methods of discharge from flat belt

A Head & pulley discharge
B Both end discharge
C Plow discharge
D All of above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question The change in direction of belt is achieved by
A lers
B Snub pulleys
C Tail pulley
D None of above
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Purpose of using lers

A To support the conveyor belt on lower run
B To prove support to belt at loading point
C To align the belt on the pulley
D All of above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question In light duty applications lers used are

A Roller type lers with ball bearings
B Roller type lers with roller bearings
C Rubber covered lers
D All of above
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question In abrasive load transportation applications lers used are

A Roller type lers with ball bearings
B Roller type lers with roller bearings
C Rubber covered lers
D All of above
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Belt take up device is used in belt conveyor

A To maintain adequate tension in belt
B To adjust load on belt
C To support load on belt
D All of above
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question The angle of repose for anthracite coal is around

A 11
B 17
C 27
D 37
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question The angle of repose depends on

A shape of the material
B smoothness of the material
C degree of fineness of the material
D all of the above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Which of the following conveyor can be used for handling saw

Question
dust?
A Belt conveyor
B Flight conveyor
C Pneumatic conveyor
D Any of the above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Which of the following is the least preferred conveyor for

Question
handling glue?
A Belt conveyor
B Continuous flow conveyor
C Pneumatic conveyor
D Screw conveyor
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Chains for material handling equipment are generally made of
A cast iron
B wrought iron
C mild steel
D carbon steel
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Hoisting and haulage ropes are frequently greased to

A minimize wear
B prevent corrosion
C both (A) and (B) above
D None of above
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Lifting magnets are used as material handling devices for

A pig iron
B billets
C tubes
D all of the above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Which hoist is generally preferred for repetitive or high speed

Question
lifting?
A Magnetic lifting hoist
B Electric hoist
C Hand chain hoist
D None of the above
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
The eal material handling system should fulfill the

Question
objectives……
A Accuracy in transporting and precision in Pick-up loads
B Transporting in schedule time with required quality
C Automation with min. manpower and low operating cost
D All of above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
In material handling equipment through belt conveyors is

Question
classified as
A Conveying Equipment
B Surface and overhead Equipment
C Hoisting Equipment
D Elevators.
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Volumetric capacity of horizontal belt conveyor is given as

A Q= Mb2v m3/s
B Q= kb2v m3/s
C Q= Cb2v m3/s
D M = ρQ
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3
The angle of surcharge () will always be --------------- than the

Question
angle of repose()
A Greater
B Less
C Equal
D None of above
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
The ------------- type lers with ----------------- are used in heavy

Question
duty applications of belt conveyor..
A Roller – Ball Bearing
B Roller – Roller Bearing
C Rubber cover-Ball Bearing
D Rubber cover- Roller Bearing
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
The ------------------- take up device consist of two bent pulleys, a

Question
take up pulley and dead weights
A Screw Type Take
B Winch Operated Type Take
C Horizontal Gravity Type Take
D Vertical Gravity Type Take
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 3
Determine the capacity of conveyor in ton/hr, if Mass density

Question is 2 ton/m3,Belt speed is 1.75m/s, Belt wth, B= 0.8 m and K for
surcharge angle 250 =2.35x10-4
A 1.329 tone/hr
B 2.300 tone/hr
C 3.325 tone/hr
D 4.320 tone/hr
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3
A belt conveyor is to be designed to carry the bulk material,

when material factor for plies K1= 2.0, Belt tension and arc of
Question
contact factor K2= 70 and No. of plies for belt is 4. Find
Diameter of drive pulley
A 360 mm
B 400 mm
C 560 mm
D 700 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 3
Which of the following belt conveyor have low volume carrying

Question
capacity?
A Flat belt conveyor
B Through belt conveyor
C Both A and B
D None of above
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question The size of electric motor depends on

A hoisting speed
B weight of load
C Period of acceleration & retardation
D all of the above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Hopper bottom type wagon are used on Indian Railways for

Question
transportation of
A grains
B fertilizers
C coal
D all of the above
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Material handling in automobile company is done by

A Overhead cranes
B trolley
C Belt conveyor
D None of above
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Which of the following application is a belt conveyor used for?

A Material transportation over long distances
B Material transportation within premises
C Material transportation for processing
D All of the mentioned
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
It is generally not possible to change the direction of flow with

Question
belt conveyors.
A True
B False
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Belt conveyors cannot be used in the inclined position.

A True
B False
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Screw conveyors can carry more amount of load compared to

Question
belt conveyors.
A True
B False
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Which of the following is NOT an advantage of mechanical

Question
transportation?
A Transportation is economical and quick
B Handling is contamination free
C No human injury
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Belt and screw conveyors are in all processing units to

Question
transport the final packed cartons.
A True
B False
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Cranes and hoists have an incline up and down option.

A True
B False
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Flat belt are used where the distance between the two shaft is
Question
…..
A Not more than 10 m
B Not More than 5 m
C More than 10 m
D Upto 30 m
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question V -belt is used where the distance between the two shaft is …..
B Not More than 5 m
C More than 10 m
D None of above
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
The power requirement in case of a screw conveyor depends

Question
on
A material to be handled
B rate of transportation
C length of conveyor
D all of the above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question The thickness of belt is usually specified in terms of
A index number
B merit number
C number of plies
D thickness in mm
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Belt life is reduced by

A impact of loading
B conveying horizontally as compared to incline
C using pulverized materials
D all of the above
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question In case of belt conveyors, a tripper is used to

A facilitate loading
B facilitate unloading
C prevent shock loading
D prevent damage to belt
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Roller conveyors are used for the movement of

A fine dusts
B granular materials
C corrosive materials
D package goods
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Power transmitting capacity of V belts is more than that of flat

Question
belt
A Yes
B No
C Only for V angle > 15
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question In horizontal belt, the loose se is generally kept on the bottom

A True
B False
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question A shorter centre distance is always preferred in belt drives.

A Yes due to stability
B No due to stability
C Yes due to instability
D No due to instability
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Is it possible to remove the slack from the belt?

A Yes
B No
C It can be done but at the cost of strength
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
A horizontal belt conveyor is used for transporting the bulk

material having mass density of 5 ton/m3. The surcharge factor ‘C’
Question
for the belt is 0.1, while the belt wth is 1000 mm. If the belt speed
is 2.5 m/s, determine the Volumetric capacity of conveyor
A 650.25 m3/hr
B 612.10 m3/hr
C 665.68 m3/hr
D 640.56 m3/hr
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3

Question
A 1300.5 ton/hr
B 1285.35 ton/hr
C 1315.25 ton/hr
D 1310.5 ton/hr
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3
If motor speed is 1440 rpm, pulley dia. is 500 mm and belt

Question
speed is 1.5 m/s, what is the reduction ratio of gear reducer
A 23.52
B 25.13
C 20
D 27.20
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
A belt conveyor is to be designed to carry the bulk material,

when material factor for plies K1= 2.0, Belt tension and arc of
Question
contact factor K2= 80 and No. of plies for belt is 3. Find
Diameter of drive pulley
A 460 mm
B 480 mm
C 520 mm
D 500 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
A belt conveyor is required to transport material through a

Question distance of 800m and a height of 300 m. what is the maximum
suitable inclination for the conveyor.
A 190
B 16.70
C 210
D 18.20
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 3

Question
capacity 1.3m3/hr? (specific weight of material = 16000 N/m3)
A 20.800 tons/hr
B 20800 kg/hr
C 2.120 tons/hr
D 2120.28 kg/hr
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 3
A belt conveyor is required to transport material through a

distance of 800m. the conveyor speed is 3 m/s. if the belt tensions
Question
are at tight se is 8500 N & at slack se is 1900 N. what is thepower
required for the belt conveyor.
A 17.2 kW
B 21.35 kW
C 19.8 kW
D 20.5 kW
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Mass capacity of horizontal belt conveyor is given as

A Q= Mb2v m3/s
B Q= kb2v m3/s
C Q= Cb2v m3/s
D M = ρQ kg/hr
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question The recommended factor of safety for conveyor belt is

A 5 to 10
B 10 to 15
C 15 to 20
D Above 20
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
A triple ply belt conveyor is required to transport 4 ton of iron

Question ore per hour at a conveyor speed of 3 m/s, if the mass density
of iron ore is 2.5 ton/m3, the belt wth is (k=2.5 x10-4)
A 1000 mm
B 1050 mm
C 1200 mm
D 800 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3

ore per hour at a conveyor speed of 3 m/s, if the mass density
Question
of iron ore is 2.5 ton/m3, the diameter of drive pulley is (K1 =
2 & K2= 80)
A 450 mm
B 480 mm
C 525 mm
D 550 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3

ore per hour at a conveyor speed of 3 m/s, if the mass density
Question
of iron ore is 2.5 ton/m3, if electric motor speed is 1440 r.p.m,
the reduction ratio of gear reducer would be ,
A 15
B 12
C 13
D 16.2
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question A triple ply belt conveyor is required to transport 3 ton of iron ore
800 m and a height of 200 m. what is the maximum suitable
inclination for the conveyor.
A 140
B 16.70
C 17.40
D 18.20
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3

Question
ton per cubic meter, the belt wth is (k= 2.5x 10-4)
A 965 mm
B 950 mm
C 1000 mm
D 900 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3

Question 1000m and a height of 300 m. if the mass density of iron ore is 2.5
ton per cubic meter, the diameter of drive pulley is (K1 = 2 & K2=
63)
A 400 mm
B 378 mm
C 425 mm
D 350 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3

Question
ton per cubic meter, if electric motor speed is 1000 r.p.m, the
reduction ratio of gear reducer would be ,
A 20
B 21.6
C 16.75
D 18.2
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 3
Which of the following is an advantage of mechanical

Question
transportation?
A Transportation is economical and quick
B Handling is contamination free
C No human injury
D All of the mentioned
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Belt and screw conveyors are in all processing units to

Question
transport the final packed cartons.
A True
B False
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question Cranes and hoists have an incline up and down option.

A True
B False
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
Flat belt are used where the distance between the two shaft is
Question
…..
B Not More than 5 m
C More than 10 m
D Upto 30 m
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question V -belt is used where the distance between the two shafts is …..
B Not More than 5 m
C More than 10 m
D None of above
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 3
The power requirement in case of a screw conveyor depends

Question
on
A material to be handled
B rate of transportation
C length of conveyor
D all of the above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 3
Question The thickness of belt is usually specified in terms of

A index number
B merit number
C number of plies
D thickness in mm
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3

belt.
A 15m/s
B 20m/s
C 30m/s
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 3

belt.
A 15m/s
B 20m/s
C 13m/s
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 3

Question
speed is 2 m/s, what is the reduction ratio of gear reducer
A 23.52
B 13
C 20
D 27.20
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3

Question
speed is 2 m/s, what is the reduction ratio of gear reducer
A 3.52
B 6.5
C 2
D 7.20
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
Solve Question 1-14 by referring following data of horizontal

belt conveyor handling bulk material.
 Capacity of conveyor =250 Metric Tons /hr
 Belt speed =1.5m/s
 Wth of the belt = 1200 mm
 Belt mass per unit length = 18.6 kg/m
 Mass of each carrying run ler = 30.0 kg
 Mass of each return run ler = 25.0 kg
 Pitch of carrying run ler = 1.0 m
 Pitch of return run ler = 2.0 m
 Friction factor for lers = 0.02
 Snub factor for snub pulley = 0.03
 Snub factor for drive & tail pulley = 0.06
 Drive & tail pulley diameters = 500 mm
 Frictional resistance due to belt cleaner , = (100B)N
Where B = belt wth ,m
 Angle of lap on drive pulley = 2000
 Coefficient of friction between belt & drive pulley = 0.4
 Drive efficiency =90 %
 Motor speed = 1440
Assuming that the bulk material is carried over a length of 300
m &neglecting resistance at the loading station.
Question Reduction ratio of gear reducer (G) is

A 24.20
B 20.15
C 25.13
D 23.18
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Number of return run lers are

A 124
B 127
C 120
D 118
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Number of carrying run lers are

A 285
B 299
C 314
D 304
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Belt tensions along conveyor belt at point 1 is
A F1 = ( F Slack + 200) N
B F1 = ( F Slack + 300) N
C F1 = ( F Slack + 500) N
D F1 = ( F Slack + 100) N
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 3

A F2 = (1.03 F Slack + 105) N
B F2 = (1.03 F Slack + 106) N
C F2 = (1.03 F Slack + 103) N
D F2 = ( 1.03F Slack + 104) N
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 3

A F3 = (1.03 F Slack + 1623.55) N
B F3 = (1.03 F Slack + 1524.50) N
C F3 = (1.03 F Slack + 1450.80) N
D F3 = (1.03 F Slack + 1823.60) N
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3

A F4 = (1.0609 F Slack + 1682.25) N
B F4 = (1.0609 F Slack + 1586.23) N
C F4 = (1.0609 F Slack + 1672.25) N
D F4 = (1.0609 F Slack + 1423.19) N
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 3

A F5 = (1.12455 F Slack + 1772.6) N
B F5 = (1.12455 F Slack + 1672.6) N
C F5 = (1.12455 F Slack + 1872.6) N
D F5 = (1.12455 F Slack + 1632.6) N
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3
A F6 = (1.12455 F Slack + 1772.6) N
B F6 =(1.12455 F Slack + 1672.6) N
C F6 =(1.12455 F Slack + 1872.6) N
D F6 =(1.12455 F Slack + 1632.6) N
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3

A F7 = (1.12455 F Slack + 7472.6) N
B F7 =(1.12455 F Slack + 7352.53) N
C F7 =(1.12455 F Slack + 7372.6) N
D F7 =(1.12455 F Slack + 7332.6) N
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Belt tensions along conveyor belt at final point is

A Ftight = (1.192 F Slack + 7793.68) N
B Ftight = (1.192 F Slack + 7753.68) N
C Ftight = (1.192 F Slack + 7823.68) N
D Ftight = (1.192 F Slack + 7783.68) N
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Ratio of effective belt tension on drive pulley is

A 3.2
B 4.04
C 5.06
D 3.85
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question effective belt tension on drive pulley is

A Ftight=11055.64 N, Fslack = 2736.55 N
B Ftight= 11155.64 N, Fslack =2756.55 N
C Ftight= 12055.64 N, Fslack =2836.55 N
D Ftight= 11000.64 N, Fslack = 2706.55 N
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Power required on drive pulley
A 12
B 12.5
C 13
D 13.5
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
Solve Question 1-16 by referring following data of horizontal

belt conveyor handling bulk material.
 Capacity of conveyor =300tph
 Density of coal = 800 kg/m3
 Belt speed =2 m/s
 Surcharge factor for polyame belt, C = 0.0725
 Number of plies for polyame belt = 3
 Material factor for plies, K1= 2.0
 Belt tension& arc of contact factor, K2= 80
 Material conveying horizontal length = 260 m
 Center distance between drive & tail pulley = 260 m
 Center distance betweensnub pulley= 255 m
 Ratio of tail pulley to drive pulley diameter =1
 Ratio of snub pulley to drive pulley diameter = 0.5
 Mass of each carrying run ler = 25 kg
 Mass of each return run ler = 20 kg
 Pitch of carrying run ler = 1.0 m
 Pitch of return run ler = 2.5 m
 Friction factor for lers = 0.02
 Snub factor for snub pulley = 0.03
 Snub factor for drive & tail pulley = 0.06
 Frictional resistance due to belt cleaner near drive pulley, =
(100B)N
Where B = belt wth ,m
 Angle of lap on drive pulley = 2100
 Coefficient of friction between belt & drive pulley = 0.4
 Ultimate tensile strength for belt per unit length of ply=60
N/mm
 Drive efficiency =93 %
 Motor speed = 1440
 Mass per unit length of belt = 15.5 kg/m
Question Belt Wth is,
A 1400 mm
B 1000 mm
C 900 mm
D 1200 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Diameter of drive pulley

A 480 mm
B 400 mm
C 450 mm
D 500 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Reduction ratio of gear reducer (G) is

A 24.20
B 20.15
C 18.09
D 23.18
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Number of return run lers are

A 101
B 95
C 110
D 118
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Number of carrying run lers are

A 245
B 259
C 264
D 250
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
A F1 = ( F Slack + 200) N
B F1 = ( F Slack + 300) N
C F1 = ( F Slack + 500) N
D F1 = ( F Slack + 100) N
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 3

A F2 = (1.03 F Slack + 105) N
B F2 = (1.03 F Slack + 106) N
C F2 = (1.03 F Slack + 103) N
D F2 = ( 1.03F Slack + 104) N
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 3

A F3 = (1.03 F Slack + 1223.55) N
B F3 = (1.03 F Slack + 1274.80) N
C F3 = (1.03 F Slack + 1250.80) N
D F3 = (1.03 F Slack + 1323.60) N
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3

A F4 = (1.0609 F Slack + 1342.25) N
B F4 = (1.0609 F Slack + 1386.23) N
C F4 = (1.0609 F Slack + 1313.05) N
D F4 = (1.0609 F Slack + 1323.19) N
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 3

A F5 = (1.12455 F Slack + 1391.83) N
B F5 = (1.12455 F Slack + 1372.6) N
C F5 = (1.12455 F Slack + 1382.6) N
D F5 = (1.12455 F Slack + 1432.6) N
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3

A F6 = (1.12455 F Slack + 1472.6) N
B F6 =(1.12455 F Slack + 1475.17) N
C F6 =(1.12455 F Slack + 1482.6) N
D F6 =(1.12455 F Slack + 1492.6) N
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3

A F7 = (1.12455 F Slack + 5672.6) N
B F7 = (1.12455 F Slack + 5661.6) N
C F7 =(1.12455 F Slack + 5682.6) N
D F7 = (1.12455 F Slack + 5678.6) N
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Belt tensions along conveyor belt at final point is

A Ftight = (1.192 F Slack + 6001.37) N
B Ftight = (1.192 F Slack + 7003.68) N
C Ftight = (1.192 F Slack + 6023.68) N
D Ftight = (1.192 F Slack + 5983.68) N
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Ratio of effective belt tension on drive pulley is

A 3.2
B 4.33
C 5.06
D 3.85
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question effective belt tension on drive pulley is

A Ftight=8279.44 N, Fslack =1911.14 N
B Ftight=8179.44 N, Fslack = 2911.14 N
C Ftight=8379.44 N, Fslack = 3911.14 N
D Ftight=8259.44 N, Fslack = 1811.14 N
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 3
Question Power required on drive pulley

A 12.1
B 12.73
C 13.69
D 13.24
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 3
MSD
Unit 4
Quest A cylinder is consered as thin cylinder when the ratio of inner
ion diameter to the wall thickness is,
A more than 15
B equal to 15
C less than 15
D none of these criteria
Ans A
Mark
1
s
Unit 4
In the case of thick cylinder, the ratio of cylinder inner diameter to

Question
wall thickness is
A more than 15
B equal to 15
C less than 15
D none of these criteria
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Thin spherical vessels subjected to internal pressure, the

Question
circumferential and principal stresses are
A Equal
B circumferential > principal stresses
C circumferential < principal stresses
D circumferential = 2 (principal stresses)
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Longitudinal stress in a thin cylinder is

A Equal to the hoop stress
B Twice the hoop stress
C Half of the hoop stress
D One-fourth of hoop stress
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question If ri and ro be the inner and outer radii of a cylinder then theory of
thick cylinder can be applied when ri/ro is equal to
A 1
B Greater than 1.2.
C 1.2
D Less than 1.2
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
The longitudinal stress induced in a thin walled cylindrical vessel

Question
under internal pressure is
A pi/2t
B pi /4t
C pi /t
D pi /8t
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question In thin cylinders, the circumferential stress is,

A 2(longitudinal stress)
B ½ (longitudinal stress)
C ¼ (longitudinal stress)
D 4(longitudinal stress)
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question The thickness of thin cylinder is determined on the basis of

A radial stress
B longitudinal stress
C circumferential stress
D principal shear stress
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question The thickness of thin spherical shell is given by______where Di , Pi,

&σt are inner diameter, internal pressure and permissible
tensile stress respectively
A Pi Di/2 σt
B Pi Di/4 σt
C 2 Pi Di/σt
D 4 Pi Di/σt
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4
Question In Thick cylinder the circumferential stress at inner surface is

A Pi( + )/( - )
B -Pi
C Pi /( - )
D 0
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4
Question In Thick cylinder the longitudinal stress at inner surface is

A Pi( + )/( - )
B -Pi
C Pi /( - )
D 0
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4
Question In Thick cylinder the radial stress at inner surface is

A Pi( + )/( - )
B -Pi
C Pi /( - )
D 0
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4
Question The thickness of thick cylindrical shell with closed ends and made
of ductile material is determined by
A Lame’s equation
B Clavarino’s equation
C Birnie’s equation
D Barlow’s equation
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
The thickness of thick cylindrical shell with open ends and made of
Question
ductile material is determined by
A Lame’s equation
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
The thickness of thick cylindrical shell with closed ends and made
Question
of brittle material is determined by
A Lame’s equation
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Clavarino's equation is applicable to cylinders with

A close ends
B open ends
C both a. and b.
D none of the above
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question The thickness of high-pressure oil and gas pipes is determined by

A Lame’s equation
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
According to Lame’s equation, the thickness of cylindrical shell is

Question given
by,
A Pi Di/2 σt
B
C
D
where Di , Pi, σt& µ are inner diameter, internal pressure and

permissible tensile stress respectively and Poisson‘s ratio
respectively.
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 4
According to Clavarino’s equation, the thickness of cylindrical shell

Question is
given by,
A Pi Di/2 σt
B

respectively.
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4
Question According to Birnie’s equation, the thickness of cylindrical shell is

given by
A Pi Di/2 σt
B
C
D

respectively.
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4
In thick cylinders, the tangential stress across the thickness

Question
ofcylinder
A remains uniformthroughout
B varies from internal pressure at the inner surface to zero at
theoutersurface
C varies from maximum value at the inner surface to minimum
valueattheoutersurface
D varies from maximum value at the outer surface to minimum
valueattheinnersurface
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
In thick cylinders, the radial stress across the thickness

Question
ofcylinder
theoutersurface
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question In thick cylinders, the axial stress across the thickness of

cylinder
theoutersurface
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
In thin cylinders, the tangential stress across the thickness of

Question
cylinder
theoutersurface
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Methods of Pre-stressing used in pressure vessels

A Autofrettage
B Wire & Tape Wound Cylinder
C Compound cylinder
D All of the above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Why is Autofrettage process used in pressure vessels

A Increase fatigue lifetime
B To enhance carrying capacity
C To introduce compressive resual stress in them
D All of the above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Autofrettageis,
A a surface coating process of cylinders for corrosionresistance
B a heat treatment process for cylinders to relieve
resualstresses
C A process of pre-stressing the cylinder to develop resual
compressive stress at the inner surface
D a surface hardening process of cylinder to improve
wearresistance
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Autofrettage is achievedby,

A Compoundcylinder
B overloading the cylinder before putting it inservice
C winding a wire under tension around thecylinder
D any one of the abovemethods
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question A gasket is made of

A asbestos or cork
B lead, copper or aluminum
C vulcanized rubber
D any one of the above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Pressure vessels are not made of rectangular shape, because

A These are difficult to fabricate
B They are not economical
C They do not give pleasing appearance
D It has been practice to use cylindrical vessels
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Which of the following is not an unfired pressure vessel?

A Heat exchanger
B Storage vessels
C Steam boilers
D None of the above
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question In unfired pressure vessels, category A consists of _________

A joints connecting flanges and flat heads
B welded joints connecting nozzles with main shell
C circumferential welded joints
D longitudinal welded joints
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Selection of welding process does not depend on

A Thickness of material
B Availability of equipment
C Economics of the process
D None of the above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
Which type of welded joints are not included in class 3 pressure

Question
vessels?
A Double welded butt joint with full penetration
B Single welded but joint with back strip
C Single full fillet lap joints
D None of the above
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Class 1 pressure vessels having welded joints are __________

A fully radio-graphed
B partially radio-graphed
C spot radio-graphed
D not radio-graphed
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4

D not radio-graphed
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4

D not radio-graphed
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question A Pressure vessels designed for operation below -200

A Class 3
B Class 2
C Class 1
D All of above
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question A Pressure vessels designed for operation between 00 to 2500

A Class 3
B Class 2
C Class 1
D All of above
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
What is the weld joint efficiency if pressure vessel is fabricated

Question
with single full fillet lap joint?
A 1.0
B 0.55
C 0.65
D 0.85
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Class 1 pressure vessels are to be designed according to ‘Code

forunfired vessel IS-2825’ when
A hydrocyanic ac, carbonyl chlore or mustard gas arestored
B operating temperature is more than-200C
C liquefied petroleum gas isstored
D thickness of shell is less than 38mm
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Class 3 pressure vessels are to be designed according to ‘Code

forunfiredvessel IS-2825’when,
A operating pressure is less than 17.5kgf/cm2
B operating temperature is more than 00C and less than2500C
C thickness of shell is less than 16mm
D any one of theabove
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Weld joint efficiency is maximum when the pressure vessel is

weldedby
A single-welded butt joint with backingstrip
B single-welded butt joint without backingstrip
C double-welded butt joint with fullpenetration
D none of theabove
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Design pressure for unfired pressure vessels is 1.05 times of

Question
_______
A minimum working pressure
B maximum working pressure
C hydrostatic test pressure
D none of the above
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Type of domed heads for the pressure vessel is

A hemispherical head
B semi-ellipsoal head
C torispherical head
D any one of the above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question The end-closure for tall vertical pressure vessel is

B conical head
C Tori-spherical head
D flat head
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question The end-closure for Horizontal pressure vessel is

B conical head
C Tori-spherical head
D flat head
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question The end-closure for tankers of milk, petrol or diesel is

B conical head
C torispherical head
D flat head
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
__________ closure is the weakest enclosure for cylindrical

Question
vessels.
A Hemispherical
B Torispherical
C Conical or flat plate
D Elliptical
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Which types of formed thread is used for vertical pressure vessels

Question
in the pressure range of 0.1 N/mm2 to 1.5 N/mm2?
A Plain formed head
B Tori-spherical dished head
C Semi-elliptical dished head
D All of the above
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
____________head is the most economical for cylindrical vessels

Question
designed for operating at high pressure (> 15 atm.)
A Hemispherical
B Dished
C Ellipsoal or Semi-elliptical
D Conical
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Internal pressure of 2.5 Mpa acts on a pressure vessel of thickness

Question 15 mm and internal diameter of 1500 mm. What is the stress
induced in longitudinal direction?
A 36.63 N/mm2
B 59.13 N/mm2
C 62.62 N/mm2
D 131.25 N/mm2
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4
A cylindrical pressure vessel is subjected to an internal pressure of 3

Mpa on internal diameter of 1000 mm. The vessel is fabricated with
Question single weld butt joint with back strip and is not radio-graphed. What
is the thickness of flat head, if head made of alloy steel has an
ultimate tensile strength of 400 N/mm2(corrosion allowance = 2)
A 110 mm
B 120 mm
C 150.23 mm
D 152.13 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4
A cylindrical pressure vessel is subjected to operating pressure of

0.55 Mpa and corrosion allowance of 2. What is the thickness of
Question
pressure vessel shell if its internal diameter is 2000 mm? (σall = 120
N/mm2 &ηl = 0.75)
A 6.5 mm
B 7 mm
C 9 mm
D 9.5 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question Double weld butt joint and radio-graphed. What is the thickness of
Plain formed head, if head made of alloy steel has an ultimate tensile
strength of 450 N/mm2 (corrosion allowance = 3)
A 60 mm
B 74 mm
C 68 mm
D 79 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4
In a pressure vessel containing multiple openings of various

dimensions at different parts,stress concentration at the edges of the
Question
opening is maximum which becomes negligibly smallbeyond the
area covered by __________ times the hole diameter.
A 2
B 5
C 10
D 20
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
The wall thickness of thin cylindrical shell with hemispherical ends

Question
is __________ that of thespherical ends.
A Equal to
B More than
C Less than
D Either (B) or (C); depends on maximum permissible internal
pressure
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Lug support is meant for supporting __________ vessels.

A Large horizontal cylindrical
B Tall but empty
C Small
D Thick walled tall
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Thin spherical shells subjected to internal pressure, develop

Question
__________ stresses.
A Radial
B Circumferential
C Both (A) & (B)
D Neither (A) nor (B)
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Thin spherical shells subjected to internal pressure, develop

Question
__________ stresses.
A Radial
B Circumferential
C Both (A) & (B)
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Most of the storage vessels/tanks are made cylindrical, because of

Question
the fact that a cylinder
A Has greater structural strength
B Is easy to fabricate
C Both (A) and (B)
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question A cylindrical pressure vessel in horizontal condition is generally

supported on a __________ support.
A Lug
B Skirt
C Saddle
D Guy wire
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question ________dished head is the strongest of all.

A Hemispherical
B Elliptical
C Tori spherical
D None of these
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Vertical vessels are not supported by

A Brackets
B Skirts
C Columns
D Saddles
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Saddle supports are used for supporting __________ vessels.

A Horizontal cylindrical
B Tall vertical
C Thick walled vertical
D Thick spherical
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question For a cylindrical internally pressurized vessel, which of the

following closure types wouldwithstand highest pressure, if each
closure is of the same material and thickness?
A Hemispherical
B Ellipsoal (2 : 1)
C Conical
D Flat plate
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Corrosion allowance in the design of pressure vessel/chemical

equipment is not necessary, if
A Plain carbon steel and cast iron parts are used
B Wall thickness is > 30 mm
C Material of construction is high alloy steel
D Both (B) & (C)
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question Column support for the roof of cylindrical storage tank must be
proved for
A Small diameter tanks
B Large diameter tanks
C Small diameter tall tanks
D All tanks irrespective of their heights and diameters
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question For high pressure process equipment/vessels, the connected

nozzle should be
A Welded
B Screwed
C Flanged
D Brazed
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Maximum thickness of the shell is limited to ____________ in Class 2

Question
pressure vessels
A Upto 25
B 25 to 35
C 35 to 40
D Above 40
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Maximum thickness of the shell is limited to ____________ in Class

Question
3 pressure vessels
A Upto 10
B 11 to 15
C 15 to 20
D Above 20
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
A closed cylinder of 300 mm inner diameter is to be designed

to withstand an internal pressure of 25 MPa. If the cylinder is
made of plain carbon steel 15C8. (Sut=440N/mm2,Syt=240
Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
What is the thickness of the cylinder wall by Maximum
principal stress theory?
A 24 mm
B 26 mm
C 29 mm
D 32 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question made of plain carbon steel 15C8. (Sut=440N/mm2,Syt=240
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
principal strain theory?
A 24 mm
B 26 mm
C 29 mm
D 32 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
What is the thickness of the cylinder wall by Maximum shear
stress theory?
A 24 mm
B 26 mm
C 31 mm
D 39 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
What is the thickness of the cylinder wall by Distortion energy
theory?
A 24 mm
B 26 mm
C 31 mm
D 39 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

Double weld butt joint and radio-graphed. What is the thickness of
Question
Tori-spherical head with crown radius of 1125 mm, if head made of
alloy steel has an ultimate tensile strength of 450 N/mm2 (corrosion
allowance = 3)
A 20 mm
B 24 mm
C 18 mm
D 19 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question Double weld butt joint and radio-graphed. What is the thickness of
hemi spherical head, if head made of alloy steel has an ultimate
tensile strength of 450 N/mm2 (corrosion allowance = 3)
A 12 mm
B 10mm
C 8 mm
D 9 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

Double weld butt joint and radio-graphed. What is the thickness of
Question
conical head with semi cone angle of 300, if head made of alloy steel
has an ultimate tensile strength of 450 N/mm2 (corrosion allowance
= 3)
A 20 mm
B 24 mm
C 18 mm
D 19 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4
Select the correct parameter determined for gasket joint of cylinder

Question
is
A Resultant load on bolts and connected members
B Condition to avo joint separation
C Stiffness of bolt and connected members
D All of above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
A cylinder pressure vessel is made from stainless steel.

Determine thickness of vessel shell when internal diameter is
Question
1500mm, design pressure is 0.44MPa, Permissible stress for
material is 130N/mm2 and weld joint efficiency is 0.85.
A 3mm
B 5mm
C 7mm
D 9mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4
A cylindrical pressure vessel of inner diameter 1875 mm is

subjected to internal pressure of 1.2075 N/mm2. The corrosion
Question allowance is 1.5mm and weld efficiency for nozzle is 0.85, the
allowable tensile stress is 140 N/mm2,find thickness of Vessel
Shell?
A 48 mm
B 36 mm
C 24 mm
D 12 mm
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 4
In pressure vessels if reinforcing material is placed on the inse or

Question
outse surface of vessel wall is known as
A Internal Reinforcement
B Unbalance Reinforcement
C Balance Reinforcement
D External Reinforcement
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4
Which of the following parameters determined for compound
Question
cylinders?
A Increase in inner diameter of jacket
B Decrease in outer diameter of inner cylinder
C Interference between outer and inner cylinders
D All of above
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
A spherical steel vessel of storage capacity 0.0335m3 is subjected

internal pressure of 135 bar. The joint efficiency is 75% and
Question
allowable stress is 120 N/mm2 ,determine inner diameter of
vessel and thickness of vessel.
A 550mm , 40mm
B 500mm , 35mm
C 450mm , 30mm
D 400mm , 15mm
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 4
A forged cylinder is subjected to large internal pressure ,so as to

Question
expand the internal diameter causing overstrain is called
A Compound Cylinder
B Autofrettage
C Tape wound cylinder
D Wire wound cylinder
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
The hydraulic cylinder made up of gray cast iron FG 300 has an

Question inner diameter of 220 mm. The maximum internal pressure is 18
Mpa. If FOS is 2. Find thickness of cylinder and outer dia.
A 12 &225 mm
B 15 &250 mm
C 18 &235 mm
D 17 &260 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4
A 220 mm inner diameter seamless pipe is made up of 15C8

(Sut= 440 N/mm2, Syt=240 N/mm2& v= 0.29) is subjected to an
Question
internal pressure of 18 N/mm2. If the FOS based on yield
strength is 2, determine the thickness of the pipe.
A 17 mm
B 19 mm
C 21 mm
D 23 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4
A horizontal class 1 cylindrical pressure vessel of internal

diameter of 1500 mm is subjected to an internal pressure of 1.2
Question Mpa. The shell as well as heads are made up of low alloy steel
with yield strength of 200 N/mm2, Determine thickness of flat
head. (corrosion allowance = 3)
A 105 mm
B 111.8 mm
C 114.56 mm
D 119.2 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

with a yield strength of 200 N/mm2, Determine thickness of plain
form head. (corrosion allowance = 3)
A 62.62 mm
B 63.2 mm
C 65.22 mm
D 68 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4
Mpa. The shell as well as heads are made up of low alloy steel
Question
with a yield strength of 200 N/mm2, Determine thickness of
Torispherical dished head. (corrosion allowance = 3&Rc=2000
mm)
A 19.74 mm
B 22.84 mm
C 17.46 mm
D 21 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4

Hemispherical head. (corrosion allowance = 3)
A 5 mm
B 7.23 mm
C 6.78 mm
D 9 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4

Mpa. The shell as well as heads are made up of low alloy steel
Question
conical head with semi cone angle 300). (corrosion allowance =
3)
A 13.74 mm
B 11.78 mm
C 9.46 mm
D 15 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4
A spherical steel vessel of storage capacity 0.025m3 is subjected
internal pressure of 20MPa. The joint efficiency is 75% and
Question
allowable stress is 120 N/mm2, determine inner diameter of
vessel and thickness of vessel.
A 100 mm , 4 mm
B 110 mm , 5mm
C 105 mm , 4mm
D 100 mm , 5 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
A 34 mm
B 36 mm
C 39 mm
D 42 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
A 35 mm
B 32 mm
C 39 mm
D 37 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
stress theory?
A 46.5 mm
B 42 mm
C 49 mm
D 41.3 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
What is the thickness of the cylinder wall by distortion energy
theory?
A 6.5 mm
B 8 mm
C 9 mm
D 4.5 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4
Question This equation of thickness is for t = [ +C]

A Plain formed head
B Tori spherical dished head
C Hemispherical head
D Conical head
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question This equation of thickness is for t =
A Plain formed head

B Tori spherical dished head
D Conical head
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
A Plain formed head

B Semi elliptical dished head
D Conical head
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
A Plain formed head

D Conical head
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
A Plain formed head

D Conical head
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
A 14 mm
B 17 mm
C 19 mm
D 12 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
A 14 mm
B 16 mm
C 19 mm
D 15 mm
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
stress theory?
A 14 mm
B 16 mm
C 21 mm
D 19 mm
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
theory?
A 14 mm
B 16 mm
C 11 mm
D 19 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

to withstand an internal pressure of 20MPa. If the cylinder is
Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
A 35 mm
B 37 mm
C 39 mm
D 33 mm
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
A 34 mm
B 36 mm
C 30 mm
D 35 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
stress theory?
A 34 mm
B 36 mm
C 30 mm
D 39 mm
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
theory?
A 34 mm
B 32 mm
C 30 mm
D 39 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
A 124 mm
B 127 mm
C 129 mm
D 120 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
A 114 mm
B 117 mm
C 120 mm
D 110 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4
Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
stress theory?
A 146 mm
B 167 mm
C 210 mm
D 193 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
theory?
A 134 mm
B 126 mm
C 117 mm
D 142 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4
A closed cylinder of 500mm inner diameter is to be designed to

withstand an internal pressure of 35 MPa. If the cylinder is
Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
A 58 mm
B 62 mm
C 69 mm
D 72 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4
Question A closed cylinder of 500mm inner diameter is to be designed to

withstand an internal pressure of 35MPa. If the cylinder is
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
A 74 mm
B 64 mm
C 69 mm
D 58 mm
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
stress theory?
A 74 mm
B 86 mm
C 78 mm
D 83 mm
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 4

withstand an internal pressure of 35 MPa. If the cylinder is
Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
theory?
A 64 mm
B 67 mm
C 71 mm
D 79 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question to withstand an internal pressure of 50MPa. If the cylinder is
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
A 143 mm
B 147 mm
C 149 mm
D 152 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
A 141 mm
B 161 mm
C 149 mm
D 135 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
stress theory?
A 144 mm
B 216 mm
C 231 mm
D 237 mm
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question made of plain carbon steel 15C8. (Sut=440N/mm2,Syt=240
N/mm2, ν=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
theory?
A 184 mm
B 176 mm
C 181 mm
D 179 mm
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 4
A horizontal cylindrical pressure vessel of internal diameter of

1000mm is subjected to an internal pressure of 1Mpa. The shell
Question as well as heads is made up of low alloy steel with ultimate
tensile strength of 420 N/mm2, Determine thickness of flat head.
(corrosion allowance = 3 & Weld effi.=0.85)
A 72 mm
B 68.48 mm
C 64.56 mm
D 79.2 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

1000 mm is subjected to an internal pressure of 1 Mpa. The shell
Question as well as heads are made up of low alloy steel with a ultimate
tensile strength of 420 N/mm2, Determine thickness of plain
form head. (corrosion allowance = 3 & Weld effi.=0.85)
A 42.62 mm
B 37.2 mm
C 40.42 mm
D 48 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4

as well as heads are made up of low alloy steel with a ultimate
Question
tensile strength of 420 N/mm2, Determine thickness of
Torispherical dished head. (corrosion allowance = 3 & Rc=500
mm & Weld effi.=0.85)
A 9.74 mm
B 12.84 mm
C 7.56 mm
D 11 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4

Hemispherical head. (corrosion allowance = 3 & Weld effi.=0.85)
A 5.58 mm
B 3.23 mm
C 6.78 mm
D 9 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
tensile strength of 420 N/mm2, Determine thickness of conical
head with semi cone angle 300). (corrosion allowance = 3& Weld
effi.=0.85 )
A 10.74 mm
B 7.78 mm
C 9.46 mm
D 12 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

1500mm is subjected to an internal pressure of 3 Mpa. The shell
A 173.12 mm
B 168.48 mm
C 164.56 mm
D 179.2 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4

A 105.62 mm
B 107.2 mm
C 100.2 mm
D 96.46 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
A 39.74 mm
B 30.84 mm
C 33.16 mm
D 41 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4

A 14.62 mm
B 13.23 mm
C 16.78 mm
D 11.23 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
effi.=0.85 )
A 30.74 mm
B 24.66 mm
C 19.46 mm
D 32 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

A 172 mm
B 188.20 mm
C 164.56 mm
D 179.2 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

A 112.62 mm
B 103.2 mm
C 108.83 mm
D 114 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4
Question
A 29.74 mm
B 32.84 mm
C 30.39 mm
D 35 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4

A 13.32 mm
B 23.23 mm
C 16.78 mm
D 19 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
effi.=0.85 )
A 20.74 mm
B 22.18 mm
C 19.46 mm
D 25 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4
A 272 mm
B 280.80 mm
C 264.56 mm
D 275.2 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question as well as heads is made up of low alloy steel with a ultimate
A 172.62 mm
B 167.2 mm
C 161.75 mm
D 178 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4

as well as heads is made up of low alloy steel with a ultimate
Question
A 29.74 mm
B 22.84 mm
C 25.82 mm
D 31 mm
Ans C
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question 3000 mm is subjected to an internal pressure of 2 Mpa. The shell
A 18.87 mm
B 13.23 mm
C 16.78 mm
D 19 mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4

Question
effi.=0.85 )
A 40.74 mm
B 31.77 mm
C 29.46 mm
D 35 mm
Ans B
Marks 2
Unit 4
A cylinder pressure vessel is made from stainless steel.

Determine thickness of vessel shell when internal diameter is
Question
1500mm, design pressure is 0.44MPa, Permissible stress for
material is 130N/mm2 and weld joint efficiency is 0.85.
A 3mm
B 5mm
C 7mm
D 9mm
Ans A
Marks 2
Unit 4
A cylindrical pressure vessel of inner diameter 1875 mm is

subjected to internal pressure of 1.2075 N/mm2. The corrosion
Question allowance is 1.5mm and weld efficiency for nozzle is 0.85, the
allowable tensile stress is 140 N/mm2, find thickness of Vessel
Shell?
A 48 mm
B 36 mm
C 24 mm
D 12 mm
Ans D
Marks 2
Unit 4
Design pressure for unfired pressure vessels is ________times of

Question
maximum working pressure
A 1..05
B 2
C 0.5
D 1.5
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question This equation of thickness is for Plain formed head

A
t= [ +C]
B t=
C
t=
D
t=
Ans A
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question This equation of thickness is for Torispherical dished head

A
t= [ +C]
B t=
C
t=
D
t=
Ans B
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question This equation of thickness is for Semi elliptical dished head
A
t= [ +C]
B t=
C
t=
D
t=
Ans C
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question This equation of thickness is for Hemispherical head

A
t= [ +C]
B t=
C
t=
D
t=
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
Question This equation of thickness is for Conical head

A
t= [ +C]
B t=
C
t=
D
t=
Ans D
Marks 1
Unit 4
i i —— —, —
i
> y if / —
7 f
= - ee pemmmncenmmnmne! «pam ole a
an’
»
ee ee ee ae ee ee
i . ij \ ; : aT]
fh kh e x i i ay fi *
‘ . 3 = i
oh M —, \ / é =
\ . \ , i i a
} lens eae = = el ——
eo rr TT, \ i = ae i A i es A
= ‘ é ‘ =I = =
J i J — fam
eile Ld — a a lial A lll al ried salle
=). inl in oe a if om = _ aa ee .
h FY ’
a he i a 7 A —
WA 7 - ri omar | m4 ~y
lial oe . z F oe | oe ee
Scanned with CamScanner

MECHANICAL
SYSTEM
DESIGN
SPPU MECHANICAL
2015 PATTERN
ok
1 min left in chapter 0%

Copyright © 2020 SSS
All rights reserved
The characters and events portrayed in this

book are fictitious. Any similarity to real
persons, living or dead, is coincidental and not
intended by the author.
No part of this book may be reproduced, or

stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted
in any form or by any means, electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording,
or otherwise, without express written
permission of the publisher.
ISBN-13:9781234567890
ISBN-10: 1477123456
Cover design by: Art Painter

Library of Congress Control Number:
2018675309
Printed in the United States of America
1 hr 59 mins left in book 0%

UNIT I Design of Machine
Tool Gear Box
Syllabus: Introduction to machine tool
gearboxes, design and its applica-
tions, basic considerations in design
of drives, determination of variable
speed range, graphical representation
of speed and structure diagram, ray di-
agram, selection of optimum ray dia-
gram, gearing diagram, deviation dia-
gram.
MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTION

& ANSWERS
1. Which of the following is the need
of the gearbox?
A. To vary the speed of the vehicle
B. To vary the torque of the vehicle
C. To vary the power of the vehicle
D. To vary the acceleration of the vehi-
cle
2. Higher the value of geometric pro-
gression, is loss of eco-
nomic cutting speed.

A. Higher
B. Lower
C. Constant
D. None of the above
3. If number of spindle speed steps, z =
27, then Number of stages of the gear-
box is,
A. 1
B. 2
Cc. 3
D. 4
4. Identify the optimum structure di-
agram from the following structural
formulae.
A. 2(3) 3(1)
B. 2(1) 3(2)
C. 3(1) 2(3)
D. 3(2) 2(1)
5. Advantage of the arithmetic Pro-
gression is
A. It is good in High spindle speed
range
B. Itis poor in low spindle speed range
C. All of the above

6. Disadvantage of the arithmetic pro-
gression is
A. It is good in High spindle speed
range
B. It is poor in low spindle speed range
C. All of the above
7. Advantage of the Geometric Pro-
gression is
A. It gives constant loss of economic
cutting speed in total speed range
B. Gives better gearbox design features
C. All of the above
8. Disadvantage of the geometric pro-
gression is
A. Itis good in high spindle speed range
B. It is poor in low spindle speed range
C. All of the above
9. In case of single speed gear box
for every input speed there is/are only
wne=~ output speed.
A. THREE
B. ONE
C. TWO

D. CAN'T SAY
10. Minimum difference between
number of teeth of adjacent gears ina
change gera block must be at least---
A. 6
B. 3
C.4
D.5
11. Spacing between two adjacent gear
on the shaft must be greater than -----
the face width.
A. Twice
B. Thrice
C. Four times
D. can't say
12. Range ratio for central lathe is -
A.8to10
B.15 to 25
C.15to 30
D. 40 to 60

13. Deviation of actual spindle speeds
from calculated spindle speeds must
not exceed—
A. 10 (p-1)
B. 20 (p-1)
C. 30 (p-1)
D. 40 (-1)
14. What is step ratio?
A. In G.P. ratio between the two adja-
cent speeds is known as step ratio
B. In A.S. ratio between the two adja-
C. In H.P. ratio between the two adja-
D. In L.P. ratio between the two adjacent
speeds is known as step ratio
15. What kinematic arrangement is as
applied to gear boxes?
A. The kinematic layout shows the ar-
rangement of gears in a gear box
B. Indicates number of stages used

C. It also provides information’s like
number of speeds available at each
spindle
D. All of the above
16. List out the possible arrangements
to achieve 16 speed gear box
A. 4x2x2 scheme
B. 2x4x2 scheme
C. 2x2x4 scheme
D. All of the above
17. Which of the following type of
drives transmit power by friction?
A. spur gear drive
B. chain drive
C. worm gear drive
D. belt drive
18. When the axes of two shafts are
parallel, use
A. crossed helical gears
B. spur or helical gears
C. worm gears

D. bevel gears
19. When the axes of two shafts are
perpendicular and intersecting, use
A. spur gears
B. bevel gears
C. worm gears
D. helical gears
20. When the velocity ratio is high
and space is limited, use
A. spur gears
B. bevel gears
C. worm gears
D. helical gears
21. An automobile gearbox has
A. simple gear train
B. compound gear train
C. epicyclic gear train
22. Diameter range is high in geomet-
ric progression due to spin-
dle speed.
A. low
B. high
C. constant
D. none of the above
A. Difference between reciprocal of
two successive spindle speeds is con-
stant
B. Difference between two successive

spindle speeds is constant
C. Ratio of two successive spindle
speeds 1s constant
D. Ratio of two successive spindle
speeds is variable
24. What is arithmetic progression?
A. Difference between reciprocal of two
successive spindle speeds is constant
B. Difference between two successive
C. Ratio of two successive spindle
speeds is constant.

D. Ratio of two successive spindle
speeds is variable.
25. What is the purpose of using a gear
box?
A. To increase torque
B. To increase speed
C. Converts single input speed into
multiple output speeds
D. All of above
26. Ratio of two spindle speeds is con-
stant in progression.
A. Arithmetic
B. Geometric
C. Harmonic
27. Which of the following state-
ments is true for structure/speed dia-
grams?
A. Structure diagrams gives range ratio
of spindle speeds
B. Speed diagrams do not give range
ratio of spindle speeds

C. Speed diagrams consider motor
speed
D. All of the above
28. The common normal to the curves
of the two teeth must not pass
through the pitch point.
A. TRUE
B. It must pass
C. It may or may not pass
D. None of the listed
29. What is the maximum percentage
loss of economic cutting speed if geo-
metric progression ratio = 1.06 ?
A. 17.00%
B. 11.50%
C. 5.70%
D. 2.90%
30. A machine tool has minimum
speed of 100 r.p.m. How many speed
steps are required by it to achieve
speed of 200 rpm? (Geometric pro-
gression ratio = 1.06)
1 hr 48 mins left in book A%

A.11
B.12
C.13
D. 14
31. Recommended value of @ for
heavy duty machine tools and au-
tomats—
A.1.12
B. 1.26
€, 1,356
D. 1.14
32. Ratio of two spindle speeds is con-
stant in progression.
A. Arithmetic
B. Harmonic
C. Geometric
D. All of the above
33. Number of spindle speed steps in
machine tool gear box indicated by
letter—
A.Z
B.d

C.Rn

34. The normally selected value/ s of Z
is /are-
A. 4
B. 6
C.8
D. All of the above
35. Letter P indicates in machine tool
gear box as?
A. Number of speed steps per stage
B. Number of spindle speed steps
C. Geometric ratio
D. Range ratio
36. For machine tool gear box the
transmission range should not be
greater than ---
A.9
B. 10
C11
D.8

37. In speed diagram, each horizontal
line represents a---
A. Spindle speed
B. Spindle steps
C.Bothaandb
38. What is /are the limitation/s of
structure diagram---
A. It gives, the spindle speeds
B. It gives, the motor speeds
C. It gives, the geometric progression
ratio
D. All of the above
39. Higher the value of geometric pro-
gression, is loss of eco-
nomic cutting speed.
A. Higher
B. Lower
C. Constant

40. Number of speed steps in any stage
should not be more than---
A.3
B.4
C.5
D.6
41. Salient feature/ s of speed diagram
is / are---
A. It gives, the number of shaft in the
gera box
B. It gives, the number of gears on each
shaft
C. It gives, the spindle speeds
D. All of the above
42. To avoid interference on gears, the
number of teeth on the smallest gear
of the gear box is---
A. 21
B. 16
C.18
D. 20

43. In arthmetic progression the------
between any two successive spindle
speed is constant.
A. Addition
B. Substraction
C. Reciprocal
44. Multispeed drive with arithmetic
progression is /are good in ----- spindle
speed range
A. High
B. Low
C. Bothaandb
45. Multispeed drive with arithmetic
progression is /are poor in ----- spindle
speed range
A. High
B. Low
C.Bothaandb
46. In geometric progression the ------
of any two successive spindle speed is
constant.
A. Addition
B. Substraction

C. Ratio
47. Multispeed drive with geometric
progression is / are poor in------ spin-
dle speed range
A. High
B. Low
C.Bothaandb
48. The smaller value of geometric
progression ratio © is / are used in---
A. Large sized heavy duty machine
B. Automats
C. Both a and b
49. For the lower value of geometric
progression ratio @ the loss of eco-
nomic cutting speed is—
A. Minimum
B. Maximum
C. Moderate
D. Insufficient data
50. "For the lower value of geomet-
ric progression ratio @ the number of
speed steps or spindle speeds Z is---
A. Large

B. Small
C. Insufficient data
51. Standard values of geometric pro-
gression ratio ¢ for series 20/3 equal
to----
A. 1.41
B. 1.56
C. 1.78
D. 2
52. Loss of economic cutting speed is

A. Difference between actual cutting
speed and optimum cutting speed
B. Ratio of actual cutting speed to opti-
mum cutting speed
C. Difference between reciprocal of ac-
tual cutting speed and optimum cut-
ting speed
53. In order to compromise between
the loss of economic cutting speed
and the compactness of the drive the
value of > is selected

A.2<o<3
B.3<o0<4
C.4<b<5
D.1<o<2
54. Maximum and minimum diameter
of a shaft to be machined is 100 mm
and 80 mm respectively. What is the
maximum spindle speed if cutting ve-
locity is 40 m/min?
A.120r.p.m
B. 127 r.p.m
C. 160 r.p.m.
D. 636 r.p.m.
55. Economic cutting speed is mini-
mum if geometric ratio is
A. minimum
B. maximum
C. equal to economic cutting speed
56. In which type of manual transmis-
sion the double-declutching is used?
A. Constant-mesh gearbox
B. Sliding mesh gearbox
C. Synchromesh gearbox
D. Epicyclical gearbox

57. von Mises and Tresca criteria give
different yield stress for
A. Uni-axial stress
B. Balanced bi-axial stress
C. Pure shear stress
D. All of the above
58. The following provides a smooth
means of disengagement and engage-
ment between the engine and the re-
mainder of transmission system
A. Clutch
B. Gearbox
C. Propeller shaft
D. Differential
59. Mechanical transmission can be of
following class
A. Clutch, gearbox and live axle trans-
mission
B. Clutch, gearbox and dead axle trans-
mission
C. Clutch, gearbox and axleless trans-
mission
D. All of the above
1 hr 40 mins left in book B%

60. Transfer case is located next to the
gearbox in
A. Front wheel drive
B. Rear wheel drive
C. Four wheel drive
D. All of the above
61. Axle which form compact unit
with gearbox, clutch and engine
A. Tandem axle
B. Power packed axle
C. Compact axle
62. In machine tool gear box, opti-
mum number of speed steps with in-
crements between---
A.5to10%
B.10to 15%
C.15 to 20 %
D. 20 to 25 %
63. What are the requirements of a
speed gear box?
A. Power transmission
B. Speed variation
C. Toque variation

D. All of the above
64. The main function of an automo-
bile gearbox is
A. to reduce speed
B. to increase speed
C. to provide variable speeds
D. to increase power
65. Why G.P series is selected for ar-
ranging the speeds in gear box?
A. The speed of loss is minimum
B. G.P provides a more even range of
spindle speed at each step
C. The layout comparatively very com-
pact
D. All of the above

66. Which method is used for chang-
ing speeds in gear boxes?
A. Sliding mesh gear box
B. Constant mesh gear box
C. Both (A) and (B)

67. What are preferred Numbers?
A. Rounded off values derived from
geometric series.
B. Number obtained from arithmetic
series
C. Numbers derived from Harmonic
Progression
D. The Rpm values constitute a loga-
rithmic Progression
68. To avoid interference on gears, the
number of teeth on the smallest gear
of the gear box is---
A. 21
B. 16
C.18
D. 20
69. If two meshing gears have 4:1
gear ratio and the smaller gear has 12
teeth, the large gear will have
A. 12 teeth
B. 24 teeth
C. 48 teeth

70. The top cover of all gear drive is_
A. removable
B. non-removable
C. can’t say anything
D. none of the mentioned
71. If a, G, b are in Geometric Progres-
sion then ‘G’ is said to be
A. Arithmetic mean
B. Geometric mean
C. Standard deviation
D. none of above
72. A feed gear box for a screw cutting
lathe is designed on the basis of
A. Geometric progression
B. Arithmetic progression
C. Harmonic progression
D. None of these
73. The constant factor in case of R10
series of preferred numbers is
A. 1.06

B.1,12
C. 1.26
D.1.58
74. A ----------- diagram is a represen-
tation of structural formula, speed in
each stage, the transmission ratio in
each stage
A. Speed diagram
B. Ray diagram
C. Speed chart
D. Structural diagram
75. Contact ratio is always
A. 1
B. >1
C.<1
D. Can’t be determined
76. The size of a gear is usually speci-
fied by
A. pressure angle
B. pitch circle diameter
C. circular pitch

D. diametral pitch
77. The basic series of preferred num-
bers are
A. R5,R10, R20, R40 and R80
B. R10, R20, R30, R40 and R50
C.R5,R10, R15, R20 and R25
78. For construction of kinematic dia-
gram of multispeed gear box, which of
following equation is correct.
A.Z,..>18
B. Z1i1 +Z10 = Z21 +Z20=Z31 +Z30=C
C.Z21+Z11> 4
D. All above equations
79. Permissible speed deviation is
A.+10(g-1)
B.+ 10(@+ 1)
C.4+10(@ x 1)
D. + 10(@/1)
80. Six speed gear box having out-
put speeds are 160rpm Minimum and

1000 rpm maximum. Value of geo-
metric progression ratio is
A. 1.4427
B. 1.6623
C.1.5234
D. 18.722
81. Value of 10is....
A. 1.26
B. 1.36
C. 1.66
D. 1.76
82. Formula for range ratio (Rn ) of

spindle speed is...
A. Thnx / nin
B. Minin / max
C naax t Mmin
D To * Dini,
83. Number of structural formula for
the 'N‘ number of stages is calculated
with the following equation
A, (N!)

B. (Z!)
C. (NI)?
D. (2Z!)?

UNIT II: Statistical
Consideration in Design
Syllabus: Frequency distribution-His-
togram and frequency polygon, normal
distribution - units of central tendency
and dispersion- standard deviation -
population combinations - design for
natural tolerances - design for assem-
bly - statistical analysis of tolerances,
mechanical reliability and factor of
safety.
& ANSWERS
1. The area below normal curve
from (Z = - ~) to (Z = + ») is
A.1
B. 0.6827
C.0.9545
D. 0.9973

2. Pulley Coupled to drive unit
and drives the belt conveyor is
called as
A. head pulley
B. tail pulley
C, crown pulley
D. flat pulley
3. Which of the following is nota
belt conveyor
A. troughed
B. blanket
C. chain
D. flat belt
4. If inclination angle is 55° the
belt conveyor used is called as
A. troughed
B. blanket
C. chain
D. flat belt
5. To calculate capacity of
Horizontal Belt Conveyor-----
factor is used
A. flowability Factor
B. Inclination Factor
C. Surcharge Factor

D. None
6. To calculate capacity of in-
clined Belt Conveyor----- factor
is used :
A. flowability Factor
B. Inclination Factor
C. Surcharge Factor
D. None
7. What is frequency polygon?
A.line graph of class frequency
plotted against class marks
B. Bar chart
C. Histogram
D. Set of rectangles
8. What is a standard deviation?
A.Root mean square deviation
from the mode
B. Variance
C.Root mean square deviation
from the median
D. Root mean square deviation
from the mean
9. What is the mean value in
standard normal distribution
curve
A.1

B. 3
Cc.0
D.5
10. Dispersion of population is
measured in units of
A. Margin of safety
B. Athematic mean
C. standard deviation
D. Reliability
11. If design tolerance is greater
than the natural tolerance
A. There will be some rejection
B. there is no rejection
C. the rejection is inevitable
D. Manufacturing cost will be low
12. In statistically controlled
system
A. variations due to chance causes
are corrected
B. variations due to assignable and
chance causes are corrected
C. variations due to assignable
causes are corrected
D. No any variations
13. Central tendency of popula-
tion is measured in units of

A. square of standard deviation
B. standard variable
C. standard deviation
D. arithmetic mean
14. What is skewness of popula-
tion?
A. measure of sharp peak
B. concentration of data at either
low or high end
C. mid-point of distribution where
most of the data cluster
D.spread of data or extend to
which the observations are scat-
tered
15. Skewness of population is
A. spread of data or extend to which
the observations are scattered
B. midpoint of distribution where most
of the data cluster
C. concentration of data at either low
or high end
D. measure of sharp peak
16. What is kurtosis of popula-
tion?

A.spread of data or extend to
which the observations are scat-
tered
B. measure of sharp peak
C. concentration of data at either
low or high end
D. midpoint of distribution where
most of the data cluster
17. Natural tolerance is
A. Limits within which all but
a given allowable fraction of
components will fall
B. Set somewhat arbitrarily by the
designer
C. machining allowance provided
D. always 95.45%
18. The variations due to chance
causes occur
A. Random
B. Always
C. with some frequency
D. corrected
19. In statistically controlled
system
A. variations due to assignable and
chance causes are corrected

B. variations due to chance causes
are corrected
C. variations due to assignable
causes are corrected
D. variation due to chance cause
always corrected
20. The population of the margin
of safety is formed by
A. Substracting the population of
stress from the population of
strength
B. Adding the population of stress
from the population of strength
C. Multiplying the population of
strength
D. Dividing the population of
strength
21.In the standard normal dis-
tribution curve the standard
variable is.....
A.W
B. X
eX
D.Z

22. In Standard Normal Distribu-
tion curve the area under the
curve is always
A.O
B. Unity
C.2
D. Infinite
23. The resultant population is
normally distributed,
A.when populations of two nor-
mally distributed random vari-
ables are added
B. when populations of two nor-
ables are subtracted
C. when populations of two nor-
ables are multiplied
D. any one of above
24. A mechanical component is
subjected to a mean stress of
100N/mm2 and a standard
deviation of 10 N/mm7?. The
material of the component
has a mean strength of 130

N/mm? and a standard devi-
ation of 15 N/mm. What is
the mean and standard devia-
tion of margin of safety?
A.30&18
B.45 & 22
C.25&10
D. 50&25
25. Reliability is defined as the
probability that a compo-
nent, system or device will
perform without failure for
a specified period of time
under the specified operating
conditions.
A. Incorrect
B. Correct
D. Wrong
26. When the design tolerance
is less than the natural toler-
ance there is
A. No rejection
B. Rejection
D. None of these

27. Coefficient of variation is de-
fined as
A. Ratio of the standard deviation
to the arithmetic mean
B. Ratio of mean deviation to the
arithmetic mean
C.Ratio of quartile deviation to
the arithmetic mean
D. Ratio of mode to the median
28. Ina frequency distribution,
there are different measures
of central value or central
tendency. Choose correct
option.
A. Arithmetic mean
B. Standard deviation
C. Quartile Deviation
D. Number of units
29. Which of the following
curves have the mean value
equal to zero in the graph
of frequency vs random
variable?
A. Normal distribution curve
B. Standard normal distribution
curve

C. Histogram
D. Bar chart
30. The reliability of ball bearing
selected from manufacture’s
catalogue is
A. 90%
B. 50%
C.99%
D. More than 90%
31. Chance cause occurs due
to
A. material
B. manufacturing
process
C. injection process
D. unknown parameter which can
neither be traced nor measured
32. A shaft and bearing assembly
has following dimensions:,
shaft=50+ 0.3mm, Bearing
bore=50+ 0.3mm. Find mean
and standard deviation of
clearance population.
A.0.5mm &0.1414mm
B. 0.8mm & 0.1919
C.0.2 mm & 0.1212

D.0.4mm&0.1111
33. The bolts diameters are
normally distribution with a
mean of 10.01mm and stan-
dard deviation of 0.015mm.
The tolerance specified by
the designer for the bolt di-
ameter is 10+0.025 mm. find
the standard variable (Z, &Z,)
for lower and upper limits.
A.Z,= -2.33 mm & Z, = 1.0
mm
B. Z,=2.00mm & Zo =
0.80mm
C.Z,= -3.00 mm & Z, = - 5.00
mm
D.Z,=-1.95mm &Z, = 0.75mm
34. Sampleisa
A.entire group of the apparently
identical components
B. Part of population
C.not a part of popula-
tion
D. entire group of the apparently
unidentical components

35. Medianisa
A. not a middle value of the obser-
vations arranged in increasing
or decreasing order
B. variance
C.middle value of the observa-
tions arranged in increasing or
decreasing order
D.Root mean square deviation
from the mean
36.modeisa
A. The observation that occurs
most frequently
B. middle value of the observa-
tions arranged in increasing or
decreasing order
C. variance
D.Root mean square deviation
from the mean
37. What is the relation between
standard deviation and
arithmetic mean to deter-
mine coefficient of variation
A.standard deviation+arithmetic
mean

B.standard deviation-arithmetic
mean
C.standard deviation*arithmetic
mean
D. standard deviation/arithmetic
mean
38. Assignable causes are caused
due to changes in
A. Manufacturing
process
B. Material
C. Inspection process
D. All of the above
39. Margin of safety is
A. Difference between mate-
rial strength and_ the
stress
B. material strength= the stress
C. about the design tolerance
D. natural tolerance
40. What causes infant mortality
in mechanical equipments?
A. Design errors
B. Manufacturing de-
fects

C. Installation de-
fects
D. All of the above
41. A plain carbon steel has mean
yield strength of 300 N/
mm? and standard deviation
of 50 N/mm2. What is the
mean and standard devia-
tion of margin of safety, if
mean tensile stress of 250 N/
mm? and standard deviation
of 65 N/mm? acts on it?
A. 23.45 N/mm, 50 N/
mm?
B. 50 N/mm2, 82 N/mm 72
C. 82 N/mm?, 7.07 N/mm?
D. 7.07 N/mm2, 50 N/mm?
42. What is meant by mean time
to failure (MTTF)?
A. Mean time between two succes-
sive failure compo-
nents
B. Maximum time between two
successive failure compo-
nents

C. Sum of survival time for num-
ber of components divided by
number of failures
D.Sum of number of failures di-
vided by survival time for num-
ber of components
43. If a relief valve has reliability
of 0.989, how many failures
are expected in testing 1000
such relief valves?
A.111
B. 100
C.10
D.11
44. Failure rate for safety valve
working for 400 hours is
3x10° failures/hour. What
is the reliability of safety
valve?
A. 0.998
B. 0.989
C.0.888
D. 0.899
45. What is meant by hazard
rate?

A.Number of failures per unit
time per number of items when
exposed for same time
B. Probability of test specimen
fails between timet, andt, + dt,
which survives for time t,
C. Both a. and b.
46. What is the standard devia-
tion of clearance population
for the diameter of shaft
and hole assembly specified
below?
Shaft diameter = 30+0.15,
Hole diameter = 30.5
I+
0.25
A. 0.097 mm
B. 0.059 mm
C.0.036 mm
D.0.390 mm
47. Which of the following
curves have the mean value
equal to zero in the graph
of frequency vs random
variable?
A. Normal distribution curve

B. Standard normal distribution
curve
C. Both a. and b.
48. What is the relation between
standard deviation (o) and
arithmetic mean (1) to deter-
mine coefficient of variation
(C)?
A.C=oatu
B.C=o-wu
C.C=o/u
D.C=oxyu
49. Assignable causes are caused
due to changes in
A. manufacturing
process
B. material
C. inspection
process
D. all of the above
50. Which of these does not

come into the general model
of a process?
A. Input
B. Controllable input factors
C.Uncontrollable inputs fac-
tors
D. Acceptance sampling
51. The uncontrollable factors
are the factor
A. That varies according to a nor-
mal distribution
B. That does not vary at all
C. That can be controlled by the
user
D. That cannot be changed ac-
cording to the wish of the user
52. Which of these steps are not
conducted when the design
of experiment procedure is
adopted?
A.Determining which variable
is most influential to out-
put
B. Determining where to set the
influential controllable factors
so that output is near the nomi-
nal requirement
C. Deleting the uncontrollable
factors

D. Determining where to set the
influential controllable inputs
so that the variability in the out-
put is smallest
53. Experimental design meth-
ods are not used
A. Evaluating the process capabil-
ity
B. In process develop-
ment
C.In process troubleshooting
to improve process _ perfor-
mance
D. To obtain a process that is ro-
bust and insensitive to external
sources of variability
54. Which of these can be used to
develop a new process?
A. Design of experi-
ments
B. Acceptance sam-
pling
C. Control charts
D. Histogram
55. The minimum value in the
class limit is called

A. primary limit
B. upper limit
C. lower limit
D. secondary limit
56. The total of frequency up
to an upper class limit or
boundary is known as
A. average frequency
B. cumulative frequency
C. frequency distribu-
tion
D. frequency polygon
57. The data presented in the
form of frequency data is
known as
A. grouped data
B. ungrouped data
C. secondary data
D. calculated data
58. Anormal distribution
is:
A. Symmetric.
B. Bell-shaped, symmetric, and
unimodal.
C. Unimodal.
D. Bell-shaped.

59. A bar chart constructed in
which the area of each bar is
proportional to the number
of items in each group is
known as
A. pichart
B. histogram
C. frequency distribution table
D. polygon
60. The number of times each
value appears is called the
value's
A. range
B. mode
C. frequency
D. standard Deviation
61. The area under a standard
normal curve is?
A.0O
B. 1
C. Equal
D. not defined
62. Normal Distribution is also
known as
A. Cauchy’s Distribution

B. Laplacian Distribu-
tion
C. Gaussian Distribution
D. Lagrangian Distribution
63. The normal distribution is a
proper probability distribu-
tion of a continuous random
variable, the total area under
the curve f(x) is:
A. Equal to one
B. Less than one
C. More than one
D. Between -1 and +1
64. In normal distribution curve
the random variable is
A.O
B. X
CY
D. 1
65.In standard normal distribu-
tion curve, the mean is equal
to
A.l
B.O
C.-1
D. 2

66. Any Material Handling
Process consists of:
A. Picking up the load
B. Transporting the load
C. Setting the load down
D. All of the above
67. Which of the following is the
type of Bulk Load:
A. Boxes
B. sand
C. machines
D. Containers
type of Bulk Load:
A. Boxes
B. machines
C. Coal
D. Containers
type of Unit Load:
A. Boxes
B. Sand
C. Coal
D. Cement
type of Unit Load:

A. Stones
B. Sand
C. machines
D. Cement
71. Objectives of Material Han-
dling Systems:
A. Accuracy in transportation
B. Low Cost
C. Safety
D. All of the Above
72. Objectives of Material Han-
dling Systems
A. Hoists
B. Conveyors
C. Both of them
D. None

UNIT III: Design of Belt Conveyor
System for Material Handling
Syllabus: System concept, basic prin-
ciples, objectives of material handling
system, unit load and containerization.
Belt conveyors, Flat belt and troughed
belt conveyors, capacity of conveyor,
rubber covered and fabric ply belts,

belt tensions, conveyor pulleys, belt
idlers, tension take-up systems, power
requirement of horizontal belt convey-
ors for frictional resistance of idler and
pulleys.
& ANSWERS
1. Methods of discharge from flat
belt
A. Head & pulley discharge
B. Both end discharge
C. Plow discharge
D. All of the above
2. If the material is poured on the
Stationary belt the angle made
by top surface of belt with the
horizontal is called as
A. Angle of Repose
B. Angle of Surcharge
C. Angle of Inclination
D. Angle of Declination
3. Methods of loading to flat
belt
A. By hooper
B. By preceeding conveyor

C. By travelling machine
D. All of above
4. Roller conveyors are used for
the movement of
A. fine dusts
B. granular materials
C. corrosive materials
D. package goods
5. Out of the following is not the
standard belt width?
400 mm
ADO >
450mm
500mm
550mm
. What is the mass capacity of
flat belt conveyor if volumet-
ric capacity 650.25 m?/hr? (p =
2000 kg/m?)
. 1300.5 ton/hr
NOUOw Pp
. 1285.35 ton/hr
. 1315.25 ton/hr
. 1310.5 ton/hr
. Economy in material handling
can be achieved by
A.employing gravity feed move-
ments

B, minimizing distance of
travel
C. by carrying material to desti-
nation without using manual
labour
D. all of the above
8. The point where material is
loaded on the belt conveyor is
known as
A. Head end
B. Tail end
C. Feed point
D. Discharge point
9. The belt conveyor front end is
known as
A. Head end
B. Tail end
C. Feed point
D. Discharge point
10. The belt conveyor rear end is
known as
A. Head end
B. Tail end
C. Feed point
D. Discharge point

11. If the material is poured on
the moving belt the angle
made by top surface of belt
with the horizontal is called
as
A. Angle of Repose
B. Angle of Surcharge
C. Angle of Inclination
D. Angle of Declination
12. Function of Snub Pulley is
A. Changing the path of Carrying
run of the belt
B. Changing the path of return run
of the belt
C. Facilitating the loading and un-
loading operations
D. All of the above
13. Material handling in auto-
mobile company is done
by
A. Overhead cranes
B. trolley
C. Belt conveyor
D. None of above

14. Is it possible to reduce the
centre distance as much as
we want?
A.Yes power transmission in-
creases
B. No
C. Can’t be cited
15. The following is used to
transport materials if the
length of material travel is
small
A. conveyor
B. Hoisting equipment
C. Overhead equipment
transport materials if the
length of material travel is
large
A. conveyor
B. Hoisting equipment
C. Overhead equipment
17. Which of the following isa
Hoisting equipment
1 hr 1 min left in book 47%

A. Cranes
B. Elevators
C. Hoisting machine
D. All of the Above
18. A triple ply belt conveyor
is required to transport 2
ton of iron ore per hour ata
conveyor speed of 90 m/min
through a distance of 1000m
and a height of 300 m. if the
mass density of iron ore is
2.5 ton per cubic meter, if
electric motor speed is 1440
r.p.m, the reduction ratio of
gear reducer would be
A. 20
B. 21.6
C. 24.1
D; 26.2
mass density of iron ore is 2.5
59 mins left in book 48%

ton per cubic meter, the di-
ameter of drive pulley is (K, =
2 & K,= 80)
A. 450mm
B. 480 mm
C.525mm
D.550mm
mass density of iron ore is 2.5
ton per cubic meter, the belt
width is
A. 1000 mm
B. 1050 mm
C.1200 mm
D. 800 mm
21. Ahorizontal belt conveyor
is used for transporting the
bulk material having mass
density of 2000 kg/m?. The
surcharge factor ‘C’ for the
belt is 0.075, while the belt

width is 800 mm. If the belt
speed is 1.75 m/s, determine
the Volumetric capacity of
conveyor
A. 208.35 m3/hr
B. 212.10 m3/hr
C. 215.68 m3/hr
D. 220.56 m3/hr
22. Fork lift truck is used for
A. lifting and lowering
B. vertical transportation
C. both ‘1’ and ‘2’
23. If motor speed is 1440 rpm,
pulley dia. is 500 mm and
belt speed is 1.5 m/s, what
is the reduction ratio of gear
reducer
A. 23.52
B. 25.13
C.20
D. 27.2
24. The minimum Diameter of
Head Pulley is given by
A. Dinin= KZ,
B. Dinin= Ky +K,+Z,
C. Dinin= K,Z,
D. Dinin= K,K2Z,
25. The minimum Diameter of
tail Pulley is given by
A. Dinin= KZ,
B. D_..,= K,+K,+Zp
C.D_,# K,Zp
D. Dinin= K,K,Z,
26. A horizontal belt conveyor
is used for transporting the
bulk material having mass
density of 5 ton/m?. The sur-
charge factor ‘C’ for the belt
is 0.1, while the belt width is
1000 mm. If the belt speed is
2.5 m/s, determine the Volu-
metric capacity of conveyor
A. 650.25 m?/hr
B. 612.10 m?/hr
C. 665.68 m?/hr
D. 640.56 m?/hr
27. Fabric rubber belts are not
widely used as they can’t be
operated at high speeds.

A. They can’t be used at velocities
50m/s
B. They can be used at high veloc-
ities
C. Limiting velocity is 20m/s
transport materials having
flat bottoms
A. Belt conveyor
B. Roller conveyor
C. Chain conveyor
29. Screw conveyors are
A. Run at very high rpm
B. Suitable for sticky materi-
als
C. Suitable for highly abrasive ma-
terials
D. All of the above
30. Velocity ratio for chain drive
is lesser than that for belts.
A. Yes
B. No
C. In some cases
D. Can’t be determined

31. Material handling consists of
movement of material from
A. one machine to an-
other
B. one shop to another shop
C. stores to shop
D. all of the above
32. Which of the following is not
a hoisting equipment with
lifting gear?
A. Cage elevators
B. Jib cranes
C. Pulleys
D. Troughed belts
33. The layer of a belt is gener-
ally called as
A. Ply
B. Layer
C. Segment
D. Sediment
34. Function of Idler is
A. Changing the path of Carrying
run of the belt
B. Changing the path of return run
of the belt

C. To support belt on the Carrying
run and return run
D. Facilitating the loading and un-
loading operations
35. Hopper bottom type wagon
are used on Indian Railways
for transportation of
A. grains
B. fertilizers
C. coal
D. all of the above
36. What are bulk loads
A. Lump of material
B. Single rigid mass
C. Homogeneous parti-
cles
D. Heterogeneous parti-
cles
37. The diameter of the shorter
pulley in leather belt drive is
265mm. It is rotating at 1440
rpm. Calculate the velocity of
the belt.
A. 23 m/s
B. 20 m/s
C. 18 m/s

D. 18 25m/s
38. Process of converting the
bulk load into a unit load
using container is
A. Materialization
B. containerization
C. Transportation
D. All of above
39. Flowability factor when belt
inclination angle is 10° to
15° is:
A. 2.65*104-4
B. 2.5*104-4
C.2.35*104-4
D. 2.20* 104-4
40. The size of electric motor
depends on
A. hoisting speed
B. weight of load
C. Period of acceleration & retarda-
tion
D. all of the above
41. Creep is the slight absolute
motion of the belt as it passes
over the pulley.
A. Yes

B. No, it is a relative motion
C. None of the listed
D. Itis absolute motion
42. The ------------- type idlers
with ----------------- are used
in heavy duty applications of
belt conveyor.
A. Roller — Ball Bearing
B.Roller - Roller Bear-
ing
C. Rubber cover-Ball Bearing
D. Rubber cover- Roller Bearing
43. Which of the following belt
conveyors have low volume
carrying capacity?
A. Flat belts
B. Troughed belts
C. Both a. and b.
44. What is the mass capacity of
flat belt conveyor if volumet-
ric capacity 212.1 m?/hr? (p =
2000 kg/m?)
A. 420.5 ton/hr
B. 416.35 ton/hr
C. 424.25 ton/hr

D. 428.5 ton/hr
a hoisting equipment with
lifting gear?
A. Cage elevators
B. Jib cranes
C. Pulleys
D. Troughed belts
46. Dry powder solid materials
are transported bya
conveyor
A. Belt
B. Bucket
C. Screw
D. None of these
47. The layer of a belt is gener-
ally called as
A. Ply
B. Layer
C. Segment
D. Sediment
48. A shorter centre distance
is always preferred in belt
drives.
A. Yes due to stability
B. No due to stability

C. Yes due to instability
D. No due to instability
49. Which of the following is a
property of bulk load?
A. Hardness
B. Cake forming tendency
C. Suspension part
D. Weight
50. Principle of ‘Unit load’ states
that
A. materials should be moved in
lots
B. one unit should be moved at a
time
C. both ‘a’ and ‘b’
51. Which belt conveyor pre-
vents sliding down of mate-
rial at an inclination of 550
with horizontal?
A. Flat belt conveyor
B. Troughed belt conveyor
C. Blanket belt conveyor
D. Woven wire belt conveyors

52. The recommended factor
of safety for conveyor belt
is
A. 5to10
B.10to 15
C.15 to 20
D. Above 20
53."Which of the following
statements is false for
troughed belt conveyors?
1. Troughed belt conveyors use
flexible belts
2. They contain five idlers
3. Depth of trough decreases with
increasing number of idlers
4. Flexibility of belt increases
as depth of trough decreases"
A. land2
B. 2 and3
C.3and4
D. 1 and4
52. A horizontal belt conveyor is used
for transporting the bulk material
having mass density of 5 ton/m?. The
surcharge factor ‘C’ for the belt is 0.1,
while the belt width is 1000 mm. If
the belt speed is 2.5 m/s, determine
the volumetric capacity of conveyor
A. 650.25 m?/hr
B. 612.10 m?/hr
C. 665.68 m?/hr
D. 640.56 m?/hr
53. Which discharge method provides
only intermediate discharge for low
speed flat belt conveyor?
A. Plow discharge
B. Tripper discharge
C. Both a. and b.
54. In case of belt conveyors, a tripper
is used to
A. facilitate loading
B. facilitate unloading
C. prevent shock loading
D. prevent damage to belt

55. Power transmitting capacity of V
belts is more than that of flat belt.
A. Yes
B. No
C. Only for V angle > 15
56. The thickness of belt is usually
specified in terms of
A. index number
B. merit number
C. number of plies
D. thickness in mm
57. Mass capacity of a conveyor is 200
ton/hr, if speed of the belt is 4 m/s
then what is the width of horizontal
flat belt conveyor carrying the load?
(Surcharge factor = 0.075 & p = 1000
kg/m?)
A. 499.23 mm
B. 500.0 mm
C. 533.7 mm
D. Insufficient data

58. V -belt is used where the distance
between the two shafts is .....
A. Not more than 10 m

B. Not More than 5 m
C. More than 10m
D. None of above
59. What is the mass capacity of flat
belt conveyor if volumetric capacity
0.55 m?/hr? (p = 1500 kg/m?)
A. 825 tons/hr
B. 825 kg/hr
C. 2.727 tons/hr
D. 2722 kg/hr
60. Flat belt are used where the
distance between the two shaft is
A. Not more than 10m

B. Not More than 5 m
C. More than 10m
D. Upto 30m

61. A triple ply belt conveyor is re-
quired to transport 2 ton of iron ore
per hour at a conveyor speed of 90 m/
min through a distance of 1000m and
a height of 300 m. what is the maxi-
mum suitable inclination for the con-
veyor.
A. 15
B. 16.7
C.17.4
D. 18.2
62. Determine the capacity of con-
veyor in ton/hr, if Mass density is
2 ton/m?,Belt speed is 1.75m/s, Belt
width, B= 0.8 m and K for surcharge
angle 250 =2.35x10+*
A. 1.329 tone/hr
B. 2.300 tone/hr
C. 3.325 tone/hr
D. 4.320 tone/hr
63. Which of the following is a prop-
erty of unit load?
A. weight

B. Cake forming tendency
C. Lump size
D. density
64. The ------------------- take up device
consist of two bent pulleys, a take up
pulley and dead weights
A. Screw Type Take
B. Winch Operated Type Take
Cc, Horizontal Gravity Type
Take
D. Vertical Gravity Type Take
65. The point where material is loaded
on the belt conveyor is known as
A. Head end
B. Tail end
C. Feed point
D. Discharge point
66. The angle of surcharge (f) will al-
ways be ----------- than the angle of re-
A. Greater

B. Less
C. Equal
D. None of above
67. The angle of repose depends on
A. shape of the material
B. smoothness of the material
C. degree of fineness of the material
D. all of the above
68. Purpose of using idlers
A. To support the conveyor belt on
lower run
B. To provide support to belt at loading
point
C. To align the belt on the pul-
ley
D. All of above
69. Volumetric capacity of horizontal
belt conveyor is given as
A. Q= Mb2v m?/s
B. Q= kb?v m?/s
C. Q= Cb?v m?/s

D.M=pQ
70. In abrasive load transportation ap-
plications idlers used are
A. Roller type idlers with ball bear-
ings
B. Roller type idlers with roller bear-
ings
C. Rubber covered idlers
D. All of above
71. In material handling equipment
through belt conveyors is classified as
A. Conveying Equipment
B. Surface and overhead Equipment
C. Hoisting Equipment
D. Elevators.
72. Belt take up device is used in belt
conveyor
A. To maintain adequate tension in
belt
B. To adjust load on belt
C. To support load on belt

D. All of above
73. Which of the following is the least
preferred conveyor for handling glue?
A. Belt conveyor
B. Continuous flow conveyor
C. Pneumatic conveyor
D. Screw conveyor
74. The angle of repose for anthracite
coal is around
A, Ed.
BLT
C.27
D. 37
75. Chains for material handling
equipment are generally made of
A. cast iron
B. wrought iron
C. mild steel
D. carbon steel
76. Overbridge crane has
A. transverse movement

B. longitudinal movement
C. both ‘a’ and ‘b’
77. When the belt speed increases
A. power transmitted increases
B. power transmitted decreases
C. power transmitted increases to a
maximum value and then decreases
D. power transmitted remains the same

UNIT IV: Design of Cylinders
and Pressure Vessels
Syllabus: Design of Cylinders: Thin and thick
cylinders, Lame's equation, Clavarino’s and
Bernie's equations, design of hydraulic and
pneumatic cylinders, auto-frettage and com-
pound cylinders,(No Derivation) gasketed joints
in cylindrical vessels (No derivation).
Design of Pressure vessel : Modes of failures in
pressure vessels, unfired pressure vessels, clas-
sification of pressure vessels as per I. 2825 -
categories and types of welded joints, weld joint
efficiency, stresses induced in pressure vessels,
materials for pressure vessel, thickness of cylin-
drical shells and design of end closures as per

code, nozzles and openings in pressure vessels,
reinforcement of openings in shell and end clo-
sures - area compensation method, types of ves-
sel supports (theoretical treatment only).

& ANSWERS
1. In thick cylinders, the radial
stress across the thickness of
cylinder
A. remains uniform throughout
B. varies from internal pressure
at the inner surface to zero at
the outer surface
C. varies from maximum value at
the inner surface to minimum
value at the outer surface
D. varies from maximum value at
the outer surface to minimum
value at the inner surface
2. Auto frettage is,
A.a surface coating process of
cylinders for corrosion resis-
tance

B.a heat treatment process for
cylinders to relieve residual
stresses
C. A process of pre-stressing the
cylinder to develop residual
compressive stress at the inner
surface
D.a surface hardening process of
cylinder to improve wear resis-
tance
3. Auto frettage is achieved
by,
A. Compound cylinder
B. overloading the cylinder before
putting it in-service
C. winding a wire under tension
around the cylinder
D. any one of the above methods
4. Pressure vessels are not
made of rectangular shape,
because
A.These are difficult to fabri-
cate
B. They are not economical
C. They do not give pleasing ap-
pearance

D. It has been practice to use cylin-
drical vessels
an unfired pressure vessel?
A. Heat exchanger
B. Storage vessels
C. Steam boilers
6. In unfired pressure vessels,
category A consists of
A.joints connecting flanges and

flat heads
B. welded joints connecting noz-
zles with main shell
C. circumferential welded
joints
D. longitudinal welded joints
7. Which type of welded joints
are not included in class 3
pressure vessels?
A. Double welded butt joint with
full penetration
B. Single welded but joint with
back strip
C. Single full fillet lap joints

pressure vessels?
full penetration
back strip
9. Class 1 pressure vessels
having welded joints are
A. fully radio-graphed
B. partially radio-
graphed
C. spot radio-graphed
D. not radio-graphed
B. partially radio-
graphed

pressure vessels?
full penetration
back strip
B. partially radio-
graphed
B. partially radio-
graphed

B. partially radio-
graphed
12. Acylinder is considered as
thin cylinder when the ratio
of inner diameter to the wall
thickness is,
A. more than 15
B. equal to 15
C. less than 15
D. none of these criteria
13. Thin spherical vessels sub-
jected to internal pressure,
the circumferential and prin-
cipal stresses are
A. Equal
B. circumferential > principal
stresses
C.circumferential < principal
stresses
31 mins left in book FAY

D. circumferential = 2 (principal
stresses)
14. Longitudinal stress in a thin
cylinder is
A. Equal to the hoop stress
B. Twice the hoop stress
C. Half of the hoop stress
D. One-fourth of hoop stress
15. In thin cylinders, the circum-
ferential stress is,
A. 2(longitudinal stress)
B. 1/2 (longitudinal stress)
C. 1/44 longitudinal stress)
D. 4(ongitudinal stress)
16. The thickness of thin cylin-
der is determined on the
basis of
A. radial stress
B. longitudinal stress
C. circumferential
stress
D. principal shear stress
17. The thickness of thick cylin-
drical shell with closed ends
and made of ductile material
is determined by

A. Lame’s equation
B. Clavarino’s equation
C. Birnie’s equation
D. Barlow’s equation
drical shell with open ends
and made of ductile material
is determined by
drical shell with closed ends
and made of brittle material
is determined by
20. The thickness of high-
pressure oil and gas pipes is
determined by

21. In thick cylinders, the
tangential stress across the
thickness of cylinder
A. remains uniform throughout
B. varies from internal pressure at
the inner surface to zero at the
outer surface
C. varies from maximum value at
the inner surface to minimum
value at the outer surface
D. varies from maximum value at
the outer surface to minimum
value at the inner surface
22. A Pressure vessels designed
for operation below -200
A. Class 3
B. Class 2
C. Class 1
D. All of above
23. What is the weld joint effi-
ciency if pressure vessel is
fabricated with single full fil-
let lap joint?
A.l
B. 0.55

C.0.65
D.0.85
24. Class 1 pressure vessels are
to be designed according
to ‘Code for unfired vessel
IS-2825’ when
A.hydrocyanic acid, carbonyl
chloride or mustard gas are
stored
B. operating temperature is more
than-200C
C. liquefied petroleum gas _ is
stored
D.thickness of shell is less than
38mm
25. Weld joint efficiency is
maximum when the pressure
vessel is welded by
A. single-welded butt joint with
backing strip
B. single-welded butt joint with-
out backing strip
C. double-welded butt joint with
full penetration

26. Design pressure for unfired
pressure vessels is 1.05 times
of
A.minimum working pres-
sure
B. maximum working pressure
C. hydrostatic test pres-
sure
27. The end-closure for tall verti-
cal pressure vessel is
A. hemispherical head
B. conical head
C. Tori-spherical head
D. flat head
28. The end-closure for Horizon-
tal pressure vessel is
B. conical head
C. Tori-spherical head
D. flat head
29. The end-closure for tankers
of milk, petrol or diesel is
B. conical head
C. torispherical head

D. flat head
30. head is the most
economical for cylindrical
vessels designed for oper-
ating at high pressure (> 15
atm.)
A. Hemispherical
B. Dished
C.Ellipsoidal or Semi-ellipti-
cal
D. Conical
31. Lug support is meant for sup-
porting vessels.
A. Large horizontal cylindrical
B. Tall but empty
C. Small
D. Thick walled tall
32. This equation of thick-
ness is for t =
= 0.4 at [Fo +C] |
A. Plain formed head

B. Tori spherical dished head
C. Hemispherical head
D. Conical head

33. This equation of thickness is
vidi
fort 26a Tin “os pit cl
A. Plain formed head
B. Semi elliptical dished head
C. Hemispherical head
D. Conical head
34. A horizontal cylindrical
pressure vessel of internal
diameter of 1000mm is sub-
jected to an internal pressure
of 1Mpa. The shell as well as
heads is made up of low alloy
steel with ultimate tensile
strength of 420 N/mm72,
Determine thickness of flat
head. (corrosion allowance =
3 & Weld effi.=0.85)
A. 72mm
B. 68.48 mm
C.64.56mm
D. 79.2 mm
diameter of 1000 mm is sub-

of 1 Mpa. The shell as well
as heads are made up of low
alloy steel with a ultimate
tensile strength of 420 N/
mm2, Determine thickness of
conical head with semi cone
angle 300). (corrosion al-
lowance = 3& Weld effi.=0.85 )
A. 10.74 mm
B. 7.78 mm
C.9.46 mm
D. 12mm
36. Acylinder pressure vessel is
made from stainless steel.
Determine thickness of
vessel shell when internal
diameter is 1500mm, design
pressure is 0.44MPa, Per-
missible stress for material
is 130N/mm7? and weld joint
efficiency is 0.85.
A. 3mm
B. 5 mm
C.7 mm
D.4mm
37. A gasket is made of

A. asbestos or cork
B. lead, copper or aluminum
C. vulcanized rubber
D. any one of the above
38. Selection of welding process
does not depend on
A. Thickness of material
B. Availability of equipment
C. Economics of the process
39. A Pressure vessels designed
for operation between 00 to
2500
A. Class 3
B. Class 2
C. Class 1
D. All of above
40. The wall thickness of thin
cylindrical shell with hemi-
spherical ends is
that of the spherical ends.
A. Equal to
B. More than
C. Less than

D. Either (B) or (C); depends on
maximum permissible internal
pressure
41. Acylindrical pressure vessel
in horizontal condition is
generally supported ona
support.
A. Lug
B. Skirt
C. Saddle
D. Guy wire
42. Vertical vessels are not sup-
ported by
A. Brackets
B. Skirts
C. Columns
D. Saddles
43. Corrosion allowance in the
design of pressure vessel/
chemical equipment is not
necessary, if
A. Plain carbon steel and cast iron
parts are used
B. Wall thickness is > 30 mm
C. Material of construction is high
alloy steel

D. Both (B) & (C)
44. For high pressure process
equipment/vessels, the con-
nected nozzle should be
A. Welded.
B. Screwed
C. Flanged
D. Brazed
45. For high pressure process
equipment/vessels, the con-
nected nozzle should be
A. Welded
B. Screwed
C. Flanged
D. Brazed
46. In pressure vessels if rein-
forcing material is placed on
the inside or outside surface
of vessel wall is known as
A. Internal Reinforce-
ment
B. Unbalance Reinforcement
C. Balance Reinforcement
D. External Reinforcement
is subjected to operating

pressure of 0.55 Mpa and cor-
rosion allowance of 2. What
is the thickness of pressure
vessel shell if its internal
diameter is 2000 mm? (call =
120 N/mm? &l = 0.75)
A.6.5 mm
B. 7mm
C.9mm
D.9.5 mm
48. A cylindrical pressure vessel
is subjected to an internal
pressure of 2 Mpa on internal
diameter of 1500 mm. The
vessel is fabricated with
Double weld butt joint and
radio-graphed. What is the
thickness of Plain formed
head, if head made of alloy
steel has an ultimate tensile
strength of 450 N/mm? (cor-
rosion allowance = 3)
A.60mm
B. 74mm
C.68 mm
D. 79 mm

49. A forged cylinder is subjected
to large internal pressure ,so
as to expand the internal di-
ameter causing overstrain is
called
A. Compound Cylinder
B. Autofrettage
C. Tape wound cylinder
D. Wire wound cylinder
50. The hydraulic cylinder made
up of gray cast iron FG 300
has an inner diameter of 220
mm. The maximum internal
pressure is 18 Mpa. If FOS is
2. Find thickness of cylinder
and outer dia.
A.12 &225 mm
B.15 &250mm
C.18 &235mm
D. 17 &260 mm
51. Aclosed cylinder of 500mm
inner diameter is to be
designed to withstand an
internal pressure of 35 MPa.
If the cylinder is made of
plain carbon steel 15C8.

(Sut=440N/mm2,Syt=240 N/
mm_2, v=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
What is the thickness of the
cylinder wall by Maximum
A.58mm
B.62 mm
C.69mm
D. 72mm
internal pressure of 35MPa.
mm2, v=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
A. 74mm
B. 64mm
C.69 mm
D. 58mm

(Sut=440N/mm27, Syt=240 N/
mm?, v=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
shear stress theory?
A. 144mm
B.216 mm
C.231mm
D. 237 mm
mm2, v=0.29 and FOS=1.5).
cylinder wall by Distortion
energy theory?
A. 184mm
B. 176mm

C.181mm
D.179 mm
55. Ahorizontal cylindrical
of 1Mpa. The shell as well as
A.72mm
B. 68.48 mm
C.64.56 mm
D. 79.2 mm
mm 2, Determine thickness

of plain form head. (corro-
sion allowance = 3 & Weld
effi.=0.85)
A. 42.62 mm
B. 37.2 mm
C. 40.42 mm
D. 48 mm
mm/?, Determine thickness
of Torispherical dished
head. (corrosion allowance
= 3 & Rc=500 mm & Weld
effi.=0.85)
A.9.74mm
B. 12.84 mm
C.7.56mm
D. 11mm

mm?, Determine thickness
of conical head with semi
cone angle 300). (corro-
sion allowance = 3& Weld
effi.=0.85 )
A. 10.74mm
B. 7.78 mm
C.9.46 mm
D. 12mm
59. Ina pressure vessel contain-
ing multiple openings of var-
ious dimensions at different
parts, stress concentration
at the edges of the opening
is maximum which becomes
negligibly small beyond the
area covered by
times the hole diameter.
A.2
B..5

C.10
D. 20
60. Design pressure for un-
fired pressure vessels is
times of maximum
working pressure
A.1..05
B. 2
C.0.5
D. 1.5
of inner diameter 1875
mm is subjected to internal
pressure of 1.2075 N/mm?.
The corrosion allowance is
1.5mm and weld efficiency
for nozzle is 0.85, the allow-
able tensile stress is 140 N/
mm_7, find thickness of Vessel
Shell?
A.48mm
B. 36 mm
C.24mm
D. 12mm
62. A cylinder pressure vessel is
made from stainless steel.
9 mins left in book 9GA%

Determine thickness of
vessel shell when internal
diameter is 1500mm, design
pressure is 0.44MPa, Permis-
sible stress for material is
130N/mm2 and weld joint
efficiency is 0.85.
A. 3mm
B. 5mm
C. 7mm
D. 9mm
of 2 Mpa. The shell as well as
steel with a ultimate tensile
strength of 420 N/mm, De-
termine thickness of conical
head with semi cone angle
300). (corrosion allowance =
3& Weld effi.=0.85 )
A. 40.74 mm
B. 31.77 mm
C. 29.46 mm

D. 35mm
as heads is made up of low
mm?, Determine thickness
of Hemispherical head. (cor-
rosion allowance = 3 & Weld
effi.=0.85)
A. 18.87 mm
B. 13.23 mm
C. 16.78 mm
D.19mm

A. 173.12 mm
B. 168.48 mm
C. 164.56 mm
D. 179.2 mm
steel with a ultimate tensile
strength of 420 N/mm/?,
Determine thickness of Tori-
spherical dished head. (corro-
sion allowance = 3 & Rc=1250
A. 29.74mm
B. 22.84 mm
C. 25.82 mm
D. 31mm

effi.=0.85)
A. 105.62 mm
B. 107.2 mm
C. 100.2 mm
D. 96.46 mm
as heads is made up of low
mm2, Determine thickness
effi.=0.85)
A. 172.62 mm
B. 167.2 mm

C.161.75 mm
D. 178 mm
= 3 & Rc=1100 mm & Weld
effi.=0.85)
A. 39.74mm
B. 30.84 mm
C. 33.16 mm
D.41 mm

= 3 & Rc=1500 mm & Weld
effi.=0.85)
A. 29.74mm
B. 32.84 mm
C. 30.39 mm
D. 35 mm
effi.=0.85)
A. 112.62 mm
B. 103.2 mm
C. 108.83 mm
D. 114mm

strength of 420 N/mm,
A.172mm
B. 188.20 mm
C. 164.56 mm
D. 179.2 mm
of Hemispherical head. (cor-
1 min left in book 99%

rosion allowance = 3 & Weld
effi.=0.85)
A. 14.62 mm
B. 13.23 mm
C. 16.78 mm
D. 11.23 mm
mm2, Determine thickness of
conical head with semi cone
angle 300). (corrosion al-
lowance = 3& Weld effi.=0.85 )
A. 30.74 mm
B. 24.66 mm
C. 19.46 mm
D. 32 mm
1 min left in book 99%

1.Diame terr angeish i
ghinge ome tr
icpr ogre s
s i
ondueto
_________spi ndl
es peed.
a.Low
b.Hig h
c.Cons tant
d.Noneoft h eabov e
Ans :a
2.Wh atish ar monicpr ogre
ss ion?
a.Differenc ebetwe enreci
proc aloft wos uc ce
s s
ivespi
ndl
e
spe e
dsi sc ons t
ant
b.Differenc ebetwe entwos ucc es
sivespi ndlespeedsis
cons tant
c.Rat iooft wos u ccessi
vespindlespe edsi scons t
ant.
d.Rat iooft wos uccessi
vespi ndl
es peedsi svariabl
e.
Ans :a
3.Rat iooft wos pi
ndlespeedsi scons t
anti n_ ____
___
_
prog ressi
on.
a.Arithmetic
b.Geome tric
c.
Har moni c
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :b
4. Whatist hepu rpos eofusingag e
arbox ?
a.Toi ncreas etorque
b.Toi ncreas espe ed
c.
Conv ert
ss i
ngleinputspeedi ntomu lt
ipleou tputspee
ds
d.Alloftheabov e
Ans :d
5
.Whic
hoft h
ef ol
l
owings
tate
ment
sist
ruef
or
s
tru
cture
/speeddiag
rams?
a.Structurediag ramsg ivesrang erat i
oofs pi
ndl espeeds
b.Spe e
ddi agramsdonotg iverang er atioofs pindlespeeds
c.
Spe eddiag ramsc onsidermot ors pe ed
d.Alloftheabov e
Ans :b
6.Wh atist hemax i
mu mpe rcentagel os sofe c
onomi ccutti
ng
spe edifgeome tri
cprog re
s si
on
ratio=1 .
06?
a.17.0%
b.11.
5%
c.
5 .7%
d.2.9%
Ans :d
7.Amac hinet oolhasmi nimu ms peedof1 00r .p.m.Howmany
spe edstepsar erequir
edby
i
tt oac hi
ev espe edof2 00r pm?( Geome tri
cprog ressionrati
o=
1.
06 )
a.11
b.12
c.
1 3
d.14
Ans :b
8.Max imumandmi nimu mdi ame te
rofas haftt obemac hi
ned
i
s1 00mmand8 0mm
respe ct
ively.Wh atisthemax i
mu ms pi ndlespee difcutt
ing
velocit
yis40m/ min?
a.120r .
p.m
b.127r .
p.m
c.
1 60r .
p.m.
d.636r .
p.m.
Ans :c
9.E conomi ccutti
ngs pe edismi ni
mu mi fg
eome t
ricr ati
ois
______ ___
a.Minimu m
b.Max imu m
c.Equ al t
oe conomi cc utti
ngs peed
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
10. Wh atist heg e
ome t
ricpr ogressi
onr ati
oi fmax imu mand
mini mu ms pi
ndles peedsar e
500r .p.mand300r .p.
mr especti
vel
y ?(Nu
mbe rofs peedsteps
=7)
a.0.91
b.1.5
c.1.
08
d.2.0
Ans :c
11.Inmac hi
net oolgearbox , opti
mumnu mbe rofs pe e
ds t
eps
withi nc r
e mentsbe twee n-
--
a.5t o1 0%
b.10t o1 5%
c.15t o2 0%
d.2 0t o2 5%
Ans :c
12.Inc aseofs inglespe edge arboxf oreve
r yinputs peedther
e
i
s /areonl y--
--
-outputs peed.
a.Th r ee
b.Two
c.One
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :c
13.Inar thme t
icpr ogres s
iont he-
--
--
-betweenanyt wo
succe ssi
v espindl
es peedi
sconstant.
a.Addi t
ion
b.Su bstraction
c.Re ci
pr ocal
d.Noneoft h eabove
Ans:a
14.Mu lt
ispee ddri
vewi t
harit
hmeticprogress
ioni
s/aregood
i
n- -
---
spindles peedrange.
a.Hig h
b.Low
c.Bot haandb
d.Noneoft h eabove
Ans:a
15.Mu l
tispee ddri
vewithari
thmeticprogre
ssioni
s/arepoori
n
-
---
-spindles peedrange.
a.Hig h
b.Low
c.Bot haandb
d.Noneoft h eabove
Ans:b
16.I
ng eome tri
cpr ogr
essi
onthe---
--
-ofanytwosucc
essiv
espindles peediscons t
ant.
a.Addi t
ion
b.Su bstraction
c.Rat i
o
d.Noneoft h eabove
Ans:c
17.Mu l
tispee ddri
vewithgeometr
icpr ogr
essioni
s/arepoor
i
n---
---s
pindles peedrange.
a.Hig h
b.Low
c.Bot haandb
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :
b
18.Mu lti
sppeddrivewithgeometri
cpr ogr
essiongi
vesbe t
ter
gearboxde sig
nf eature.
a.Tr ue
b.Fals e
Ans :
a
19.Inwh ichlawsofs teppedreg
u l
ati
onofs peedsgiv
es
cons tantlossofe conomiccutt
ing
speed.
a.Geome tri
cprog r
ession
b.Art hmeticprogressi
on
c.Har moni cprogressi
on
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :
a
20. I
nh armoni cprogressi
onthe---
--
betweenreci
procalofany
twos uccessi
ves pi
ndlespeed
i
sc ons tant.
a.Addi ti
on
b.Difference
c.Insu ff
ici
antdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :
b
21.Mu lti
speeddrivewithharmonicprogressi
onis/ar epoori
n
-
---
--spindl
es peedrange.
a.Hig h
b.Low
c.Bot haandb
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :
a
22.Multispeeddr i
vewi thharmoni cprog r
essioni s/ar egoodi
n-
-
---
-spindles pe e
dr ang e.
a.High
b.Low
c.Bothaandb
d.Noneoft h eabov e
Ans :
b
23.Ifs peeds t e
psar eobtainedbyar it
h ematicorh armonic
progre ssiont henu mbe rofg ear
pairsr equiredar ee qualtot henumbe rofs pee dsteps.
a.Th i
smak e sg earboxbu lky
b.Gears hif
itingtimec onsu mingaswe llasinc onvenient
c.Entirear rang eme nteconomi call
yinfeasi
ble
d.Alloft heabov e
Ans :
d
24.Th ec ons tantlos sofec onomi ccut
t i
ngs peedov erthetot
al
spindles peedr ang e,
the
spindles peedmu s tbein-
--
-
a.Geome tri
cpr ogression
b.Arth me ti
cpr og ressi
on
c.Harmoni cpr og ressi
on
d.Noneoft h eabov e
Ans :
a
25.Compac tandbe tte
rg earboxde signedobt aine
di nwh i
ch
l
aw- -
-
a.Geome tri
cpr ogression
b.Arth me ti
cpr og ressi
on
c.Harmoni cpr og ressi
on
d.Noneoft h eabov e
Ans :
a
26.Th emu l
tispe eddrivewith---
-lawisc ommanl yusedin
mac h i
netool drive.
a.Ar thmeti
cpr og re ssi
on
b.Har monicpr og re s
s i
on
c.Ge ometri
cpr ogre ssi
on
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :c
27.Th eranger at iofort h
emu l
tispeedgearboxi s--
-
a.Th eratioofmax imumou t putspeedofg earboxt othe
minimu mou tpu ts peedoft hegear
box .
b.Th eratioofmi nimu mou tputspe e
dofg earboxt ot he
max imu mou tpu ts peedofth egear
box .
c.Ins uf
fici
antdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
28.Th evalueofr ang erati
oRni sl ar
g eforgeneralpurpose
mac h i
netools -
-
a.Tr ue
b.Fal s
e
c.Ins uf
fici
antdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
29.Th evalueofr ang erati
oRni ss mal l
forse c
ialpurpose
mac h i
netools -
-
a.Tr ue
b.Fal s
e
c.Ins uf
fici
antdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
30. Thes mall
e rv alueofg e
ome tricprogressionratioфis/are
usedin---
a.Larges izedheav ydu t
ymac hi
ne
b.Au t
omat s
c.Bothaandb
d.Noneoft heabove
Ans :
c
31.
Th elargervalueofg e
ome t
ricprogr
e s
sionrati
oфi su
sedin
-
--
a.Smal lsi
ze dspecialpu r
posemac hi
netools
b.Larges izedheavydu t
ymac hi
ne
c.Automat s
d.
Noneoft heabov e
Ans :
a
32.Fort hehigherthev al
ueofg eometr
icprogress
ionrat
ioф
thelossofe conomi cc utt
ing
speedis--
a.Low
b.High
c.Mode rate
d.Insuffic
iantdata
Ans :
a
33.Fort helowerval ueofg e
ome tr
icprogres
sionrati
oфthe
l
os sofe conomicc uttingspeed
i
s--
a.Minimu m
b.Max i
mu m
c.Mode rate
d.Insuffic
iantdata
Ans :
b
34.Fort helowerv alueofg e
ome tr
icprogressi
onrati
oфt h
e
numbe rofs peeds tepsor
spindles pe e
dsZi s---
a.Lar ge
b.Smal l
c.I
ns uff
iciantdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
35.F orth ehigherv alu
eofg e
ome tri
cpr og
ressi
onratioфthe
numbe rofs peeds tepsor
spindles pe e
dsZi s---
a.Hi gh
b.Low
c.I
ns uff
iciantdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :b
36.St andar dvalu e
sofg eome t
ricpr og
ressi
onrati
oфf or
seriesф2 0/ 3equ alto--
--
a.1.41
b.1.56
c.1.78
d.2
Ans :a
37.I norde rtoc ompr omisebetweent hel
ossofeconomic
cuttingspe edandt hecompac t
ness
oft hedriv ethevalu eofфiss e
lected.
a.2<ф≤3
b.3<ф≤4
c.4<ф≤5
d.1<ф≤2
Ans :d
38.Re comme ndev alueofфf orh e
av ydut
ymach i
netool
sand
automat s--
a.1.
12
b.1.
26
c.1.
14
d.1.
58
Ans:a
39.Re comme ndev alu
eofфf orme di
ums i
zegene
ralpu
rpos
e
mac hinetool s-
-
a.1.
12
b.1.
26
c.1.
14
d.1.
58
Ans:c
40.Nu mbe rofs pindles peedstepsi
nmachinet
oolge
arbox
i
ndicat edbyl et
te r
--
a.Z
b.ф
c.Rn
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans:a
41.Th enor mallys el
ectedvalue/sofZis/are-
-
a.4
b.6
c.8
d.Alloft heabov e
Ans:d
42.letterPi ndicatesinmac hinetoolg
earboxas?
a.Numbe rofs pe e
ds tepspe rstage
b.Numbe rofs pindlespe e
ds teps
c.Geome tricratio
d.Rang er atio
Ans:a
43. Wh enstruc turalfor mu l
aet obefeasibl
e,theproductPkXk
mu stbeaf act orofZ --
a.Tr ue
b.Fals e
c.Insu ff
ici
antdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
44. Formac hinet oolgearboxt hetransmissi
onr angeshoul
d
notbeg ratert han- -
-
a.9
b.10
c.11
d.8
Ans :d
45. I
ns t
ructur aldigram, Eac hzonebe t
we e
nt woadjacent
verticalli
nesr e peresentsa- --
a.Tr ans missiong r
ou p
b.Stag e
c.Bot haandb
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :c
46.Ins peeddi ag r
am, Eac hh ori
zontalli
ner e
pr e
sentsa-
--
a.Spi ndlespee d
b.Spindles teps
c.Bot haandb
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
47. Wh atis/ar eth eli
mi tation/sofstructu
rediagram--
-
a.
Itg ives,Thes pi
ndles pe eds
b.Itg ive
s ,
Th emot ors pe e
ds
c.Itgives,Th eg eome tri
cpr ogres
sionratio
d.All oftheabov e
Ans :d
48. Nu mbe rofs peeds t
e psinanys t
ag eshou
ldnotbemor e
than- -
-
a.3
b.4
c.5
d.6
Ans :a
49. Th espe edr at
ioinlas tstageshouldbeas--
--
--
--
-aspossi
bl
e.
a.Max i
mu m
b.Mi nimu m
c.Ins uffic
ientdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
50. Sailentf e
at ur
e /sofs peeddiagramis/ar e
--
-
a.Itg ives,Th enumbe rofs haftinthegerabox
b.Itg ives,Thenu mbe rofg earsone achshaft
c.Itg ive
s, thes pi
ndles peeds
d.All oftheabov e
Ans :d
51.Toav oidi nter
fe r
enceong e
ars,thenumberofteethonthe
smal lestg earoft hegearbox
i
s---
a.2 1
b.16
c.18
d.20
Ans :c
52.Ifg earpai r
sonpar al l
elshaftshavesamemodu leth
esum
ofnu mbe roft eethonmat i
ng
gearmu stbes ame -
--
a.Cor r
ect
b.Inc orrect
c.Ins uffi
ci
antdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
53.Mi nimumdi ff
e r
encebe tweennumbe rofteet
hofadj ace
nt
gear sinac h
ang eg er
abl ock
mu stbeatl east-
--
a.6
b.3
c.4
d.5
Ans :c
54. Spac i
ngbe twe entwoadj acentgearont hesh
aftmu stbe
grat erthan----
-thefacewi dth
.
a.Twi c
e
b.Th rice
c.Ins uffi
ci
antdat a
d.noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
55.Ift heli
nei sincli
nedu pwardsf r
oml efttori
ghtinspeed
diagramr epers e
ntt he
---
-
a.Inc rementi nspe ed
b.De creme ntins peed
c.Th ereisnos peedc hange
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
56.Ift heli
nei sincli
neddownwar dsfroml e
fttorig
h ti
nspeed
diagramr epers e
ntt he
---
-
a.Inc rementi nspe ed
b.Decreme ntins peed
c.Thereisnos peedc h
ang e
d.Noneoft h eabov e
Ans:b
57.Iftheli
nei sst r
aightfroml efttori
g hti
ns pe
eddiagr
am
repersentthe -
--
-
a.Incrementi nspe e
d
b.Decreme ntins peed
c.Thereisnos peedc h
ang e
d.Noneoft h eabov e
Ans:c
58.Conditi
omf oropt i
mu ms truc
turediagr
am- -
-
a.X1<X2<X3
b.X3<X2<X1
c.X2<X1<X3
d.X3<X1<X2
Ans:a
59.Lett
e rNindicateinmac hinetoolgearboxdesign?
a.Numbe rofs tag e
sofg earbox
b.Numbe rofs pindlespeeds t e
ps
c.Ranger atio
d.geome tri
cpr ogressionr atio
Ans:a
60.Rang erat i
of orcentral l
atheis--
a.8-10
b.15-
25
c.15-
30
d.40-60
Ans:d
61.Devi
at i
onofac tualspindlespeedsfromc alc
ulate
dspindl
e
speedsmu s tnote xceed-
-
a.10(ф- 1)
b.20(ф- 1)
c.30(ф- 1)
d.40(ф- 1)
Ans:a
62.Thes pe eddi ag ramcontai
nsthenumberofh ori
zont
all
i
nes
requi
re dforl oc ating?
a.All
s pindles pe ds
b.El
ectricmot ors peed
c.Bothaandb
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans:c
63.ZthSpi ndles pe edinAri
themati
cprogre
ss i
on--
--
a.nz=nmax -nmi n/(Z
-1)
b.nz=( nmax /nmi n)1/Z-
1
c.nz=1 /nz- 1/ n1
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans:a
64.ZthSpi ndles pe edingeometr
icprogr
ession--
--
a.nz=nmax -nmi n/(Z
-1)
1
c.nz=1 /nz- 1/ n1
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans:b
65.ZthSpi ndles pe edinharmoni
cprogressi
on---
-
a.nz=nmax -nmi n/(Z
-1)
1
c.nz=1 /nz- 1/ n1
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans:c
66.фGe ome tr i
cpr ogressi
onrati
oisequalt
o
a.ф=( nmax /nmin)1/
Z-1
b.ф=Rn
1/
Z -
1
c.Bothaandb
d.Noneoft heabove
Ans:c
UNITIIStat i
stic
alCons i
derationsinDe si
gn
1.Hi
stogrami s
a.As etofr ect
angles
b.Ali
neg raphofc lassfrequenc yplot
tedagainstcl
assmar k
s
c.Abe l
lshape dsmoot hcurve
d.Noneoft heabove
Ans:a
2.Frequencypol y
gonis
a.As etofr ect
angles
b.
Alineg raphofc l
assf requenc ypl
ottedagainstc
lassmarks
c.Abe l
lshape dsmoot hcurve
d.Noneoft heabove
Ans:b
3.Centraltendencyofpopu lationis
a.Spreadofdat aorex t
endt owh i
cht
h eobservat
ionsare
scatt
e re
d
b.Midpointofdi stri
buti
onwh eremos tofthedataclus
ter
c.Concentrat i
onofdat aate i
th erl
oworh ighend
d.Distri
butionwithshar ppeak
Ans:b
4.Dispersionofpopu lati
onis
a.Spreadofdat aorex t
endt owh i
cht
h eobservat
ionsare
scatt
e re
d
b.Midpointofdi stri
buti
onwh eremos tofthedataclus
ter
c.Concentrat i
onofdat aate i
th erl
oworh ighend
d.Distributi
onwi t
hs harppeak
Ans:a
5.Skewne ssofpopu l
ationis
a.Spre adofdat aore xtendtowh i
cht
h eobservat
ionsare
scattered
b.Midpoi ntofdi stri
bu ti
onwh e
remos tofthedataclus
ter
c.Conc entrationofdat aate i
therl
oworh ighend
d.Meas u r
eofs h arppe ak
Ans:c
6.Kurtos i
sofpopu lati
oni s
a.Spre adofdat aore xtendtowh i
cht
h eobservat
ionsare
scattered
b.Midpoi ntofdi stri
bu ti
onwh e
remos tofthedataclus
ter
c.Conc entrationofdat aate i
therl
oworh ighend
d.Meas u r
eofs h arppe ak
Ans:d
7.Cent raltende ncyofpopu l
ati
onisme asur
e dinuni
tsof
a.Standar dde v iati
on
b.Arithme ti
cme an
c.Standar dv ar i
able
d.Squ areofs t andar dde
Ans:b
8.Dispe rsi
onofpopu lationi
sme asur
e di
nu nit
sof
a.Standar dde v iati
on
b.
Arith meticme an
c.
Geome tri
cme an
d.Squ areofs t andar dde vi
ati
on
Ans:a
9.Standar dv ar i
ableis
a.Squ areofs tandar dde vi
ati
on
b.
Arith meticme an
c.Rootme ans quaredevi
ati
onf r
omt hemean
d.Deviati
onf r
omme aninuni
tsofs t
andar
ddeviation
Ans :
d
10.Standar dde vi
ati
onis
a.Squ areofs tandardvari
abl
e
b.Ari
thme t
icme an
c.Rootme ans quaredevi
ati
onf r
omt hemean
d.Deviati
onf r
omme aninuni
tsofs t
andar
ddeviation
Ans :
c
11.Thear e
abe l
ownor malcur
vef r
om( Z=-∞)to( Z=+∞)i s
a.1
b.0.6
82 7
c.0.9545
d.0.9973
wh er
eZi ss tandardvari
able
Ans :
a
12.Thear eabe l
ownor malcurvefrom(Z=-1)t
o( Z=+1 )i
s
a.1
b.0.6827
c.0.9545
d.0.9973
wh er
eZi ss tandardvari
able
Ans :
b
13.Thear eabe l
ownor malcurvefrom(Z=-2)t
o( Z=+2 )i
s
a.1
b.0.6827
c.0.9545
d.0.9973
wh er
eZi ss tandardvari
able
Ans :
c
14.Thear eabe lownormalcurvefrom(Z=-3)to(Z=+3)i s
a.1
b.0.6827
c.0.9545
d.0.9973
whe reZisstandardv ari
abl
e
Ans :
d
15.Wh entwopopu lat
ionswithme ansμXandμYar eadded,
theme anofr esul
tant
popu l
ationisgiv
enby ,
a.(μX+μY)
b.(μX−μY)
c.(μXμY)
d.(μX/μY)
Ans :
a
16.Wh enpopulati
onYwi thme ansμYissubtrac
tedfr
om
popu l
ationXwi t
hme anμX, th e
me anofr esul
tantpopu l
ati
oni sgi
venby,
a.(μX+μY)
b.(μX−μY)
c.(μXμY)
d.(μX/μY)
Ans :
b
17.Wh entwopopu lat
ionswithme ansμXandμYar e
mu lt
ipl
ied,t
heme anofr esu
ltant
popu l
ationisgiv
enby ,
a.(μX+μY)
b.(μX−μY)
c.(μXμY)
d.(μX/μY)
Ans :
c
18.Wh enpopulati
onXwi thme anμX, i
sdivi
dedbypopul
ati
on
Ywi thme anμY, the
me anofr esul
t antpopu lati
onisgive
nby,
a.(μX+μY)
b.(μX−μY)
c.(μXμY)
d.(μX/μY)
Ans :d
19.Wh entwopopu l
ati
onsXandYar eadded,thestandar
d
deviationofre sultantpopu l
ati
on
i
sg ivenby ,
a.(σˆX+σˆY)
b.(σˆ2 X+σˆ2 Y)
c.√(σˆ2 X+σˆ2 Y)
d.√(σˆ2 X−σˆ2 Y)
Ans :c
20. Whe npopulationYi ssubtract
edfrompopu lat
ionX,t
he
standar ddeviationofr esult
ant
popu l
at i
onisg iv
e nby,
a.(σˆX+σˆY)
b.(σˆ2 X+σˆ2 Y)
c.(σˆ2 X+σˆ2 Y)
d.(σˆ2 X−σˆ2 Y)
Ans :c
21.Th eresul
tantpopu l
at i
onisnormall
ydistr
ibute
d,
a.Wh enpopu l
at i
onsoft wonor mall
ydist
ribu
tedrandom
variablesareadde d
b.Wh enpopu l
at i
onsoft wonor mall
ydis
tri
butedrandom
variablesares ubtr ac
ted
c.Wh enpopu l
at i
onsoft wonor mal
lydi
stri
butedrandom
variablesaremu lt
ipli
ed
d.Anyoneofabov e
Ans :d
22. Ins tatisti
callycontrolleds ystem,
a. Var i
at i
onsdu etoas s i
gnabl ecause sarec orrec
ted
b. Var i
at i
onsdu etoc hanc ec ausesar ecorrected
c.Var i
ationsdu etoas signabl eandc hancec ausesare
cor rected
d. Noneoft hese
Ans :a
23. Th ereisnor ejecti
onofc ompone ntswh en
a. Des i
gnt oleranc eisequ al to(±3σˆ)andt h
epr oc
essis
cent ered
b. Des i
gnt oleranc ei
ss lig
h tlymor ethan(±3σˆ)
c.De s i
gnt oleranc ei
s(±4σˆ)
d. Anyoneofabov e
Ans :d
24. Th er el
iabil
ityofbal lbe aringsele
c te
df rommanu f
actur
e’s
cat alogu eis
(a)9 0%
(b)5 0%
(c)9 9%
(d)Mor et han9 0%
Ans :a
25 .Wh ati sthes tandar dde viati
onofc l
earanc epopul
ati
onfor
thedi ame terofs haftandh ole
as sembl ys pecifiedbelow?
Sh aftdi ame ter=30±0. 15
Hol ediame ter=30. 5±0. 25
a.0.09 7mm
b.0.05 9mm
c.0.036mm
d.0.39 0mm
Ans :b
26. Wh ic
hoft hefol l
owi ngc urveshavethemeanvalu
ee qualt
o
zer oint heg raphof
frequ encyv sr andomv ariabl
e ?
a.Nor mal distributionc ur ve
b.Standar dnor mal di s
tributioncurve
c.
Bot ha. andb.
d.Noneoft h
eabov e
Ans :b
27. Wh atist her e
lat i
onbe tweenstandarddevi
ati
on(σ)and
arith meticme an( μ)t ode termine
coe ffici
entofv ariation( C)?
a.C=σ+μ
b.C=σ–μ
c.
C=σ/μ
d.C=σxμ
Ans :c
28. As si
gnablec au se sarec au s
edduetoc h
angesin_____
___
_
a.Manu fac t
ur i
ngpr ocess
b.Mat eri
al
c.Ins pectionpr oc ess
d.Al lofth eabov e
Ans :d
29. Ifar eli
efv alveh asr eli
abili
tyof0.98
9,howmanyf ail
ure
s
aree xpectedint esting1 000
suc hr el
iefvalve s
?
a.11 1
b.100
c.
1 0
d.11
Ans :d
30. Failurer atef orsaf etyvalvewor k
ingfor400h oursis3x
10–6f ailures/hou r.Wh atisth e
reliabili
tyofs afetyval ve?
a.0.9 98
b.0.989
c.0.888
d.0.8 9
9
Ans :a
31. Wh atisme antbyh azar drate?
a.Nu mbe roff ail
urespe runitti
mepe rnumbe rofit
emswh en
expos e dfors amet ime
b.Pr obabilityoft ests pe c
ime nfail
sbetweentimet1andt1+
dt1 whichs urvivesf ort imet1
c.Bot ha. andb.
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :c
32 .Wh atc au sesinfantmor tali
tyinme c
hanicalequ
ipments?
a.De signe rrors
b.Manu facturingde fects
c.Installati
onde fects
d.Alloft heabov e
Ans :d
33. Apl ainc arbons t
e elhasme any i
el
ds tr
engthof300N/ mm2
ands tandar dde v i
ationof5 0
N/mm2 .Wh atist heme anands t
andarddeviati
onofmar ginof
saf ety,ifme ant ens i
les tre
ss
of2 50N/ mm2ands tandar ddeviati
onof6 5N/mm2ac tsonit?
a. 23.45N/ mm2 ,
5 0N/ mm2
b. 50N/ mm2 ,8 2N/mm2
c.8 2N/ mm2 ,7.07N/ mm2
d. 7.07N/ mm2 ,50N/ mm2
Ans :b
34. Wh atisme antbyme ant imetof ailure(MTTF )?
a.Me antimebe twe ent wos uccessivef ail
u r
ec ompone nts
b.Max i
mu mt i
mebe twe ent wos uccess i
v efail
urec ompone nt
s
c.Su mofs u rv
iv al ti
mef ornu mbe rofc ompone ntsdividedby
numbe roff ail
u res
d.Su mofnu mbe roff ailuresdi vi
dedbys ur
vivaltimefor
numbe rofc ompone nt s
Ans :c
35.Th evariationi nanappe rantl
yide nticalcomponatar edue
to-
--
a.Var i
ati
oni nmat erial
b.Var i
ati
oni nmanu fat uringpr ocess
c.Var i
ati
oni nwor kmans hip
d.All oftheabov e
Ans :d
36.I tisprac ti
c all
yi mpos ibletoprodu cee x
ac tl
yident
ical
compone ntof- -
-
a.Sameg eome tr i
c alpr ope rti
es
b.Samemat eri
al pr ope rties
c.Samef unc ti
onal pr ope rti
e s
d.All oftheabov e
Ans :d
37. As si
genablec au sedonotoc curatr andombu taret h
e
resu ltofch ange si nth emat eri
al,
manu facturingpr oces s,inpe ct
ionpr oc ess.
a.Tr u e
b.Fal se
c.Ins uffi
ciantdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
38.Inaf requnc ydi st
ribu ti
on, t
he r
ear ediffer
entme asuresof
centr alval
u eorc entral
tendanc y.Ch oos ec orrec toption.
a.Ar ithematicme an
b.Me dian
c.Mode
d.All oftheabov e
Ans: d
39.Th edispres s i
onorv ariationors preadofaf requ ncy
di
s tributi
oni sme as u
r edi nnu mbe r
ofu nitslike-
-
a.St andar dde v iation
b.Nu mbe rofu ni ts
c.Qu ar t
il
eDe v iation
d.All oftheabov e
Ans: d
40. Coe ffi
cientofv ariationisde finedas --
--
a.Rat i
ooft h es tandar dde vi
at i
ont oth earit
hemat icme an
b.Rat i
oofme ande vi
at iont ot hearit
he maticme an
c.Rat ioofqu ar til
ede v i
at i
ont ot hearthemat i
cme an
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans: a
41.Ins t
andar dnor mal distributioncurv ethemeani se qualt
o-
-
-
a.1
b.0
c.-1
d.2
Ans: b
42.Ins t
andar dnor mal di str
ibutionc u
r vethestandar d
deviat i
onise qu alto---
a.1
b.2
c.-
1
d.3
Ans:a
43.I
ns t
andardnormaldis
tri
but
ioncur v
etheareaunder
cur
veisalway
se qual
to--
-
a.2
b.3
c.4
d.1
Ans:d
44.I
nnor mal
distr
ibut
ioncur
vethestandarddevi
ati
onisany
val
ueof--
-
a.Ψ
b.ˆ
б
c.μ
d.z
Ans:b
45.I
nnormaldistr
ibu
tioncur
vetheme anisonl
yvalueof--
-
a.Ψ
b.ˆ
б
c.μ
d.z
Ans:c
46.I
nnormaldistr
ibu
tioncur
vetherandomv ar
iabl
eis--
a.X
b.ˆ
б
c.μ
d.z
Ans:a
47.Innor mal di
stri
but
ionc ur
vet hestandar
dv ari
abl
eis-
-
a.X
b.ˆб
c.μ
d.z
Ans:d
48.Distribu ti
onofpopulati
onu ndernor maldis
tri
buti
oncur
ve
populationwi t
hinband
μ+3ˆ бe qu alto
a.99.
73%
b.95.
45%
c.68.
2 7%
d.78.
2 5%
Ans:a
49.Distribu ti
onofpopulati
onu ndernor maldi
stri
buti
oncur
ve
populationwi t
hinband
μ+2 ˆбe qu alto
a.99.
73%
b.95.
45%
c.68.
2 7%
d.78.
2 5%
Ans:b
50.Themodei s/areobe se
rvation/sthatoc c
urs-
--
--
--
-
a.Mos tfr equntl
y
b.Notf requ ntl
y
c.I
nsu ffici
antdat a
d.Noneoft h eabove
Ans:a
51.Whe nt hede s
igntol
eranceisg r
aterthanthenatur
al
tol
eranc et hereis-
--
a.Nor ejection
b.Re j
ec t
ion
c.Insuffi
c i
antdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
52.Wh ent hede s
igntol
eranceisequaltothenatur
al t
oler
ance
thereis--
-
a.Nor ejection
b.Re j
ec t
ion
c.Insuffi
c i
antdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :a
53.Wh ent hede si
gntole
ranceisl
e s
st h
ant henatu
r al
tole
ranc
e
thereis--
-
a.Nor ejection
b.Re j
ec t
ion
c.Insuffi
c i
antdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans :b
54. Rel
iabil
ityitisusual
lydenote
dbyRandi sexpressedbya
numbe rwi thintherange-
--
a.0≤R≤1
b.-1≤R≤0
c.1≤R≤2
d.2≤R≤3
Ans :a
55.Re l
iabil
ityisdefi
nedast heprobabi
lit
ythatacompone nt,
systemorde vi
cewill
perform
withoutf ai
lu r
eforas pecif
iedperi
odoft i
meu nderthe
spec i
fi
edope rati
ngconditi
ons.
a.Incor r
e c
t
b.Cor r
e ct
c.I
nsu ffi
ciantdat a
d.Noneoft heabov e
Ans:b
UNITIII
Question1Th eObj ecti
v eofMat e r
ial HandlingSyst
em*1
Opti
onAAc curac yi nloadt r
ans portat i
on
Opti
onBTr ans por tationofl oadwi thoutdamag e
Opti
onCLowi nitialandope ratingc os t
Opti
onDal lofabov e
Answe rD
Question2E conomyi nmat erialhandl i
ngc anbeac hi
eved
by___
_ __*1
Opti
onAe mpl oy ingg rav i
tyfeedmov ements
Opti
onBmi nimi zingdi stanceoft rav el
Opti
onCbyc ar ry i
ngmat eri
al tode stinati
onwi th
outu si
ng
manu allabou r
Opti
onDal loft h eabov e
Answe rD
Question3Uni tloads tatesth at____*1
Opti
onAmat e ri
al ss hou l
dbemov e
di nlots
Opti
onBoneu nits hou ldbemov edatat ime
Opti
onCbot h‘a’ and‘ b’
Opti
onDnoneoft heabov e
Answe rA
Question4Mat cht hef oll
owingandt hecor re
ctorderi
s____*3
Opti
onAA- 1,B-2 ,C-3
Opti
onBA- 2 ,
B- 1,C-3
Opti
onCA- 3,B- 2,C- 1
Opti
onDA- 2,B- 3, C-1
Answe rB
Question5Wh i
choft h efoll
owi ngs tateme ntsisf
alsefor
troughe dbe ltconv eyors?*2
OptionA1and2
OptionB2and3
OptionC3and4
OptionDNoneoft h
eabov e
Answe rC
Qu e
s t
ion6Wh ic hoft hefollowingbel
tc onveyorsh avelow
volumec arry i
ngc apac i
ty*?1
OptionAF latbe l
t s
OptionBTr ou gh edbe l
ts
OptionCBot hofabov e
OptionDNoneoft h
eabov e
Answe rA
Qu e
s t
ion7Wh ati sthemas scapacit
yoff latbeltconveyorif
volume tricc apac i
ty0.55m3/ hr?(ρ=1 500k g/
m3) *3
OptionA8 2 5tons /hr
OptionB8 25k g/h r
OptionC2 .72 7t ons /
h r
OptionD2 72 2k g /hr
Answe rB
Qu e
s t
ion8
Anincline dbe l
tc onveyorisu sedforloadingg oods.Ifspeedof
thebelth av i
ng1 500mmwi dthis3m/ s
thenwh ati st hev ol
ume tri
cc apaci
tyoft heconv ey
or ?(
For21
degree,k =2 .
35x1 02 .
5x1 0-3m3/ s–4)*3
OptionA1 .75x1 0^ -
3m3/ s
OptionB1 .5x1 0^ -
3m3/ s
OptionC1 .19x1 0^-3m3/ s
OptionD2 .5x1 0^ -
3m3/ s
Answe r1 .19x1 0^ -3m3/ s
Qu e
s t
ion9Th ec apac i
tyofac onveyorbe l
tisde pendson
___
___*1
Opti
onAbe ltspe ed
Opti
onBac ontinu ou ssu pplyofpr oducts
Opti
onCdi stancebe tweent h epr oduc t
sbeingconv e
yed
Opti
onDal lofabov e
AnswerD
Questi
on10Wh icht ypeofc onvey oriss howninfigurebel
ow*
2
Opti
onAF l
atbe l
tc onv eyor
Opti
onBBl anke tbe ltconv eyor
Opti
onCTr ou ghedbe ltconv eyor
Opti
onDWov enwi r ebe l
tc onv eyor
AnswerC
Questi
on11Ang leofr epos e*1
Opti
onAAng l
emadebyt hes urfac eofpi l
eofmat eri
alwit
h
hori
zontal
Opti
onBAng l
eme as uredwi thr es pecttohori
zont alpl
aneof
surf
aceofmat erial bymov ingabe lt
Opti
onCCapac ityt omov ebyf low
Opti
onDNoneoft h eabov e
AnswerA
Questi
on12F orv er yloos eandf re emateri
alAngleofreposei
s
___
__*1
Opti
onAmor e
Opti
onBl ess
Opti
onCs ameasang leofs u rchar ge
Opti
onDNoneofabov e
Answer
Questi
on13De s cri
bet hetypeofi dlershowninf i
gu r
e*2
Opti
onAr oll
er
Opti
onBr ubbe rcov e red
Opt
ionCImpac t
Opt
ionDdisc
Ans
we rC
Que
s t
ion1
4Mat erialfactorf orpil
eisr epr
esentedby___
__*1
Opt
ionAK1
Opt
ionBK2
Opt
ionCK3
Opt
ionDK4
Ans
we rA
Que
s t
ion1
5Wh eredoadj ustt h
et ensi
ononac onvey
orbe l
t?*1
Opt
ionAate ndingpoi ntofc onv e
yor
Opt
ionBats tartingpoi ntofc onveyor
Opt
ionCatr olle
r
Opt
ionDatt hetak e-
uppu l
ley
Ans
we rA
Que
s t
ion1
6I mpac ti
dlersar eu se
di nabe l
tconveyorat*1
Opt
ionAther eturnpoi nt
Opt
ionBthel oadingpoi nts
Opt
ionCani ntervalof1 5 monac onveyorrun
Opt
ionDnoneoft h e
se
Ans
we rB
Que
s t
ion1
7Vol ume t
ricc apacityofincl
inedbel
tc onve
yoris___
*2
Opt
ionAQ= C*b^2*V
Opt
ionBQ= k*b^2*V
Opt
ionCQ=C* V*b^2
Opt
ionDQ= k*V*b^2
Ans
we rC
Que
s t
ion1
8Wh ichmat e ri
alisclassifi
edasbu l
kmat er
ial*1
Opt
ionAcoal
Opt
ionBironor e
AnswerA
Questi
on1 9Be ltconv eyorsar eoperatedi
n_ __
__*1
Opti
onAv e rti
cal plane
Opti
onBh or i
zont al plane
Opti
onCi nc l
inedpl ane
Opti
onDs moot hs u rfac eonal l
oftheseplanes
AnswerD
Questi
on2 0Re si
s ti
ngf orceonc onveyorbeltshowninbel
ow
fi
gureisat_ ________*1
Opti
onALi f ti
ngofmat eri
al
Opti
onBI dle rs
Opti
onCLoadi ngs tation
Opti
onDUnl oadings tation
AnswerB
Questi
on2 0Mat erial handlingconsi
s t
sofmov ementof
materi
alfr om1
Opti
onAonemac hinet oanot he
r
Opti
onBones hopt oanot hershop
Opti
onCs t orest os h op
Opti
onDal l oftheabov e
AnswerD
1
Questi
on2 1Th ef ollowi ngisu se
dtot ransportmateri
als
havi
ngf l
atbot toms
Opti
onABe ltconv ey or
Opti
onBRol lerconv eyor
Opti
onCCh ainc onv ey or
Opti
onDNoneoft heabov e
AnswerB
Questi
on2 2F orkl i
ftt r uckisusedfor1
Opti
onAl i
f ti
ngandl owe ri
ng
Opt
ionBv erti
cal trans por t
ati
on
Opt
ionCbot h‘a’and‘ b’
Opt
ionDnoneoft heabov e
Ans
we rC
Que
s t
ion23Cr ane sar eusedfor1
Opt
ionAlif
tingandl ower i
ng
Opt
ionBv erti
cal trans por t
ati
on
Opt
ionCbot h‘a’and‘ b’
Opt
ionDnoneoft heabov e
Ans
we rC
Que
s t
ion24Wh ichoft hefoll
owi ngisapr opertyofbu
lkl
oad?1
Opt
ionAHar dne ss
Opt
ionBCak ef or mi ngtendency
Opt
ionCSu spens ionpar t
Opt
ionDWe ight
Ans
we rB
Que
s t
ion25Wh atar ebulkloads ?1
Opt
ionALu mpofmat erial
Opt
ionBSing l
er igidmas s
Opt
ionCHomog ene ouspar ti
cles
Opt
ionDHe terog ene ouspar ti
cles
Ans
we rB
Que
s t
ion26Wh i
c hbe l
tconveyorpr eventssli
dingdownof
materi
alatani nc l
inat i
onof5 5 owi t
hh ori
zontal?1
Opt
ionAF l
atbe ltc onv eyor
Opt
ionBTr ou ghedbe l
tc onveyor
Opt
ionCBlank etbe l
tc onveyor
Opt
ionDWov enwi rebe l
tconveyor s
Ans
we rC
Que
s t
ion27
Masscapacityofac onve y
oris2 00ton/hr,i
fspeedofth
ebel
t
i
s4m/ sth enwh atist h
ewi dt hof
hori
zontal f l
atbe ltconv eyorc arryi
ngt heload?(Surc
h ar
ge
fact
or=0. 075&ρ=1 000k g /m3)3
Opti
onA49 9.23mm
Opti
onB5 00. 0mm
Opti
onC5 33. 7mm
Opti
onDI ns uffi
c i
entdat a
Answer5 33. 7mm
Questi
on2 8Th eang l
eofr epos ede pendson1
Opti
onAs h apeoft hemat e rial
Opti
onBs moot hne ssoft h emat er
ial
Opti
onCde greeoff inene ssoft hemat erial
Opti
onDal loft heabov e
Answerde g reeoff i
nenes soft hemat erial
Questi
on2 9Wh ichoft hefol l
owi ngappl i
c ati
onisabelt
conveyoru s edfor ?
1
Opti
onAMat erialtrans por tationov erlongdi s
tances
Opti
onBMat erialtrans por tat i
onwi t
h i
npr e
mises
Opti
onCMat erialtrans por tationforpr oc essi
ng
Opti
onDAl loft heme nti
one d
AnswerD
Questi
on30St ateme nt1 :Itisg enerall
ynotpos si
blet
oc hang
e
thedi
rectionoff lowwi t hbe ltconve y
or s. 2
State
me nt2 :
Ifbe ltconv eyor sar etobeu sedinthebent
posit
ion,s l
atbe l
tsar eu sed.
Opti
onATr ue,Fals e
Opti
onBTr ue,Tr ue
Opti
onCF als e,
F alse
Opti
onDF al se,
Tr u e
AnswerB
UNI
TIV
SrNo.Que sti
onsMar ks
Quest
ion1Ac yli
nde risc onsideredasth i
ncyl
inderwhenth
e
rat
ioofinne rdiame t ertot hewallth
icknessi
s1
Opt
ionAmor ethan1 5
Opt
ionBl esst han1 5
Opt
ionCe qu alto1 5
Opt
ionDnoneoft he sec ri
teria
AnswerA
Quest
ion2Ac y
li
nde risc ons i
deredasth i
ckcyli
nderwhenth
e
rat
ioofinne rdiame t ertot hewallth
icknessi
s1
Opt
ionAmor ethan1 5
Opt
ionBl esst han1 5
Opt
ionCe qu alto1 5
Opt
ionDnoneoft he sec ri
teria
AnswerB
1
Quest
ion3I nt hincylinders ,
thelongi
tudinals
tressis,
Opt
ionA2 (circumf erent i
alstress)
Opt
ionB1 /2(circumf er e
ntialstress
)
Opt
ionC1 /4(c i
rcumf er e
ntialstress)
Opt
ionD4( c
ircumf ere nti
al s
tress)
AnswerB
Quest
ion4Th et hi
ck ne s
soft h
incyli
nderisdeter
minedonthe
basi
sof1
Opt
ionAr adial stress
Opt
ionBl ong i
tudinal stress
Opt
ionCc ircumf erent i
alstress
Opt
ionDpr i
nc i
pal shears tress
Answercircumf erential st
res s
C
Questi
on5Th et hic
knessofth i
nc yli
ndri
calshelli
sgivenby,2
Opti
onAPi Di/
2σt
Opti
onBPi Di/
4σt
Opti
onC2 PiDi
/ σt
Opti
onD4Pi Di/σt
AnswerA
Questi
on6Th et hic
knessofth i
ns pheric
alshel
l i
sg i
venby ,
2
Opti
onAPi Di/
2σt
Opti
onBPi Di/
4σt
Opti
onC2 PiDi
/ σt
Opti
onD4Pi Di/σt
AnswerB
Questi
on7I nth i
ckcyl
inders,
thet angenti
alstressacros sthe
thi
cknessofcylinder
1
Opti
onAr emainsu nif
ormt hrough out
Opti
onBv ariesf r
omi nte
rnalpres sureatth
ei nnersur f
aceto
zeroattheoute rsurf
ac e
Opti
onCv arie
sf r
ommax i
mu mv alueattheinners u
r f
ac et
o
mini
mu mv al
ueatt heou t
ersurfac e
Opti
onDv ariesf r
ommax i
mu mv alueattheou tersurfaceto
mini
mu mv al
ueatt heinnersurface
AnswerC
Questi
on8I nth i
ckcyl
inders
,ther adialst
ressac rossthe
thi
cknessofcylinder1
Opti
onAr emainsu nif
ormt hrough out
Opti
onBv ariesf r
omi nte
rnalpres sureatth
ei nnersur f
aceto
zeroattheoute rsurf
ac e
Opti
onCv arie
sf r
ommax i
mu mv alueattheinners u
r f
ac et
o
mini
mu mv al
ueatt heou t
ersurfac e
Opti
onDv ariesf r
ommax i
mu mv alueattheou tersurfaceto
mini
mu mv al
ueatt heinnersurf
ac e
AnswerB
Questi
on9I nthickc yli
nders,
theax i
als t
ressac rossthe
thi
cknessofc yl
i
nde r1
Opti
onAr emainsu niformthroughout
Opti
onBv ariesfromi nter
nalpressureatt heinnersur f
aceto
zeroattheou te
rs u rface
Opti
onCv ariesfrommax i
mu mv al
ueatt heinners urf
ac eto
mini
mu mv al
ueatt heou t
ersurface
Opti
onDv ariesfrommax i
mu mv al
ueatt heou tersurfaceto
mini
mu mv al
ueatt heinnersurf
ac e
AnswerA
Questi
on10I nthinc yli
nders,
thetange nti
al s
tressacros sthe
thi
cknessofc yl
i
nde r1
Opti
onAr emainsu niformthroughout
Opti
onBv ariesfromi nter
nalpressureatt heinnersur f
aceto
zeroattheou te
rs u rface
Opti
onCv ariesfrommax i
mu mv al
ueatt heinners urf
ac eto
mini
mu mv al
ueatt heou t
ersurface
Opti
onDv ariesfrommax i
mu mv al
ueatt heou tersurfaceto
mini
mu mv al
ueatt heinnersurf
ac e
AnswerA
Questi
on11Th ethic knessofthi
ckc yl
indri
c alshel
lwithclosed
endsandmadeofbr i
ttl
emateri
al i
sde terminedby ,
1
Opti
onALame ’
se qu ation
Opti
onBCl avarino’se quati
on
Opti
onCBi rnie
’se qu ati
on
Opti
onDBar l
ow’se qu ati
on
AnswerA
Questi
on12Th et hicknessofthi
c kcyl
indricalshell
withc l
osed
endsandmadeofdu c ti
lemat eri
al isdeter
mi nedby ,
1
Opti
onALame ’
se quat ion
Opti
onBCl avarino’
se qu ation
Opti
onCBi rnie
’sequ at ion
Opti
onDBar l
ow’se qu at i
on
AnswerB
Questi
on13Th et hi
ck ne ssoft hi
c kcyli
ndri
cal shel
lwithopen
endsandmadeofdu c ti
lemat eri
al isdeter
mi nedby ,
1
Opti
onALame ’
se quat ion
Opti
onBCl avarino’
se qu ation
Opti
onCBi rnie
’sequ at ion
Opti
onDBar l
ow’se qu at i
on
AnswerC
Questi
on14Th et hi
ck ne ssofh ig
h -pressu
reoi landgaspipesis
dete
rminedby ,
1
Opti
onALame ’
se quat ion
Opti
onBCl avarino’
se qu ation
Opti
onCBi rnie
’sequ at ion
Opti
onDBar l
ow’se qu at i
on
AnswerD
Questi
on15Au tofrettag ei s,
2
Opti
onAas urfacec oat ingproce ssofc yl
i
nde rsforcorrosion
resi
stance
Opti
onBah eattreat me ntpr ocessf orcyl
inderst orel
ie
ve
resi
dualstresses
Opti
onCapr ocessofpr e s
tress
ingt hecyl
indert odevel
op
resi
dualcompr essi
v es tr essatinners ur
face
Opti
onDas urfaceh ar de ni
ngproc essofc yl
indertoimpr ov
e
wearr e
sist
ance
Answe rC
Ques t
ion1 6Au t
of ret t
ag eisac hiev e
dby ,2
OptionAc ompou ndc yl
inder
OptionBov er l
oadi ngt hec yl
inde rbe foreputti
ngi tinservi
ce
OptionCwi ndingawi reu ndert ens i
onar oundt hecyli
nder
OptionDanyoneoft heabov eme t h
ods
Answe rD
Ques t
ion1 7Ag as ketismadeof , 2
OptionAas be stosorc or k
OptionBl ead, coppe roral umi num
OptionCv u lcanize dr ubbe r
OptionDanyoneoft heabov e
Answe rD
Ques t
ion1 8
We l
dedpr es surev e
s selsmadeofs teelpl
atess h
ou ldbe
designedac cor dingt o‘ Codef oru nfi
redv es
s e
lIS-2825’
wh e
n, 2
OptionAi nter nal pre ssureisf rom1k g
f /
cm2t o2 00k gf
/cm2
OptionBi nte rnal diame terisle sst han1 50mm
OptionCwat erc ont ai
ne ristobede signedwithcapac i
tie
sless
than5 00litres
OptionDs t
e amboi lersandnu cl
e arpr essurevess e
lsaretobe
designed
Answe rA
Ques t
ion1 9Cl ass1pr e ssurev ess el
sar etobede s i
gned
accor di
ngt o‘ Codef oru nfir
edv es s
e lI
S-2825’
wh en2
OptionAh y droc yani cac i
d,car bony lchlori
deormu s t
ardgas
ares tore
d
OptionBope ratingt empe ratur eismor ethan-200C
OptionCl i
qu e fi
edpe troleumg asi sstor e
d
OptionDt hick nes sofs helli
sles st han38mm
AnswerA
Questi
on2 0Clas s3pr essur ev essel
sar et obede si
g ned
accordi
ngto‘ Codef oru nf i
re dv ess
e l
IS-2 825’wh en,2
Opti
onAope rati
ngpr e ssurei sl e
sst han1 7.5k gf/cm2
Opti
onBope ratingt empe rat ureismor et han00Candl ess
than2500C
Opti
onCt hicknes sofs hellisl essthan1 6mm
Opti
onDanyoneoft heabov e
AnswerD
Questi
on2 1
Wh i
l
edesigningpr ess u r
ev es selsaccor dingto‘ Codef or
unfi
redvesse lI
S- 282 5’,t
h ede s i
gnpr essu r
eist ak enas
2
Opti
onA1 .
05 (max imu mope rat i
ngpr essu re)
Opti
onB1 .5(max imu mope rat i
ngpr essur e
)
Opti
onC2 (max imu mope rat i
ngpr essu re)
Opti
onD1 .
3( max imu mope rat i
ngpr essure)
AnswerA
Questi
on2 2We ldj ointe f
f ici
e ncyismax i
mu mwh e nt he
pressur
ev esseliswe ldedby1
Opti
onAs ingle-
we lde dbu ttj ointwithbac kings trip
Opti
onBs ing l
e-
we lde dbu ttj ointwithou tbac kings t
r i
p
Opti
onCdou ble-
we l
de dbu ttj ointwithf ul
lpe netration
Opti
onDnoneoft h eabov e
AnswerC
Questi
on2 3Ty peofdome dh eadsfort hepr e s
s urev essel
is
Opti
onAh emi sph eri
c alhe ad
Opti
onBs e mi-el
li
ps oidal h ead1
Opti
onCt orisphe rical head
Opti
onDanyoneoft heabov e
AnswerD
Ques tion24Th ee nd-c l
os uref ortankersofmi l
k,petrol
or
di
es elis
OptionAh emis ph eri
c al head1
OptionBs emi -
e l
lipsoidal h e
ad
OptionCt or isph ericalh ead
OptionDF l
ath e ad
Answe rC
Ques tion25Th ee nd-c l
os uref ortal
lverti
calpressurevesse
lis
1
OptionAh emis ph eri
c al head
OptionBs emi -
e l
lipsoidal h e
ad
OptionCt or isph ericalh ead
OptionDF l
ath e ad
Answe rA
Ques tion26
cyl
inde rmadeofpl ainc arbons teelhasinnerdi
ame ter100mm.
Whati st h
et hick nessofc y l
inderifmax i
mu m
i
nter nalpres sur eof2 0Mpaac t
soni t?(σall=1
00N/ mm2&
poiss on'
sr atio=0. 3)3
OptionA1 1mm
OptionB1 5.
36mm
OptionC2 2.32mm
OptionD8 0mm
Answe rA
Ques tion27Cl av iro'
se quationi sappli
cabletocyli
nderswit
h
___
_ ___1
OptionAc l
os ee nds
OptionBope ne nds
OptionCbot ha. andb.
OptionDnoneoft heabov e
Answe rA
1
Ques ti
on2 8Wh yisau t ofret
tag eproc es
su sedi npressure
vesse l
s?
OptionAI nc re as efatigu el
ifet
ime
OptionBToe nh anc ecar ryi
ngc apac i
ty
OptionCToi nt rodu cec ompr e
s siveresidualstressinthem
OptionDAl loft heabov e
Answe rD
Ques ti
on2 9
As eaml es
sc ylinderofs t
oragec apac i
tyof0. 03mᵌ i
ssubject
ed
toani nternal pre ssureof2 1MPa. Th eulti
mat es t
rength
ofmat eri
al ofc yl
inderi s350N/ mm² .Deter
mi net h
elengthof
thecy l
inderi fiti stwic ethediame teroft hecy l
i
nde r
.3
OptionA5 40mm
OptionB2 70mm
OptionC400mm
OptionD35 0mm
Answe rA
Ques ti
on30
Inte
r nalpre ss ureof2 .5Mpaac tsonapr essu r
ev esse
lof
thi
ck ness1 5mmandi nternaldiame terof1 5
00mm. What
i
st hes tressi ndu ce di
nl ongitudinaldirect
ion?3
OptionA36 .63N/ mm2
OptionB5 9.13N/ mm2
OptionC6 5.62N/ mm2
OptionD1 31 .25N/ mm2
Answe r6 5.62N/ mm2
1
Ques ti
on31Wh i
c hoft h efol
lowingi snotanu nfi
redpressure
vesse l
?
OptionAHe ate xc hange r
Opt
ionBStorag
evessel
s
Opt
ionCSteamboi
ler
s
Opt
ionDNoneofth
eabov e
Ans
we rC
Uni
t-
1De
sig
nofMac
hineTool
Ger
aox
Whati
sthemaxi
mumper
centag
elossofec
onomic
cu
tti
ngspee
difg
eome
tri
cprogres
sionr
ati
o=1.06?
1
7 b)1
1.5 c
)5.
7 d)
2.9
Ans
:d
Di
amete
rrangei
shi
ghi
nge
ome
tri
cpr
ogr
ess
iondu
eto
__
___
___
_spi
ndl
espe
ed.
Low b)Hi
gh c
)Cons
tant d)al
loft
hes
e
Ans
:a
Wh
ati
shar
moni
cpr
ogr
ess
ion?
Dif
fer
enc
ebetwee
nr e
ciprocal
oft
wos
ucc
ess
ive
spi
ndl
espee
dsisconstant
Dif
fer
enc
ebe
twe
ent
wos
ucc
ess
ives
pindl
espe
edsi
s
const
ant
Rat
iooft
wos
ucc
ess
ives
pindl
espe
edsi
scons
tant
.
Rat
iooft
wos
ucc
ess
ives
pindl
espe
edsi
svar
iabl
e.
Ans
:a
Wh
ati
sar
ith
met
icpr
ogr
ess
ion?
Dif
fer
enc
ebetwee
nr e
ciprocal
oft
wos
ucc
ess
ive
spi
ndl
espee
dsisconstant
Dif
fer
enc
ebe
twe
ent
wos
ucc
ess
ives
pindl
espe
edsi
s
const
ant
Rat
iooft
wos
ucc
ess
ives
pindl
espe
edsi
scons
tant
.
Rat
iooft
wos
ucc
ess
ives
pindl
espe
edsi
svar
iabl
e.
Ans
:b
Wh
ati
sge
ome
tri
cpr
ogr
ess
ion?
Dif
fer
enc
ebetwee
nr e
ciprocal
oft
wos
ucc
ess
ive
spi
ndl
espee
dsisconstant
Dif
fer
enc
ebe
twe
ent
wos
ucc
ess
ives
pindl
espe
edsi
s
const
ant
Rat
iooft
wos
ucc
ess
ives
pindl
espe
edsi
scons
tant
.
Rat
iooft
wos
ucc
ess
ives
pindl
espe
edsi
svar
iabl
e.
Ans
:c
Wh
ati
sth
epu
rpos
eofu
singag
earbox
?
Toi
ncr
eas
etor
que
 Toi
ncr
eas
espe
ed
 Conve
rtss
ing
lei
npu
tspe
edi
ntomu
lti
pl
eou
tpu
t
speeds
Al
lofabov
e
Ans
:d
Whi
chofthef
oll
owingstat
eme
ntsi
str
uef
or
st
ruct
ure
/spee
ddiagrams?
St
ruc
tur
edi
agr
amsg
ive
srang
erat
ioofs
pindl
espe
eds
Spe
eddiag
ramsdonotg
iver
ang
erat
ioofs
pindl
e
spe
eds
Spe
eddi
agr
amsc
ons
ide
rmot
ors
pee
d
Al
lofabov
e
Ans
:c
Amac h
inetoolhasmi ni
mums peedof100r
.p.
m. How
manyspeeds t
epsar erequ
iredbyitt
oachi
evespeedof
200rpm?(Geome t
ricprogres
s i
onrati
o=1.
06)
1
1 b)1
2 c
)13 d)1
4
Ans
:b
Max
imumandminimu
mdiamet
erofashaftt
obe
machi
nedi
s100mmand80mmr es
pect
ive
ly.
Whatisthe
maxi
mu mspi
ndl
espe
edi
fcut
ti
ngvel
oci
tyi
s40m/ min?

1
20 b)1
27 c
)16
0 d)6
36
Ans
:c
E
conomicc
utt
ings
pee
dismi
ni
mumi
fge
ome
tri
crat
ioi
s
_
___
___
__
Mini
mum b)Max i
mum c
)Equ
alt
oec
onomi
ccu
tti
ng
speed d)Al
lofabov
e
Ans
:a
Whatisthege omet
ricprog
ressi
onrati
oifmax
imumand
minimums pindl
espeedsare500r.
p.mand300r.
p.m
re
s pec
tiv
ely?(Numberofspee
ds t
eps=7)
2 b)1
.5 c
)1.
08 c
)Noneoft
hes
e
Ans
:c
Rati
ooftwospi
ndl
espe
edsi
scons
tanti
n__
___
___
_
prog
res
sion.
Ari
thme
tic b)Har
moni
c c
)Ge
ome
tri
c d)Al
lof
th
eabove
Ans
:c
Whic
hofthefol
lowingistheneedoft
hegear
box
?
a)Tovaryt
hespe e
doft hevehi
cle
b)Tovar
ythetorqueoft heve
hicl
e
c)Tovar
ythepowe rofthevehi
cle
d)Tovar
ytheac c
eler
ationoftheveh
icl
e
Ans
:b
Whati
sthemaxi
mumper
centag
elossofec
onomic
cu
tti
ngspee
difg
eome
tri
cprogres
sionr
ati
o=1.06?
1
7.0% b)1
1.5
% c
)5.
7% d)2
.9%
Ans
:d
Hi
ghe
rthevalueofgeomet
ricpr
ogr
ess
ion,
___
___
___
___i
s
l
ossofe
c onomiccu
ttings
peed.
Hi
ghe
r
Lowe
r
Cons
tant
Noneoft
heabov
e
Ans
:a
Whati
sthemaxi
mumper
centag
elossofec
onomic
cu
tti
ngspee
difg
eome
tri
cprogres
sionr
ati
o=1.5
8?
1
7.0% b)2
2.5
% c
)5.
7% d)2
.9%
Ans
:b
Whati
sthemaxi
mumper
centag
elossofec
onomi
c
cu
tti
ngspee
difg
eome
tri
cprogres
sionr
ati
o=2?
1
7.0% b)2
2.5
% c
)5.
7% d)33.
3%
Ans
:d
I
fnumbe
rofspi
ndlespee
dst
eps
,z=2
7,t
henNu
mbe
rof
s
tag
esofth
egearboxis
,
1 b)2 c
)3 d)4
Ans
:c
I
fnumbe
rofspi
ndlespee
dst
eps
,z=1
2,t
henNu
mbe
rof
s
tag
esofth
egearboxis
,
1 b)2 c
)3 d)4
Ans
:c
I
fnumbe
rofspi
ndlespee
dst
eps
,z=8
,th
enNu
mbe
rof
s
tag
esofth
egearboxis
,
1 b)2 c
)3 d)4
Ans
:c
Forath
reest
age,
twel
vespe
edgear
boxthet
otal
numbe
r
ofst
ruct
ural
for
mu l
aeth
atcanbewri
tt
enare
3 b)6 c
)12 d)36
Ans
:d
F
oratwostag
e,f
ourspe
edgear
boxthet
otal
numbe
rof
s
tru
ctu
ral
formul
aeth
atcanbewri
tt
enare
2 b)4 c
)12 d)36
Ans
:b
 Lowerist
hespe
edofshaf
t,hi
ghe
risthetorquet
h at
shafthast
otr
ansmitandhe
nce___
___
____isit
sdiamete
r.
Hig
her b)Lowe
r c
)Cons
tant d)Noneoft
he
above
Ans
:a
Whatisthege omet
ricprog
ressi
onrati
oifmaxi
mumand
minimums pindl
espeedsare1
00r .
p.mand1800r.
p.m
re
s pec
tiv
ely?(Numberofspee
ds t
eps=8)
1
.5 b)2 c
)2.
5 d)3
Ans
:a
Whati
sth
eRang
erati
oifmaxi
mu mandmi
nimumspi
ndl
e
spe
edsar
e100r
.p.
mand1 8
00r.p.
mr e
spe
cti
vel
y?
1
5 b)1
8 c
)20 d)2
2
Ans
:b
I
dent
if
yt h
eopti
mu mstr
uct
uredi
agr
amf
romt
he
f
oll
owingstr
uct
uralf
ormul
ae.
2
(3)3(
1) b)2
(1)3(
2) c
)3(
1)2
(3) d)3(
2)
2
(1)
Ans
:b
I
dent
if
yt h
eopti
mu mstr
uct
uredi
agr
amf
romt
he
f
oll
owingstr
uct
uralf
ormul
ae.
2(
1)2
(2)3(4) b)2
(1)2
(6)3(
4) c
)2(
2)3(
1)3(
4)
d)3(
1)2(4)2(2
)
Ans
:a
Innodeme
thodofopt
imi
zati
on,
foropt
imumst
ruc
tur
e
diag
ramthesu
mofdiamet
erofal
lshaf
tsbe
,
Mini
mum b)Max
imu
m c
)Cons
tant
d)Noneoft
heabove
Ans
:a
Los
sofe
conomi
ccu
tti
ngs
pee
dis
Di
ffe
renc
ebetwe
enac
tual
cut
ti
ngs
pee
dandopt
imu
m
cu
tti
ngspee
d
Rati
oofac
tual
cut
ti
ngs
pee
dtoopt
imu
mcu
tti
ng
spe
ed
Dif
fer
encebe
tweenre
cipr
ocal
ofac
tual
cut
ti
ngs
pee
d
andopti
mumc u
tti
ngspeed
Noneoft
heabov
e
Ans
:a
Dev
iat
ionofact
ualspi
ndl
espeedsf
romc
alc
ulat
ed
spi
ndl
espeedsmus
tnotexcee
d
1
0(Φ-
1)
% b)1
5(Φ-
1)
%c)2
0(Φ-
1)
% d)1
0(Φ-
10)
%
Ans
:a
Spaci
ngbet
weentwoadj
acentge
arsont
hes
haf
tmu
stbe
gre
atert
han__
___
___
__th
efacewi
dth.
Th
ric
e b)Twi
ce c
)hal
f d)Noneoft
hes
e
Ans
:b
Pe
rce
ntag
espe
edde
viat
ioni
sgi
venby
,
nact-
nth/nth*
100 b) nact-
nth/
nact*
100 c
)nth-
nact/
nact*100 d)Noneoft h
eabov e
Ans
:a
Whati
sthege
omet
ricprogr
ess
ionr
ati
oifg
ear
boxbas
ed
onR5ser
iesi
sde
signed?
4 b)2 c
)1.
58 d)2
.5
Ans
:c
Whatisthege omet
ricprog
ressi
onrati
oifmaxi
mumand
minimums pindl
espeedsare1
50r .
p.mand1000r.
p.m
re
s pec
tiv
ely?(Numberofspee
ds t
eps=6)
4 b)2 c
)2.
5 d)1
.46
Ans
:d
Whati
sthegeometr
icprog
res
sionr
ati
oifg
ear
boxbas
ed
onR10se
rie
si sde
signe
d?
4 b)2 c
)1.
26 d)2
.5
Ans
:c
Whati
sth
eg eomet
ricpr
ogr
ess
ionr
ati
oifg
ear
boxbas
ed
onR40ser
iesisde
signe
d?
4 b)2 c
)1.
06 d)2
.5
Ans
:c
Adv
ant
ageoft
hear
ith
met
icPr
ogr
ess
ioni
s
I
tisg
oodi
nHi
ghs
pindl
espe
edr
ang
e
I
tispoori
nlows
pindl
espe
edr
ang
e
Al
loft
heabov
e
Noneoft
heabov
e
Ans
:a
Di
sadv
ant
ageoft
hear
ith
met
icpr
ogr
ess
ioni
s
I
tisg
oodi
nHi
ghs
pindl
espe
edr
ang
e
I
tispoori
nlows
pindl
espe
edr
ang
e
Al
loft
heabov
e
Noneoft
heabov
e
Ans
:b
Adv
ant
ageoft
heh
armoni
cPr
ogr
ess
ioni
s
I
tisg
oodi
nlows
pindl
espe
edr
ang
e
I
tispoori
nhi
ghs
pindl
espe
edr
ang
e
Al
loft
heabov
e
Noneoft
heabov
e
Ans
:a
Di
sadv
ant
ageoft
hear
ith
met
icpr
ogr
ess
ioni
s
I
tisg
oodi
nlows
pindl
espe
edr
ang
e
I
tispoori
nhi
ghs
pindl
espe
edr
ang
e
Al
loft
heabov
e
Noneoft
heabov
e
Ans
:b
Adv
ant
ageoft
heGe
ome
tri
cPr
ogr
ess
ioni
s
I
tgiv
escons
tantlos
sofe
conomi
ccu
tti
ngs
pee
din
t
otalspe
edrang
e
Gi
vesbe
tte
rge
arboxde
sig
nfe
atu
res
Al
loft
heabov
e
Noneoft
heabov
e
Ans
:c
Di
sadv
ant
ageoft
heg
eome
tri
cpr
ogr
ess
ioni
s
I
tisg
oodi
nhi
ghs
pindl
espe
edr
ang
e
I
tispoori
nlows
pindl
espe
edr
ang
e
Al
loft
heabov
e
Noneoft
heabov
e
Ans
:b
F
orasixs
pe e
dgearboxf
oll
owi
ngc
anbeoneoft
hea
s
tru
ctu
ralformu
la,
3(
1)2
(3) b)3(
1)3(
3) c
)2(
1)2
(2) d)None
oftheabov
e
Ans
:a
F
oraninespe
edg
earboxf
oll
owi
ngc
anbeoneoft
hea
s
tru
ctu
r al
for
mul
a,
3(
1)2
(3) b)3(
1)3(
3) c
)2(
1)2
(2) d)None
oftheabov
e
Ans
:b
F
orafourspe
edg
earboxf
oll
owi
ngc
anbeoneoft
hea
s
tru
ctu
ralf
ormul
a,
3(
1)2
(3) b)3(
1)3(
3) c
)2(
1)2
(2) d)None
oftheabov
e
Ans
:c
F
oraeig
htspe
edgearboxf
oll
owi
ngc
anbeoneoft
hea
s
tru
ctu
ralf
ormul
a,
2(1
)2(2
)2(4) b)3(
1)3(
3)2
(9) c
)2(
1)2
(2)3(
4)
d)Noneoftheabov
e
Ans
:a
F
oraeig
htspe
edgearboxf
oll
owi
ngc
anbeoneoft
hea
s
tru
ctu
ralf
ormul
a,
2(1
)2(2
)2(4) b)3(
1)3(
3)2
(9) c
)2(
1)2
(2)3(
4)
d)Noneoftheabov
e
Ans
:a
F
oratwel
vespe
edgearboxf
oll
owi
ngc
anbeoneoft
hea
s
tru
ctu
ralf
ormula,
2(1
)2(2)3(
4) b)3(
1)3(
3)2
(9) c
)2(
1)3(
2)3(
4)
d)Noneoft h
eabov
e
Ans
:a
Foraei
ght
eenspe
edgearboxf
oll
owi
ngc
anbeoneoft
he
astr
uct
uralf
ormula,
2
(1)3(
2)3(
6) b)3(
1)2
(3)2
(9) c
)2(
1)2
(2)3(
4)
d)Noneoft
heabov
e
Ans
:a
Foratwe
ntysev
e nspe
edgearboxf
oll
owi
ngc
anbeone
ofth
eastruc
turalf
ormul
a,
2(1
)2(2)3(
4) b)3(
1)3(
3)3(
9) c
)2(
1)3(
2)3(
4)
d)Noneoft h
eabov
e
Ans
:b
F
oll
owi
ngi
sapu
rpos
eofg
ear
box
:
Toi
ncr
eas
eth
etor
que
Toi
ncr
eas
eth
espe
ed
Toconv
ertt
hes
ing
lei
npu
tspe
edt
omu
lti
pl
eou
tpu
t
spe
eds
Al
loft
heabov
e
Ans
:d
Themi
ni
mumnu
mberoft
eet
hont hepi
nionc
anbet
ake
n
as
a)14 b)20 c)10 d)al
lofth
eabove
Ans
:b
Wh
ati
sRang
erat
ioi
f,nmax=
288
0rpm,
nmin=6
0rpm,
48 b)6
0 c
)85 d)
100
Ans
:a
Ve
rti
cal
li
nesi
nth
est
ruc
tur
edi
agr
amr
epr
ese
nt
Shaf
ts b)Ge
ars c
)Spe
eds
teps d)Noneof
th
eabov
e
Ans
:a
Nu
mbe
rofv
ert
ical
li
nesi
nst
ruc
tur
edi
agr
ami
sequ
alt
o
N b)N+
1 c
)N+
2 d)N-
1
Uni
t2St
ati
sti
cal
Cons
ide
rat
ioni
nDe
sig
n
Sr.
No
1. 1)

Whatcause
sinf
antmor
tal
i
tyi
nme
chani
cal
e
quipment
s?
a.

Des
igne
rror
s
b.
Manu facturingdef
e cts
c.

Ins tallati
onde f
ect
s
d.
Al
l oft heabov e
Ans d.
Al
l oft heabov e
2. Apl ainc arbonst eel
h asme anyiel
dst rengthof300
2
N/
mm andst andardde viat
ionof50N/ mm2. Whatisth
e
meanandst andardde vi
at i
onofmar gi
nofsaf et
y,i
f
2
meant ensilest r
essof2 50N/ mm andst andard
2
devi
at ionof65N/ mm actsonit?
2 2
a.
23.45N/ mm , 50N/mm
2
b.
50N/ mm , 82N/ mm2
c.

8 2N/ mm2, 7.07N/mm2
d.
7.07N/ mm2, 50N/mm2
Ans b.
50N/ mm2, 82N/ mm2
3 Wh ati sme antbyme antimet ofailur
e(MTTF )?
a.
Meantimebetwee
nt wosucce
ssiv
efail
urecompone
nts
b.
Maximumtimebetweentwosuccess
ivefai
l
ure
components
c.
Sumofs ur
viv
alti
mef ornumberofcomponent
s
divi
dedbynumberoffail
ures
d.
Sumofnu mberoffail
ure
sdivi
dedbys u
rvi
valt
imefor
numberofcomponents
Ans c.
Sumofs ur
viv
alti
mef ornumberofcomponent
s
divi
dedbynumberoffail
ures
4 I
farel
iefv
alv
ehasrel
i
abi
li
tyof0.
989,h
owmany
f
ail
ure
sareexpe
cte
dinte
sti
ng1000suchr
eli
efv
alv
es?
a.
1
11
b.

100
c.
10
d.
11
Ans d.
11
5 F ail
urerateforsaf
etyv
alv
ework
ingfor400hoursi
s3
–6
x10 fail
ure
s/hour.
Whati
sth
erel
iabi
li
tyofsaf
ety
val
ve?
a.
0.
998
b.
0.
989
c.

0.888
d.
0.
899
Ans a.
0.
998
6 Wh atisme
antbyh
azar
drat
e?
a. Numbe roffailu
resperu ni
tti
mepe rnumberofit
ems
wh ene xposedfors ametime
b.
Pr obabili
tyoftestspeci
me nfai
lsbetwee
nt i
met
1and
t
1+dt
1whichsurvivesf
ort i
met1
c.
Bot ha. andb.
d.
Noneoft heabov e
Ans c.
Bot ha. andb.
7 Wh atist hestandarddeviati
onofc l
earancepopul
ation
fort hediame terofshaftandholeassemblyspeci
fie
d
below?
Sh aftdiame te
r=30±0. 1
5
Hol ediame te
r=30. 5±0.25
a.
0.
097mm
b.
0.
059mm
c.

0.036mm
d.
0.
390mm
Ans a.
0.097mm
8 Wh ichofth
ef ol
l
owingc
urveshaveth
eme anv
alueequal
toze r
ointhegr
aphoffre
quencyvsrandomvari
able?
a.
Normaldist
ribu
tioncurv
e
b.
Standardnormaldis
tri
buti
oncur v
e
c.
Botha.andb.
d.
Noneoftheabove
Ans b.
Standardnormaldis
tri
buti
oncur v
e
9 Wh atistherel
ati
onbe t
weenstandarddeviat
ion(
σ)and
arit
hme t
icmean(μ)todetermi
nec oeff
ici
entof
vari
ation(C)
?
a.
C=σ+μ
b.
C=σ–μ
c.
C=σ/μ
d.
C=σxμ
Ans c.
C=σ/μ
10 Assignabl
ecause
sar
ecause
dduet
och
ang
esi
n
__
____
___
a.
manu fact
u r
ingpr oce
ss
b.
mat erial
c.
i
ns pectionproc ess
d.
alloft heabov e
Ans d.
alloft heabov e
11 Wh ichoft he
sedoe snotc omeint
oth
ege
ner
almode
lofa
proces s?
a)Inpu t
b)Cont roll
ableinputfactor
s
c)Unc ontrol
lableinput
sf act
ors
d)Ac ceptanc es ampl ing
Ans d)Ac ceptanc es ampl ing
12 Th eu nc ontr ol l
abl ef actorsar et h efac tor_ __
a)Th atv ar iesac cor dingt oanor mal distribution
b)Th atdoe snotv ar yatal l
c)Th atc anbec ont roll
edbyt heu s er
d)Th atc annotbec hang edac cor dingt ot hewi shoft he
user
Ans d)Th atc annotbec hang edac cor dingt ot hewi shoft he
user
13 Th eu nc ontr ol l
abl ef actorsar eal s oc all
e d__ _
_
a)De si
g nedf ac tor s
b)Noi sefac t ors
c)Acc eptanc efac tor s
d)Sou ndf ac tors
Ans b)Noi sefac t ors
14 Wh i
choft he s es tepsar enotc ondu cte dwh e nthede si
gn
ofex perime ntpr oc edu r
eisadopt ed?
a)De termini ngwh ichv ariableismos tinfluential t
o
outpu t
b)De termini ngwh eret os ett h
ei nf l
uent i
al contr ol
labl
e
factorss ot h atou tpu tisne arth enomi nalr equirement
c)Deletingt h eu nc ont roll
ablef act ors
d)De termini ngwh eret os ett h
ei nf l
uent i
al contr ol
labl
e
i
npu tss ot h att hev ariabili
tyint heou tpu ti
ss mallest
Ans c)Deletingt h eu nc ont roll
ablef act ors
15 E xper i
me nt al des ignme thodsar enotu s ed_ ___
a)Evalu atingt hepr oc esscapabi lity
b)Inpr oc es sde v elopme nt
c)Inpr oc esst rou bles hootingt oi mpr ov epr oces s
performanc e
d)Toobt ainapr ocesst hatisr obustandinsensi
ti
veto
exte
rnal sour c
esofv ariabil
i
ty
Ans a)Eval
u atingthepr oc esscapabi li
ty
16 Th edes i
g nedexpe r
ime ntsar et hepartof___ste
pof
DMAICpr oc ess.
a)Defi
ne
b)Measu re
c)Anal
y ze
d)Control
Ans c)Anal
y ze
17 Th edes i
g nofe xperime ntisus edtodetermineth
e
vari
ableswh i
char e__ _affectingthestateofthe
process.
a)Themos t
b)Theleas t
c)Not
d)Notch angingor
Ans a)Themos t
18 Wh ichoft hesec anbeu sedtode vel
opane wprocess?
a)Desi
g nofe x
pe ri
me nts
b)Acceptanc esampl ing
c)Control charts
d)Hist
og ram
Ans a)Desi
g nofe x
pe ri
me nts
19 Th etype soff requenc ydistributionare
a)3
b)4
c )5
d)2
Ans
d)2
20 Themi
nimumv
aluei
nth
ecl
assl
i
miti
scal
l
ed
a)pr i
mar yl
imit
b)u pperli
mit
c )l
owe rl
imit
d)s econdaryl
imit
Ans
c )l
owe rl
imit
21 Th etotaloffreque
ncyupt
oanuppe
rcl
assl
i
mitor
boundaryisknownas
a)av er
agefr equency
b)c u
mu l
ati
v ef r
equ e
ncy
c)frequenc
ydi stribut
ion
d)frequencypol y
g on
Ans
b)c u
mu l
ati
v ef r
equ e
ncy
22 Th edatapre sentedinthef
ormoff
reque
ncydat
ais
k
nownas
a)g roupeddata
b)u ngroupeddata
c )secondarydata
d)c alcul
ate
ddat a
Ans
a)g roupeddata
23 At abulararrangementforc
lassi
fyi
ngdat
aint
o
dif
ferentgroupsisc
alle
d
a)st
andarddev
iat
ion
b)fr
equenc
ydis
tri
but
ion
c)cl
assmn
d)ari
thmet
icmean
Ans
b)f
requ
enc
ydi
str
ibu
tion
2
4 Whyisits ome ti
meseas i
e rtou seaf r
equencytabl
eto
i
nterpretdat athantoe xami neadistri
buti
onofr aw
scores?
A.Afreque ncytabl
etrans formst heraws coresby
showingth eme ans.
B.Frequenc ytabl
esdisplaypat ter
ns,organizi
ngthedat
a
byhowof t eneachscoreoc cu rs.
C.Raws cor esarenotbas edont hesample.
D.Raws cor esdonotr epr e
s entthedata.
Ans B.Freque ncyt ablesdis pl

aypat t
erns ,organizi
ngthedat a
byhowof tene ac hscor eoc curs
25 I ncompar i
ngf requencyt ableswit hg r
ou pedfrequency
tabl
esf ort hes ames etofdat a,wh i
choft hefoll
owi ng
wouldbet rue?
De pe ndingont hewi dthofc las sinterval
sitis
pos sibleth atsomes c oresmaynotbec ountedi n
ag rou pedf requenc yt abl
e.
 Ift hedat as e
tisl arget h
eg rou pedf r
equency
tablewou ldbee as ie
rt ode ci
ph er.
Be c aus eofov e
r l
appi ngclassi nterval
s ,
thetotal
frequ encyf orag r oupe dfrequ encytablewou l
d
exce edth atofaf requ encytable .
I ti
sg ener all
yhar dert ospotpat ternsinthedat a
wh enu singag roupe df re
qu encyt able
.
Ans b)
I
fth
edat
ase
tisl
arg
eth
egr
oupe
dfr
equ
enc
ytabl
e
wou
ldbee
asi
ert
ode
ciph
er.
2
6 Abargraphisusu
all
yuse
dwith__
____
___
_dat
awh
il
ea
hi
stog
rami sus
edwith_
____
___
_data.
Int
erval
;nominal
Rati
o;scal
e
Nominal
;scal
e
Nominal
;ordi
nal
Ans Inte
rval
;nominal
27 Anor
maldi
stri
but
ionis:
Symmetri
c.
Bel
l-
shape
d,sy
mme
tri
c,andu
nimodal
.
Uni
modal.
Bel
l-
shape
d.
Ans Be ll
-s
haped.
28 Th es umoffrequenci
esforall
classeswil
lal
way sequ
al
a.1
b.thenumberofe l
ementsinadatas et
c.th
enu mberofc l
asses
d.av al
uebet
we en0and1
Ans c.th
enu mberofc l
asses
29 Abarc hartconstruc
tedinwhic
ht heareaofeachbaris
proporti
onal t
othenumbe rofite
msi neachgroupis
knownas
a)pichart
b)hi
stogram
c)fr
equencydi
str
ibu
tiont
abl
e
d)pol
ygon
Ans
b)h i
stog
ram
30 Th etabl
ewhi
chsh
owst
hef
reque
ncyofe
achsc
orei
s
c
alle
da
a)pol
yg on
b)pichart
c)hi
stog r
am
d)fr
equ encydi
str
ibu
tiont
abl
e
Ans
d)f
requ
enc
ydi
str
ibu
tiont
abl
e
31 Amanysidedcl
osedfi
gur
euse
dinf
reque
ncy
di
str
ibut
ionist
ermedas
a)f
requenc
ypolygon
b)f
reque
ncyhexagon
c)f
requ
encypentagon
d)f
reque
ncydecagon
Ans
a)f r
eque
ncypol
ygon
32 Th enumberoft
imeseac
hval
ueappe
arsi
scal
l
edt
he
v
alue'
s
a)range
b)mode
c)f
r eque
ncy
d)standardDe
viat
ion
Ans c)frequency
33 1 .Normal Distri
buti
oni sappli
edfor_ _
_____
____
a)Cont i
nuou sRandomDi st
ribut
ion
b)DiscreteRandomVar iabl
e
c)Irregul
arRandomVar i
able
d)Unc er
tainRandomVar i
abl
e
Ans a)Cont i
nuou sRandomDi st
ribut
ion
34 Th es hapeoft heNor malCurveis_____
_____
_
a)Be l
lShape d
b)Flat
c)Circul
ar
d)Spiked
Ans a)Be l
lShape d
35 Nor mal Distri
butioniss y
mme tri
cisabou t__
____
___
__
a)Var i
ance
b)Me an
c)Standar ddeviati
on
d)Cov ari
anc e
Ans b)Me an
36 F oras t
andar dnormal vari
ate,t
h eval
ueofme anis
?
a)∞
b)1
c)0
d)notde fi
ne d
Ans c)0
37 Th ear eau nderas tandardnormal c
u rv
eis?
a)0
b)1
c)∞
d)notde fi
ne d
Ans b)1
38 Th estandar dnor mal c u
rveissymme t
ricabouttheval
ue
___
________
a)0.5
b)1
c)∞
d)0
Ans d)0
39 F oras tandardnor mal vari
ate,
theval
u eofStandard
Devi
ationi s___
____ _
___
a)0
b)1
c)∞
d)notde fi
ned
Ans b)1
40 Nor mal Distr
ibuti
oni sal soknownas_ ___
____
___
a)Cauc hy’
sDistri
bu ti
on
b)LaplacianDistribution
c)GaussianDi s
tribution
d)Lagrang i
anDist ri
bu ti
on
Ans c)GaussianDi s
tribution
41 Sk ewne ssofNor mal distri
buti
onis______
____
_
a)Negative
b)Positi
v e
c)0
d)Undefined
Ans c)0
42 I nNormal distr
ibut i
on, t
hehighe
stvalueofordinate
occursat_ ____
______
a)Mean
b)Variance
c)Ext
re mes
d)Samev alueoc cursatal lpoints
Ans a)Me an
43 Th esh apeoft henormal c urvedependsoni t
s____
___
___
_
a)Me ande viati
on
b)Standar dde viati
on
c)Qu ar ti
lede v
iation
d)Cor re l
ation
Ans b)Standar dde viati
on
44 InSt andar dnor mal dis
tribution,th
ev al
ueofmodeis
___________
a)2
b)1
c)0
d)Notf i
xe d
Ans c)0
45 I nStandar dnor mal distri
bu t
ion,thev al
ueofmedi
anis
___________
a)1
b)0
c)2
d)Notf i
xe d
Ans b)0
46 I nanor mal c ur
v e,t
heh ig
h estpointont hecur
veoccu
rs
att h
eme an, μ,wh ic
hi salsot he:
(a)Me dianandmode
(b)Geome tricme anandh armoni cme an
(c)Lowe randu pperqu artil
es
(d)Var ianceands tandardde v i
ation
Ans (a)Me dianandmode
47 Th
esh
apeoft
henor
mal
cur
vede
pendsu
pont
hev
alu
e
of:
(a)St andar dde v iation
(b)Q1
(c)Me ande viation
(d)Qu ar ti
lede viat i
on
Ans (a)St andar dde v iation
48 Th enor mal distributionisapr operpr obabi
li
ty
distribu t
ionofac ontinuousr andomv ari
abl
e,thet
otal
areau ndert hec u rvef (x
)is:
(a)E qual toone
(b)Le sst hanone
(c)Mor eth anone
(d)Be tween- 1and+ 1
Ans (a)E qual toone
49 Pr oc es scapabi lityg eneral
lyu ses_ _
__
a)Spe ci
ficat i
ons
b)Cont rolLi mits
c)Pr oc esss tandar dde vi
ation
d)Me anofanyones ampl e
Ans b)Cont rolLimi ts
50 I nc aseofabr i
tt l
emat eri
al,
t hefactorofsafetyi
s
(a)Re al stres s
/ units tress
(b)Ultimat es tres s/allowables tr
es s
(c)Allowabl es tre ss/Y ie
ldstres s
(d)None
Ans (b)Ultimat es tres s/allowables tr
es s
51 Wh ati sac count e df orbyt hef actorofsaf e
ty?
(a)Unc e r
taint i
es
(b)Line ardi splac eme nts
(c)Par abol icdis placeme nts
(d)None
Ans (
a)Unc ertainti
es
52 Ot h e
rc ommonnameoft h efactorofsaf e t
yis
(
a)St re ngth
(
b) Strain
(
c )I
gnor anc e
(
d)None
Ans (
c )I
gnor anc e
53 Unde re xactanal ysi
sofst re
sses,wh atwillbevalueof
fac t
orofsaf e
ty inabody ?
(
a)Mor e
(
b)Le s s
(
c )Zero
(
d)None
Ans (
c )Zero
54 E ffectofh i
g he
rf actorofsaf e
tyonc ostoft he
mat erial?
(
a)I ncre ases
(
b)De c rease s
(
c )Noc h ange
(
d)None
Ans (
a)I ncre ases
55 Innor mal distri
bu ti
oncurvether andomv ari
ableis
0
X
Y
1
Ans x
56 Ins t
andar dnor maldist
ributi
onc urve,theme anisequ
al
t
o
1
0
- 1
2
Ans 0
57 Innor maldi
str
ibut
ionc
urve,
thear
eau
nde
rcu
rvei
s
equaltothetot
alpopul
ati
on.
a)totalpopul
ati
on
b)standarddevi
ati
on
c)me an
d)1
Ans a)t
otal
popu
lat
ion
58 I nstandardnormaldis
tri
but
ioncu
rve,
thear
eaunder
curveisequalt
othetotal
popul
ati
on.
a)totalpopul
ati
on
b)standarddevi
ati
on
c)me an
d)1
Ans d)1
59 I nnor maldi
str
ibut
ioncur
ve,
thest
andardde
viat
ioni
s
anyv alu
e.
a)totalpopul
ati
on
b)̂σ
c)me an
d)1
Ans b)̂σ
6
0 I
nst
andar
dnor
mal
dis
tri
but
ionc
urv
e,t
hes
tandar
d
devi
ati
onisanyvalue
.
a)tot
alpopul
ati
on
b)̂σ
c)mean
d)1
Ans d)1
61 I nnormaldi
str
ibut
ioncu
rve
,th
eval
uei
nX-
axi
sis
a)X
b)̂σ
c)Z
d)no.ofpopul
ati
ons
Ans a)X
62 I nstandar
dnormaldi
str
ibu
tionc
urv
e,t
hev
alu
einX-
axi
s
i
s
a)X
b)̂σ
c)Z
d)no.ofpopu
lat
ions
Ans c)Z
Mul
ti
pleCh
oiceQuesti
ons: Me
chani
calSy
ste
mDe
sign
Unit3:Bel
tConvey
orSyste
ms
Sr. Que
stion
Answe
r
No.
AnyMate
rialHandli
ngProces
sc onsi
stsof:
(a)Pi
cki
ng
1 u pthel
oad( b)Trans
porti
ngtheload(c)
Setti
ngt
he d
l
oaddown( d)All
oftheabove
Whi
choft
hefol
l
owi
ngist
hetypeofBulkLoad:
2 (
a)Box
es(
b)s
and(c)
machine
s(d)Cont
ainer
s b
Whi
choft
hefol
l
owingist
hetypeofBulkLoad:
3 (
a)Box
es(
b)machi
nes (c
)Coal(
d)Cont
ainer
s c
Whic
hofthefoll
owingisth
ety peofUni
tLoad:
4 (
a)Boxe
s(b)Sand (c)Coal(
d)Cement a
Whi
chofthefol
l
owingi
sthet
ypeofUni
tLoad:
(a)
5 St
ones(
b)Sand (c
)Machi
ne(
d)Ce
ment c
Objec
tivesofMat e
rialHandl
ingSy
stems:(a)Accur
acy
6 i
nt r
ans portat
ion(
b)LowCos t(c)
Safety(d)Al
lofthe d
Above
Materi
al Handl
ingEqupmentsare:
(a)
7 Hoist
s(b)Conveyors(c )
Bothofthem(d)None c
pul
leyCoupledtodr iv
eu ni
tanddr iv
e st
hebel
tconv
yor
8 i
sc al
ledas:(
a)h eadpu l
ley(
b)t
ailpull
ey(c)c
rown a
pul
ley(d)fl
atpu l
ley
Whichofthefollowingisnotabe l
tc onv
eyor:
(a)
9 tr
ou gh
e d(
b)blanket(c)c h
ain(d)
flatbel
t c
I
fincl
inat
ionang
lei
s55⁰th
ebel
tconv
eyoruse
dis
1
0 c
alle
das :
(a)t
rough
ed(
b)bl
ank
et(c)c
hain(
d)f
latbe
lt b
Tocalc
ulatecapaci
tyofHorizontalBel
tConv e
yor-
--
--
1
1f ac
torisused:(a)f
lowabi
li
tyFactor(b)I
ncl
inati
on c
Fact
or(c )Surchar
g eF
actor(d)None
Tocalc
ulatecapaci
tyofincl
inedBeltConve
y or
--
--
-
1
2 fac
torisused:(a)f
lowabi
li
tyFactor(b)I
ncl
inati
on a
Fact
or(c )Surchar
g eF
actor(d)None
Ifthemat eri
al i
spou r
edont heSt ati
onar ybe l
tt he
anglemadebyt ops u r
fac eofbe l
twitht h
eh orizont al
1
3 a
i
sc alledas: (a)Ang leofRe pos e(b)Ang l
eofSu rcharge
(c)Ang l
eofI ncli
nat ion( d)Ang leofDe cli
nation
Ifthemat eri
al i
spou r
edont hemov i
ngbe l
ttheang l
e
madebyt ops urfac eofbe l
twi ththeh ori
zont alis
1
4 b
call
e das: (a)AngleofRe pos e( b)AngleofSu rchar ge
(c)Ang l
eofI ncli
nat ion( d)Ang leofDe cli
nation
Themi nimu mDi ame terofHe adPu l
leyisg i
venby :(a)
1
5 Dmi n=K 2
Z p(b)Dmi n=K 1+K 2+Zp(c )
Dmi n=K 1Zp(d) d
Dmi n=K 1
K 2Zp
Themi nimu mDi ame teroft ail Pull
eyisg i
v e
nby :(a)
1
6 Dmi n=K 2
Z p(b)Dmi n=K 1+K 2+Zp(c )
Dmi n=K 1Zp(d) d
Dmi n=K 1
K 2Zp
Func ti
onofSnu bPu lle
yis :(a)Ch angingt hepathof
Carr yi
ngr unoft h ebe lt(b)Ch angingt hepathofr eturn
1
7 d
runoft hebe lt(c )
F ac i
li
atingt h eloadingandu nloading
oper ati
ons( d)All oft heabov e
Func ti
onofI dleris :
(a)Ch ang i
ngt hepat hofCar rying
runoft hebe lt(b)Ch angingt h epat hofr eturnru nof
1
8 thebe l
t(c )Tos u ppor tbe ltont heCar ryi
ngr unand c
returnr un(d) Fac il
iatingt hel oadingandu nloading
oper ati
ons
Onc arryingr unth es pac i
ngbe tweent heidl
ersis :(
a) 1
m
1
9 to1.5m( b)2 mt o3m(c )0.5 mt o0.75 m(d)3mt o4m a
Onret
urnru
nth
espac
ingbetwe
ent
heidl
ersi
s:(
a)1
m
2
0t o1
.5m(b)2mt
o3m(c )0.
5mto0.
75m(d)
3mto4m b
Atloadi
ngpoi
ntth
espaci
ngbet
weent
hei
dl
ersis
:
2
1( a)
1mt o1.
5m(b)2mto3m(c)0.
5mto0.
75m(d)
3mt
o c
4m
Me th
odoff eedingtof latbe ltconv eyoris:(a)Byhopper
2
2 (b)bypr ecee
dingConv eyor(c )bypr oc e
s sequipment d
(d)Al
loft h
eabov e
Car ry
ingcapac i
tyofh or izont al f
latbeltconv e
yoris
2
3 calcul
atedby: (a)Q=Cb^ 2V( b)Q= K
b^2V(c )Q=C^2bV a
(d)Q=K^2bV
Car ry
ingcapac i
tyofi nclinedf latbeltconv ey
ori s
2
4 calcul
atedby: (a)Q=Cb^ 2V( b)Q= K
b^2V(c )Q=C^2bV b
(d)Q=K^2bV
Fricti
onalRe si
stanceatu nloadi ngs t
ationisg iv
enby:
2
5 (a)Fr=(2
.1to3.6)Mmg B( b)F r=(
3. 1to3.6)Mmg B(c ) b
Fr=(4.1to4.6)Mmg B(d)Fr= (
3.6t o4. 6)
Mmg B
Fricti
onalRe i
stanceatc l
e aningSt ationisg i
venby:
2
6 (a)Fcl
=KclgB(b)Fcl=Kclgb(c )Fcl= Kcl
+gB(d)Fcl=Kcl
g+B a
whichbe l
tc onv eyordoe spr eve ntss l
i
dingdownof
mat eri
alatani nc l
inat i
onofmor ethan35de gree
s
2
7 withtheh or i
zont al:(a)FlatbeltConv eyor( b)Troughed c
beltConve yor(c )Bl anketbe l
tConv eyor( d)Wov enWire
beltConve yor
Wh i
choft h efollowi ngs tateme nti sfalsef orTr oughed
beltconvey ors:(a)Us edasaf lexiblebelts(b)De pth
2
8 b
deceaseswi t
hi ncer easingno. ofi dlers(c )They
contains5i dlers( d)Th eyc ont ains3i dl
e rs
Wh atisthemas sc ar r
yingc apac ityoff l
atbe l
t
conveyori fthev olu me tri
cc apac ityis0.5 5m3/ hrand
2
9 b
densityoft hemat er i
al i
s1 500k g/m3?: (a)82 5tons/hr
(b)
8 25kg/
h r(c )2 72 7t ons/hr( d)2 722k g/hr
Themas sc arry i
ngc apac i
tyofac onveyori s2 00
30 ton/hr,i
ft hes pee doft hebeltis4m/ sth enwh atist h
e c
widthofh or i
zont al f l
atbe l
tc onv eyorc arryingt h
e
l
oad? (s ur char geF ac tor=0. 075and
de ns i
ty =1000k g /m3): (a)49 9.
23mm( b)500mm
(c )533. 7mm( d)I ns ufficientDat a
Th emas sc ar ryingc apac it
yofac onv eyor,ifthe
spe e doft hebe ltis1 .
75 m/ s,thewi dthofh orizontal
flatbe l
tc onv ey orc arryingthel oadi s650mm
31 a
? (s urc hargeF act or =0.1andde nsity=1200kg/m3):
(a)2 16.38t ons /hr( b)31 6.38tons /hr(c )216.
38k g/hr
(d)I ns uffici
entDat a
Th emas sc ar ryingc apac it
yofac onv eyor,ifthe
spe e doft hebe ltis1 .
75 m/ s,thewi dthofh orizontal
flatbe l
tc onv ey orc arryingthel oadi s800mm
32 a
? (s urc hargeF act or =2.35 *1
0^-4andde ns i
ty=2
ton/ m3): (a)1.32 9t ons /
h r(b)1
.32t ons/hr(c)1.
33
kg /hr( d)Ins uff i
c i
e ntDat a
Ah orizont al be l
tc onv e yoristobeu sedfor
trans por ti
ng45 0t ons /hrofi ronor ewithamas s
33 de ns i
tyof1 75 0k g /m3. i
ft hesur ch
ar g
efac t
oris0. 06
, b
de termi net hebe ltwi dth?: (
a)900mm( b)915mm
(c )930mm( d)9 50mm
Le ng thofpu ll
e yisg ivenby: (a)Lp=2 B+S(b)Lp=B* 2S
34 (c )Lp=B+ S( d)Lp=B+ 2
S d
Ah orizontal beltconvey
ori st
obeu s e
df or
trans porti
ng5 00tons/hrofironorewi thamas s
35 dens i
tyof1 800k g/
m3. i
fthesu rc
hargefac toris b
0.075 ,det
ermi net hebel
twidth?Bel
tSpe ed=1 .
5m/s:
(a)900mm( b)9 80mm(c )1000mm( d)
1 1
00mm
Ou toft h
ef ollowingisnotthestandardbe l
twidth?
36 :(a)900mm( b)1000mm (c )12
00mm ( d)
1 300mm d
Outofth
efol
l
owingi
snott
hest
andardbel
twi
dth
?
37 :(
a)400mm(b)45
0mm (c)
500mm (d)
550mm d
Ou
tofthef
oll
owi
ngist
hes
tandardbe
ltwi
dth
?:(
a)2
00
38 mm(b)
250mm (c)
300mm (
d)350mm c
Ou
tofthef
oll
owi
ngi
sthes
tandardbe
ltwi
dth
?:(
a)400
39 mm(b)
425mm (c)
550mm (
d)470mm a
Outofth
efol
l
owingist
hest
andardbe
ltwi
dth
?
40 :(
a)15
00mm( b)
1700mm (c)
1800mm (
d)1
900mm c
Crane
sarethe
---
--
:(
a)Hoi
sti
ngE qui
pment
s(b)Sur
fac
e
41 andover
headEqui
pme nt
s(c )Convey
ors(
d)None a
Angl
eofLapfac
torforpu
ll
eywh
enӨ<90°is:
(a)
0.02
42 to0.
03(b)
0.03t
o0.04(c)0.
05t
o0.06(d)0.
01t
o0.02 a
Angl
eofLapf ac
torforpu
ll
e ywh
en90°<
Ө< 18
0°i
s:
43 (a)
0.02to0.03(
b)0.
03to0.04(c)0.
05to0.06(
d)0.
01 b
to0.02
Angl
eofLapf ac
torforpu
ll
e ywh
enӨ>=180°i
s:(
a)0.
02
44 to0.03(b)
0.03t
o0.04(c)0.05t
o0.06(d)0.
01t
o0.02 c
Fri
cti
onal Re sis
tanceatloadings tat
ionisgiv
e nby:
45 (a)
F=(3.1to3.6 )
Mmg B(b)F=(3.
1to3. 6
)Mmg B(c )F=(
4.1 d
to4.6)Mmg B( d)F
=M(V-
Vi )
Methodofu nl
oadingforf l
atbe l
tconv ey
orsis:(a)
Plow
46 Disc
h arge(b)Tr i
pperdischrge(c)He adPull
ey d
Disc
h arge(d)All
Iti
snott h etypeofidl
er :
47 (a)I
mpac ti dl
er(b)SpringIdle
r(c )DiscIdl
er(d) d
Groov e
dI dler
Angl
eofSurc
har
geisal
ways-
--
--
-th
anang
leofr
epos
e:
48 (a)
le
ss(b)
more(c)
equal
to(d)
none a
Angl
eofRepos
eisal
ways--
--
--
thanang
leofSu
rch
arg
e:
49 (a)
le
ss(b)
more(c)
equal
to(d)none b
Wh ati st hemas sc ar ry
ingc apacit
yoff l
atbe lt
conv ey ori fthev ol ume tri
cc apacityis0.45 m3/ hrand
5
0 d
dens ityoft hemat er i
al i
s1 200k g/
m3?: (a)54t ons /h
r
(b)45 0k g/hr(c )5 40t ons /hr(d)540k g
/h r
Wh ichoft h efollowi ngist hetypeoft ak eu pdevice?:
5
1 (a)Sc rewt y pe(b) Ver ti
calGrav it
ytype(c )Horizont al d
Grav ityt ype( d)Al l
Th er ateatwh i
c hmat e
riali
sc arriedbyt hec onve yor
5
2 i
sc all
e das : (
a)De ns i
t yoftheConv e yor(b)Vol ume c
(c )Capac i
tyoft hec onv eyor(d)Mas s
Th ewi dt honwh ichmat eri
al i
spr esentont hebeltis
5
3 calledas :(a)Widt hofbe l
t(b) E
f f
ecti
vebe ltwidth b
(c )Bot h(d)None
Re lations hipbe twe ene ffectivebel
twi dthandwi dthof
5
4 beltis :(a)b=0. 09 B- 0.05 ( b)b=0. 5B-0.09(c )
b=0. 9B- c
0.05( d) b=0. 9B-0. 5
Flowabi li
tyf actorwh enbeltincli
nationang l
eis16 °to
5
5 20°i s:(a)2 .
6 5*10^-4( b)2.5*1
0^ -
4(c )
2 .
35*10^-4 b
(d)2 .
20* 10^-4
Flowabi li
nationang l
eis10°t o
5
6 15°i s:(a)2.65 *1
0^ -4( b)2.
5*10^-4(c )2.35*10^-4 a
(d)2 .
20* 10^-4
Flowabi li
nationang l
eis2 1°to
5
7 25 °is:(a)2.6 5*1
0^ -4( b)2.
5 *
10^ -
4(c )2.35*10^-4 c
(d)2 .
20* 10^-4
Flowabi li
t yfac torwh enbe ltinclinationang leis26 °to
5
8 30°i s:(a)2.65 *10^ -
4( b)2.
5* 1
0^ -4(c )
2 .
35*10^-4 d
(d)2.20*10^ -4
Th e--
--
--conv ey orsc ons is
tsofapai rofpar allel
5
9 endl e
s sr oll
e rc hainsr unningont rackss uppor te
dby a
frame s .:
(a) Apr on( b)screw (c )
Ch ain(d)F altBelt
Wh ichoft hef ollowi ngCov eyorh ash ighestprobabi l
it
y
6
0 ofSl i
p?( a)F l
atBe l
t( b)Tr ogh edBe lt(c)Ch ain(d) a
Apr on
Th e---
-de v i
ce sar eu s
edinbe ltconv eyorst omai ntain
6
1 ade quat et ens i
oni nt hebe lt
?: (a)Idlers(b)Snu bPu ll
eys c
(c )BeltTak eu pDe vices(d)Cl eane r
Th epowe rt rans mi tte
dbybe l
tdr i
v edependsu pon
6
2 (a)be l
tv eloc i
ty( b)i ni
tialbeltt ension d
(c)ar cofc ont ac t(d)alloft heabov e
Wh enth ebe lts pe e
di ncreas es
(a)powe rt rans mi ttedincr eas es
(b)powe rt rans mi ttedde creas es
6
3 (c)powe rt rans mi ttedincr e
as e
st oamax i
mu mv alu
e c
andt h ende c reas es
(d)powe rt rans mi ttedr e
mai nst hes ame
Thecoeffi
ci
entoffri
cti
oninbel
tdr
ivedepe
ndsu
pon
6
4(a)mater
ialofbel
t(b)mate
rial
ofpul
ley c
(
c)mate
rial
sofbeltandpul
ley(
d)be
ltvel
oci
ty
Materialhandlingconsi
stsofmov
eme
ntofmat
eri
al
from
(a)onemac hinet oanoth
e r
6
5 b)ones hoptoanot hershop d
c)st
or estosh op
d)alloftheabov e
Overbridgecranehas
a)
trans versemovement
6 b)
6 long i
tudinalmovement c
c)
bot h‘a’and‘b’
d)
Noneoft heabove
Itisgene ral
lynotpos sibl
etoc hangeth
edirect
ionof
fl
owwi t
hbe ltconveyors.
Statement2 :Ifbe l
tconveyorsaretobeu se
dint h
e
bentpos i
tion,slatbelt
sar eused.
6
7 b
a)Tr ue,
Fal se
b)Tr u
e ,
Tr ue
c)False,False
d)False,Tr u
e
Statement1 :Beltconveyorscannotbeu se
dinthe
i
nc l
inedpos iti
on.
Statement2 :Screwc onveyorscanc ar
rymor eamount
ofloadc ompar e dtobeltconveyors
.
68 a)Tr ue,
Fal se c
b)Tr u
e ,
Tr ue
c)False,False
d)False,True
Statement1 :
Chaindriveroll
ersmovefasterth
anbelt
drivenroll
ers.
Statement2 :
Screwc onveyorsareusedinthefe
edi
ng
ofr awmat eri
alsli
kewh e
atorc hil
l
yintoth
eg ri
ndi
ng
unittomak eapowde rou tofit.
6
9 b
a)Tr ue
,False
b)Tr ue
,Tr u
e
c)False,Fal
se
d)False,True
Statement1 :Cr
anesandhoi
stsh
aveani
ncl
ineupand
downopt ion.
Statement2 :
Truck
sc anbeu
sedforc
ont
inu
ou s
operati
ons .
70 a)True,False c
b)True,True
c)Fal
s e
,False
d)False,
Tr ue
Theang
leofr
e posedependson
71 A.
s h
apeofth
emat erial
B. s
moothnessofthemat
eri
al d
C.
degre
eoffinene
s softhemater
ial
D. al
lofth
eabov
e
Overbridgecranehas
a)
trans versemovement
b)
long i
tudinalmovement
72 c)
bot h‘a’and‘b’ c
d)
Noneoft heabove
Wh i
choft h
ef ol
l
owi ngi
sapr
ope
rtyofbu
lkl
oad?
a.Hardness
73 b.Cakeformingtendenc
y b
c.
Su spensi
onpart
d.Wei
g ht
Whatarebu l
kloads?
a.Lumpofmat e
rial
74 b.Si
ngl
erigidmas s b
c.
Homog eneouspartic
les
d.He
terogeneousparti
cle
s
Whic
hbe l
tc onveyorpreventssl
i
dingdownofmat
eri
al
atanincl
inationof5 5owithhori
zontal
?
a.Fl
atbel
tc onveyor
75 b.Troug
he dbe l
tconveyor c
c.Bl
anketbe l
tconve y
or
d.Wovenwi rebel
tc onvey
ors
Whichoft hefoll
owingstate
me ntsisf
alsefor
tr
ou ghedbe l
tconveyors?
1.
Tr oughedbe l
tconveyorsusefl
e x
ibl
ebelt
s
2.Theyc ontai
nfiveidl
ers
3.Depthoft roughdecrease
swi t
hincre
as i
ngnumbe
r
ofidl
e r
s
76 c
4.Flexi
bil
ityofbelti
ncreasesasdepthoftrough
decreases
a.1and2
b.2and3
c.3and4
d.Noneoft heabov e
Mas scapaci
tyofaconv
eyoris200ton/
hr,i
fspeedof
th
ebe l
tis4m/ st
henwhati
st h
ewi dt
hofhori
zontal
fl
atbel
tc onv
eyorcar
ryi
ngtheload?(
Sur
chargefact
or
=0.075&ρ=1 000kg/
m3)
77 c
a.499.
2 3mm
b.500.0mm
c.
5 33.
7mm
d.I
ns u
ffic
ientdat
a
Whati
sthemasscapaci
tyoffl
atbe
ltc
onv
eyori
f
vol
umet
ricc
apaci
ty0.5
5m3/ h
r?(ρ=15
00kg/
m3)
78 a.825tons/h
r b
b.825kg/h
r
c.
2.727tons/hr
d.2722kg/hr
Ani ncl
ine
dbe l
tc onveyorisus
edforloadinggoods.I
f
spe edofthebelthaving1500mmwi dthis3m/ sthe
n
wh atisthevolu
me t
riccapaci
tyoft
h econvey
or ?
(For2 1
o,k=2.35x1 0–4)
79 a
a.1
.19x10-3m3/
s
b.1
.75x10-3m3/s
c.
1.5x10-3m3/s
d.2.
5x10-3m3/s
Whi
chdi
sch
arg
emet
hodprovi
desonl
yint
erme
diat
e
di
sch
arg
eforl
ows
peedfl
atbel
tconv
eyor?
0 a.
8 Plowdisch
arge a
b.Trippe
rdisch
arge
c.
Bot ha.andb.
d.Noneoftheabove
MSD
Uni
t4De
sig
nofCy
li
nde
rsandPr
ess
ureVe
sse
ls.
Sr. Qu estions
No
1. I nte r
nal pr e
ssureof2 .5Mpaactsonapr es
s u
rev e
ssel
oft hickne ss15mmandi nte
rnaldi
ame t
erof1500mm.
Wh ati sth estr
e ssinduce
dinlongi
tudi
naldi
recti
on?
a. 36.63N/ mm2
b.5 9.13N/ mm2
c.6 5.62N/ mm2
d.1 31.25N/ mm
Ans c.6 5.62N/ mm2
2. Wh icht ypeoff orme dthr
eadsareusedforverti
cal
pre ssurev esselsinthepress
u r
erangeof0.1N/mm2 t
o
2
1.5N/ mm ?
a. Plainf ormedh ead
b.
Tor i
sph eri
caldishedhead
c.
Se mi-elli
pti
caldishedhead
d.
Al loft heabov e
Ans b.Tor i
sph eri
caldishedhead
3 Des i
g npr ess ureforu nfiredpr essur evessel
sis1.05
ti
me sof_ ______
a.
mi nimu mwor kingpr es sure
b.
max imu mwor kingpr essure
c.
hy dros taticte stpr essure
d.
noneoft h eabov e
Ans b.max imu mwor kingpr essure
4 Clas s3pr ess urev esselsh avi
ngwe ldedjointsare
______ ___
a.
fu ll
yr adio-graph ed
b.
par t
iall
yr adi o-
g raph ed
c.
spotr adio- g
r aph ed
d.
notr adio-g r
aph ed
Ans d.notr adio-g r
aph ed
5
Wh ic htypeofwe lde djointsar enoti ncludedincl
ass3
pres su reve ssels?
a.
Dou blewe ldedbu ttjointwithf ullpenetrati
on
b.
Sing lewe ldedbu tjointwi t
hbac ks tri
p
c.
Sing lefullfil
letlapj oints
d.
Noneoft h eabov e
Ans c.Sing lefullfil
letlapj oints
6 Inu nf i
redpr essurev e
s sel
s ,
cat egoryAc ons i
stsof
______ ___
a.
joi ntsc onne cti
ngf l
ang esandf l
ath eads
b.
we l
de djointsc onne ct
ingnozzl e swi t
hmai nshell
c.
circ umf erentialwe l
dedjoint sjoints
d.
long itudinal welde djoints
Ans d.long itudinal welde djoints
7 Wh ati st hewe ldjoi ntefficie
nc yifpr essurevesseli
s
fabr icatedwi t
hs ing l
ef ul
lfil
letlapj oint
?
a.
1.0
b.
0.5 5
c.
0.65
d.
0.8 5
Ans b.0.5 5
8 Ac yl
indr icalpr essur
ev esseli
ss ubjectedt oani nter
nal
press ureof3MPaoni nternaldi
ame t
e rof1 000mm. The
vesse lisfabr icatedwiths i
ngl
ewe ldbu ttjointwi t
hback
st
r ipandi snotr adi
o-graphed.Wh atist hethi
c knessof
fl
ath e ad,ifh eadmadeofal l
oys teelhasanu lt
imat e
2
te
ns iles trengthof400N/ mm ?(cor ros i
onallowanc e=
2)
a.
110mm
b.
120mm
c.
150.2 3mm
d.
152 .
1 3mm
Ans 1 10mm
9 Ac yl
indr icalpr essur
ev esseli
ss ubjectedt oope rati
ng
press ureof0. 55Mpaandc orrosional lowanc eof2 .
Wh atist het hicknessofpr essurev es
s elshelli
fi t
s
2
i
nte rnal diame teris2000mm?( σal
l=120N/ mm &ηl
=
0.
75 )
a.
6 .
5mm
b.
7mm
c.
9mm
d.
9.5mm
Ans c.9mm
10 Av ess eliss aidtobet hi
ni f
I tswal lhaslessthickness
St r essesar eu ni
formov erthee ntirethickne s
s
Stresses
var yatinnerandatouterradi
us
Noneoft heabov e
Ans St re
ssesar euniformovertheenti
rethi
ckne
ss
11 Inath
invessel
,thetruerati
oofD/ ti
s
D/t=20
D/t=10
D/t>20
D/t>10
Ans D/ t>20
12 Hoopstr
essinat hinvesseli
s
pD/2t
pD/4t
pD/3t
None
Ans pD/ 2t
1
3 Radialst
re s
sinat hi
ns he
lli
sgive
nby
a.pD/2t
b.pD/4t
c.pD/3t
d.None
Ans d.None
14 Athincyli
ndric
alshel
lunderi
nter
nalpressu
re
canfailby
a.Shear
b.Compr ess
ion
c.Tension
d.None
Ans Te nsion
15 F ail
ureofat hi
ns pher
icalsh
ell
underi
nte
r nal
press
ure
wil
lbedu et o
Max imu ms hears tres s
Pr inc i
pal compr es si
ves t
ress
Pr inc i
pal tens i
les tress
None
Ans C. Pr incipalte nsil
es tress
16 Stresse sinat hinc yli
ndr i
calshel
lunderinte
r nal
pressur ei sindepe nde ntof
Di ame te
r
Th ick ness
Le ng th
Di ame te
randt hickness
Ans Le ng th
17
De si
gnofat hi
ns hellunderpressureisdoneont he
basisof
Radi al stress
Long itudinals tress
Hoops t
re ss
Al lt het hrees tress es
Ans c.Hoops t re
s s
18 Thet hi
c kne ssoft hinc yl
inderi
sdeterminedont he
basisof
(a)radi al stress
(b)long itudinals tress
(c)circu mf erential stress
(
d)pr inc i
pal she ars tress
Ans (c)c ircumf ere nti
al stress
19 Th eend- clos uref ort ank e
rsofmi l
k,petrolordies
el
is
(
a)h emi s pherical head
(b)c oni cal head
(c)t or isph erical head
(d)f l
ath ead
Ans (
c)t or i
s ph erical head
20 We l
dj ointe fficiencyi smax imu mwh ent hepress ur
e
v ess el i
swe lde dby( a)s ing l
e-wel
de dbu ttjoi
ntwi t
h
bac kings t ri
p( b)s ing l
e -we l
dedbu ttj ointwithout
bac kings t ri
p( c)dou ble-we l
dedbu ttj ointwithfu l
l
pe ne trat i
on( d)noneoft heabov e
Ans (c )dou ble-we ldedbu ttj oi ntwi thfullpe ne t
rati
on
21 Wh ilede signingpr ess u rev e sselsac cor dingto‘Code
foru nf i
r edv es selIS2 8 25 ’
, thede si
gnpr e ssur
eis
tak enas
(a)1 .05 (
max imu mope rat ingpr essur e)
(b)1 .5 (max i
mu mope rat ingpr essure)
(c )2 (
max i
mu mope r at i
ngpr essure)
(d)1 .
3( max imu mope r atingpr essu re)
Ans ( a)1 .05 (max imu mope r at ingpr e
s sur e)
22 Cl as s3pr es su rev e
s s elsar etobede signed
ac cor dingt o‘ Codef oru nf i
r e
dv essel IS-2825’when,
2
(a)ope ratingpr ess u reisl essthan1 7.5k gf/
cm
(b)ope ratingt e mpe rat ur ei smor ethan0° Candl ess
t han2 5 0°C
(c)th ickne ssofs hellisl es st han1 6mm
(d)anyoneoft heabov e
Ans (d)anyoneoft h eabov e
23 Cl as s1pr e ssu rev ess elsar etobede s i
gned
ac cor dingt o‘ Codef oru nf i
r e
dv essel IS-2825’when,
a. hy droc yani cac id, car bony lchl
or i
deormu stard
g asar es t
or e d
b. ope ratingt e mpe rat u rei smor eth an- 20°C
c.li
qu ef
iedpet
roleu
mg asiss tored
d.thic
knessofshell
islesst han38mm
Ans a.hydroc
yanicacid,carbony l
chlor
ideor
mu st
ardgasares tored
24 Ac c
or di
ngtoLame ’
se quation,thethi
cknessof
c
yli
ndr i
calshe
lli
sgivenby,
Ans
2
5 Ac
cor di
ngt
oBirnie
’sequ
ati
on,
thet
hic
kne
ssof
cyl
indri
cal
she
llisgi
venby,
Ans
2
6 Acc
ordi
ngtoCl
avar
ino’
sequat
ion,
thet
hic
kne
ssof
cy
li
ndri
cal
shel
li
sgi
venby,
Ans
2
7 I
nt hickc yli
nde rs,thet ang entials tressac r osst he
t
h ickne ssofc yli
nde r
(a)r e mai nsu niformt hroug hou t
(b)v ar iesf romi nternal pre ssu reatt h ei nne r
sur fac etoze r oatt heou ters urfac e( c)v ariesfrom
max i
mu mv alu eatt heinne rs u rfac etomi ni mu m
valu eatt h eou ters urface
(d)v ar iesf rommax i
mu mv al ueatt heou ters urface
t
omi nimu mv al ueatt hei nne rsu rfac e
Ans (c)v ar iesf rommax i
mu mv al ueatt heinne rs ur
face
tomi nimu mv alueatt heou t ersu rfac e
28 Int h i
ckc ylinde rs ,t
her adial s t
re ssac ros st he
th i
ck nessofc ylinder( a)r emai nsu nif or m
th rou ghou t( b)v ariesf romi nter nalpr es s ureat
th einne rs u rfac etoze r oatt heou t
ers ur face( c)
var iesf rommax i
mu mv alueatt heinne rs urfaceto
mi nimu mv al ueatt h eou ters ur fac e( d)v aries
frommax imu mv al
u eatt h eou ters ur fac et o
mi nimu mv al ueatt h einne rs urfac e
Ans ( b)v ar i
esf romi nternal pre ssur eatt h ei nner
su rfac et oze roatt h eou ters ur face
29 I nt h ickcy l
inde r
s ,theax ials tressac ros st h e
th i
c kne ssofc yl
inder
(a)r e mainsu nifor mt hr oug hout
(b)v ar i
esf romi nternal pre ssur eatt h einne r
s urf acet oze roatt heou t
e rs urfac e( c)v aries
fr ommax i
mu mv alueatt heinne rs urf ac et o
mi nimu mv alu eatt heou te
rs urfac e
(
d)v ar i
esf r ommax imu mv alueatt heou te rs ur
face
tomi nimu mv alueatt heinners u rface
Ans (a)r emai nsu nifor mt h
rou ghout
30 Au tofre tt
ag ei s,
(a)as u rfac ec oat ingpr ocessofc yli
ndersfor
cor ros i
onr es i
s t
anc e
(b)ah eatt re atme ntpr oc essf orc yli
nderst
o
re l
iever esidu alst res ses
(c )apr oces sofpr e-
s t
re ssi
ngt hec yli
nderto
de velopr es i
du alc ompr essivest ressatt hei
nner
su rface
(d)as ur f
ac eh ar de ningpr ocessofc yl
indert
o
i
mpr ov ewe arr es i
s tance2 2
Ans (c )apr oces sofpr e-str
e ssi
ngt h ecyli
nderto
de ve l
opr esidu alc ompr e ssi
ves tr e
s satthei
nner
s u r
fac e
31 Au tofr ettagei sac hievedby ,
(a)c ompou ndc y l
inde r
(b)ov e r
loadi ngt h ec yl
inderbe forepu tti
ngiti
n
s ervice
(c)wi ndingawi reu nde rtensionar oundthe
c yl
inde r
(d)anyoneoft h eabov eme th ods
Ans (d)anyoneoft h eabov eme thods
32 Th et hi
c kne ssoft h ic
kc yli
ndr i
cal shellwit
hclos
ed
endsandmadeofbr ittl
emat erial i
sde termi
nedby,
(a)Lame ’se qu ation
(b)Cl avar i
no’ se qu at i
on
(c)Bi r
ni e’
se qu at i
on
(d)Bar low’ se qu ation
Ans (a)Lame ’
se qu ation
33 Th et hi
c kne ssoft h ic
kc yli
ndr i
cal shellwit
hclos
ed
endsandmadeofdu cti
lemat erial i
sde te
r minedby,
(a)Lame ’
se qu ation
( b)Clav arino’se qu ation
( c)Birnie’se quat i
on
(d)Bar l
ow’ se qu ation
Ans (b)Cl av arino’se qu ation
34 Th et hi
ck nessoft h i
c kc y
lindri
cal s h
ellwithope n
endsandmadeofdu cti
lemat erial i
sde te
rmi nedby,
(a)Lame ’sequ at i
on
(b)Cl avar ino’se qu ation
(c )Birnie’se quat i
on
(d)Bar l
ow’ se quat i
on
Ans (c )Birnie’se quat i
on
35 I nt hinc yli
nde rs, t
hel ong i
tudinal stressis,
(a)2 (cir
c umf erent i
al stres s)
( b)1/2 (
circumf e rential stress)
( c)1/4(circumf e rential stress)
( d)4(c i
rc umf erential stress)
Ans (b)1 /2(ci
r cumf erent i
al stress)
36 Th et hic
k nes soft h inc yl
inderisde t
ermine dont he
bas i
sof ,
(a)r adial stress
(b)long itudinal stre ss
(c)c i
rc umf erential stress
(d)pr incipal shears tress
Ans (c)c i
rc umf erential stress
37 Th epis tonr odofah ydrau l
iccylindere xertsan
ope rat i
ngf or ceof1 0kN. Theallowabl es t
r essinthe
cy l
inderi s45 N/mm² .Calcu l
ateth ethicknessoft he
cy l
inderu s i
ngLame ’se quation.Di ame t
eroft h e
cy l
inderi s40mmandpr es sur
einc yl
inderis1 0MPa.
a)2 .05 mm
b)4. 2mm
c)5.07mm
d)Noneoft h eli
st e
d
Ans c )5.07mm
t= D/2[√[σ+P/ σ- P]-1].
38 Thepi stonr odofah ydrauli
cc yli
nde rexertsan
ope rat i
ngf or ceof1 0k N.Th eallowabl estressinthe
cyl
inde ris70N/ mm² .Calcul
atet het hi
ckne s
soft he
cyli
nde ru s
ingCl avar inoe’sequ ation.Diame terofthe
cyl
inde ris2 40mm. μ= 0.3andpr essureinc yl
inderis
15MPa.
a)35 mm
b)30mm
c)2 7mm
d)Noneoft heli
s te
d
Ans c)2 7mm
t=D/ 2[√[σ+(1-2μ)P/ σ-(1+μ)P]-1].
39 As eaml essc yli
nderofs t
orag ec apac i
tyof0. 03mᵌi
s
s ubj ectedt oani nte rnalpre ssureof2 1
MPa. Th e
u l
timat estr engthofmat er
ialofc yl
i
nde ris
35 0N/ mm² .Determi net hethicknes softh ecyli
nderif
itist wi ceth ediame terofth ecy l
inder.
a)1 2 mm
b)4mm
c)8 mm
d)1 6 mm
Ans c)8 mm
t=PD/ 2σ.
40 As eaml essc yli
nderofs t
orag ec apac i
tyof0. 03mᵌi
s
subj ec t
e dtoani nternal pressu reof2 1MPa. The
ulti
mat es trengthofmat erialofcyli
nderis
350N/ mm² .De t
e r
mi net h
eleng t
hoft hec y
li
nde rifi
tis
twicet hediame t
eroft h
ec yli
nder.
a)5 40mm
b)2 70mm
c)400mm
d)35 0mm
Ans a)5 40mm
0.03= πd²L/4andL= 2d.
41 At h i
nc yl
indr i
calpr essurev e
sse l
withc l
os ed-
endsis
su bjectedt ointernal pressure.Theratioof
circumf ere nti
al(hoop)s tresstot helongi
tu di
nal
str essis
a)0.25
b)0.50
c)1.
0
d)2.0
Ans d)2.0
42 Wh ati sthec onditiont oavoidj ointsepar ati
onof
conne c
tedme mbe rsi ncyl
inders.
F m<0
F m>0
F m=0
Noneoft h eabov e
Ans F m<0
43 ____ _
_ _
____ ___
_closu reisthewe akestenclos u
refor
cy l
indricalv essel
s.
a.)Hemi sph eri
cal
b)Tor i
sph e r
ical
c)Coni cal orf l
atpl ate
d)E l
liptical
Ans c)Coni c al orf latpl at e
44 Inh ydr os tat i
ct es tingofwe lde dpipe(f orleakage,
streng the tc.)ther atioofmi nimu mh ydros t
atictest
pr essu ret oi nter nal des i
gnpr ess u
reisar ou nd
a.0.5
b.1 .
5
c.2 .
5
d.3. 5
Ans b. 1.5
45 Ac ertainpr es sur ev es s
e lmanu facturerav oids
doingr einf or ceme ntsc alculationsf orope ni
ngsby
alway spr ov i
dingar ei
nfor ci
ngpade xtendingu pt
o
doublet h edi ame teroft heope ningandoft h
es ame
mat erial andt hick ne ssast h atoft hes h e
llwall.I
f
areac ompe ns ationi sac cept e
dasac odeg ui
deli
ne,
hi
sappr oac hl eadst osaf ede sign
a.Onl yi fth eope ningisons pheri
c alvessel
b.Onl yi ftheope ni
ngi sonav erticalcyli
ndrical
v es sel
c .Onl yift heope ni
ngi sonah or i
zont al
c yli
ndr i
c alv es sel
d.I rr espe ctiveoft hes hapeoft hev es sel
Ans d.I rr espe ctiveoft hes hapeoft hev es sel
46 Safetyv alvesar epr ov i
dedi nc he micalequipme nts
tog uardag ains te xc essiv
e
a.Tempe rat ure
b.Pre ss ure /pres su ref l
u c
tu ation
c.Tur bu l
e nce
d.Nois e
Ans b.Pre ss ure /pres su ref l
u c
tu ation
47 We lde djointe ff
icie
nc yinthedesignofc hemical
proc esse qui
pme nti stakenas
a. 0.55
b. 0.75
c.0.8 5
d.0.9 5
Ans c .0.8 5
48 Ci r cu mfe rent
ial(hoop)s tr
es sinat hi
nc yl
indri
cal
vess elunde rinternalpressureis__ __
______the
l
ong itudinal s
t re
ss .
a.Hal f
b.E qual to
c.Twi c e
d.E ightt i
me s
Ans c .Twi c e
49 Cy l
indr i
c alpressu r
ev essel
si nhorizontalcondi
tion
isg ene rall
ysu pport e
dona_ _____
_ __
_s upport.
a. Lu g
b.Sk i
rt
c.Saddl e
d.Gu ywi re
Ans c .Saddl e
50 F orh ig hpr essurepr ocessequ i
pme nts/v
es sel
s,t
he
conne ctednozzl es houldbe
a.We l
de d
b.Sc rewe d
c.Flang ed
d. Br aze d
Ans c.Flang ed
1) Which of the following ergonomic factors are encountered in engineering
applications?
- Published on 18 Sep 15
a. Thermal radiations
b. Lubrication failure
c. Fatigue
d. Corrosion
Answer Explanation Related Ques
ANSWER: Fatigue
Explanation:
No explanation is available for this question!
2) Which of the following statements is/are true about safety/risk?

a. Risk is potential for damage

b. Hazard is likely hood of damage
c. Danger is combination of risk and hazard
d. All of the above
ANSWER: Danger is combination of risk and hazard

Explanation:
3) Which of the following processes is used for surface finishing?

a. Shaping
b. Broaching
c. Lapping
d. All of the above
ANSWER: Lapping
Explanation:
4) In forging process, forging plane is the plane __________

a. parallel to die motion

b. perpendicular to die motion
c. where two die halves meet
ANSWER: perpendicular to die motion

Explanation:
5) What are the factors affecting selection of casting process?

a. Tolerances
b. Surface finish
c. Both a. and b.

ANSWER: Both a. and b.
Explanation:
6) Which of the following is a property of bulk load?

a. Hardness
b. Cake forming tendency
c. Suspension part
d. Weight
ANSWER: Cake forming tendency

Explanation:
7) Which of the following is not a hoisting equipment with lifting gear?

a. Cage elevators
b. Jib cranes
c. Pulleys
d. Troughed belts
ANSWER: Troughed belts

Explanation:
8) What are bulk loads?
a. Lump of material
b. Single rigid mass
c. Homogeneous particles
d. Heterogeneous particles
ANSWER: Single rigid mass

Explanation:
9) Which belt conveyor prevents sliding down of material at an inclination of 55 o with

horizontal?
a. Flat belt conveyor

b. Troughed belt conveyor
c. Blanket belt conveyor
d. Woven wire belt conveyors
ANSWER: Blanket belt conveyor

Explanation:
10) Which of the following statements is false for troughed belt conveyors?

3. Depth of trough decreases with increasing number of idlers
a. 1 and 2
b. 2 and 3
c. 3 and 4
ANSWER: 3 and 4
Explanation:
11) Diameter range is high in geometric progression due to _________ spindle speed.
a. low
b. high
c. constant
ANSWER: low
Explanation:
12) What is harmonic progression?


ANSWER: Difference between reciprocal of two successive

Explanation:
13) Ratio of two spindle speeds is constant in _________ progression.

a. Arithmetic
b. Geometric
c. Harmonic
ANSWER: Geometric
Explanation:
14) What is the purpose of using a gear box?

a. To increase torque
b. To increase speed
c. Converts single input speed into multiple output speeds
d. All of the above

ANSWER: All of the above
Explanation:
15) Which of the following statements is true for structure/speed diagrams?

a. Structure diagrams gives range ratio of spindle speeds

b. Speed diagrams do not give range ratio of spindle speeds
c. Speed diagrams consider motor speed
d. All of the above
ANSWER: Speed diagrams consider motor speed

Explanation:
16) What causes infant mortality in mechanical equipments?

a. Design errors
d. All of the above

Explanation:
17) A plain carbon steel has mean yield strength of 300 N/mm2 and standard deviation
of 50 N/mm2. What is the mean and standard deviation of margin of safety, if mean tensile
stress of 250 N/mm2 and standard deviation of 65 N/mm2 acts on it?
a. 23.45 N/mm2, 50 N/mm2

b. 50 N/mm2, 82 N/mm2
c. 82 N/mm2, 7.07 N/mm2
d. 7.07 N/mm2, 50 N/mm2
ANSWER: 50 N/mm2, 82 N/mm2

Explanation:
18) What is meant by mean time to failure (MTTF)?


ANSWER: Sum of survival time for number of

components divided by number of failures
Explanation:
19) If a relief valve has reliability of 0.989, how many failures are expected in testing
1000 such relief valves?
a. 111
b. 100
c. 10
d. 11
ANSWER: 11
Explanation:
20) Failure rate for safety valve working for 400 hours is 3 x 10–6 failures/hour. What is
the reliability of safety valve?
a. 0.998
b. 0.989
c. 0.888
d. 0.899
ANSWER: 0.998
Explanation:
21) A piston made of gray cast iron has piston head thickness of 20 mm. What will be
thickness of piston barrel under piston rings if it has allowable tensile stress of 30
N/mm2? ( Bore diameter = 50 mm & Pmax =15 N/mm2)
a. 10 mm
b. 20 mm
c. 30 mm
d. Insufficient data
ANSWER: 20 mm
Explanation:
22) A piston has allowable tensile stress of 50 N/mm2 and has bore diameter 150 mm.
Considering strength of piston, what will be the thickness of piston head if maximum
pressure of 10 N/mm2 acts on it?
a. 29 mm
b. 35 mm
c. 53 mm
ANSWER: 29 mm
Explanation:
23) What is the function of gudgeon pin?

a. Acts as stiffeners
b. Supports piston head
c. Connects piston to connecting rod

d. All of the above
ANSWER: Connects piston to connecting rod

Explanation:
24) Which of the following parts of piston act as bearing for connecting rod side
thrust?
a. Reinforcing ribs
b. Piston barrel
c. Piston gudgeon
d. Piston skirt
ANSWER: Piston skirt

Explanation:
25) Single cylinder four stroke engine has brake power of 8 kW and brake mean
effective pressure of 0.55 Mpa. What is the length of cylinder which is 1.2 times of bore
diameter? (n = 3000 rpm)
a. 110 mm
b. 103 mm
c. 70 mm
d. 65 mm

ANSWER: 103 mm
Explanation:
26) Which type of formed threads are used for vertical pressure vessels in the pressure

d. All of the above
ANSWER: Torispherical dished head

Explanation:
27) Internal pressure of 2.5 Mpa acts on a pressure vessel of thickness 15 mm and
internal diameter of 1500 mm. What is the stress induced in longitudinal direction?
a. 36.63 N/mm2
b. 59.13 N/mm2
c. 65.62 N/mm2
d. 131.25 N/mm2
ANSWER: 65.62 N/mm2

Explanation:
28) Design pressure for unfired pressure vessels is 1.05 times of _______

ANSWER: maximum working pressure

Explanation:
29) Class 3 pressure vessels having welded joints are __________

ANSWER: not radio-graphed

Explanation:
30) Which type of welded joints are not included in class 3 pressure vessels?

ANSWER: Single full fillet lap joints

Explanation:
31) Which of the following principle recognizes human capabilities and limitations using
design effective handling equipment?
a. Safety principle
b. Obsolescence principle
c. Ecology principle
d. Ergonomic principle
ANSWER: Ergonomic principle

Explanation:
32) What does DFMA stand for?

a. Design for Manual Assembly

b. Design for Manufacture and Assembly
c. Both a. and b.

Explanation:
33) A cylinder made of plain carbon steel has inner diameter 100 mm. What is the
thickness of cylinder if maximum internal pressure of 20 Mpa acts on it? ( σ all = 100
N/mm2 & poisson's ratio = 0.3)
a. 11 mm
b. 15.36 mm
c. 22.32 mm
d. 80 mm
ANSWER: 11 mm
Explanation:
34) The ratio of di / t for thick cylinder is __________

(where di = inner diameter, t = wall thickness)
a. greater than 20
b. less than 20
c. equal to 20
ANSWER: less than 20

Explanation:
35) Which criteria of failure is used to indicate St Venent's theory?

a. Maximum principle stress theory

b. Maximum principle strain theory
ANSWER: Maximum principle strain theory

Explanation:
36) Which of the following parameters are to be considered for parts with non rotational
symmetry in machining process?
a. Avoid long parts

b. Avoid tin parts
c. Machined surfaces should be parallel to each other and with the base
d. All of the above

Explanation:
37) Selection of welding process does not depend on ___________
a. thickness of material
b. availability of equipments
c. economics of the process
ANSWER: none of the above

Explanation:
38) In which of the following designs, system provides its minimum critical function
even after failure of the component?
a. Fail passive design

b. Fail active design
c. Fail operational design
ANSWER: Fail operational design

Explanation:
39) What will be the number of tests required in an experiment to obtain maximum
information based on factorial design if, number of levels and number of factors are 2
and 5 respectively?
a. 32
b. 25
c. 10
ANSWER: 32
Explanation:
40) Which of the following methods is most efficient method of design of experiments
(DOE)?
a. Factorial design
b. Fractional factorial design
c. Taguchi method
d. All of the above
ANSWER: Taguchi method

Explanation:
41) Which of the following belt conveyors have low volume carrying capacity?
a. Flat belts
b. Troughed belts
c. Both a. and b.

ANSWER: Flat belts

Explanation:
42) Which discharge method provides only intermediate discharge for low speed flat
belt conveyor?
a. Plow discharge
b. Tripper discharge
c. Both a. and b.
ANSWER: Plow discharge

Explanation:
43) Mass capacity of a conveyor is 200 ton/hr, if speed of the belt is 4 m/s then what is
the width of horizontal flat belt conveyor carrying the load? (Surcharge factor = 0.075 & ρ
= 1000 kg/m3)
a. 499.23 mm
b. 500.0 mm
c. 533.7 mm
ANSWER: 533.7 mm
Explanation:
44) What is the mass capacity of flat belt conveyor if volumetric capacity 0.55 m3/hr? (ρ
= 1500 kg/m3)
a. 825 tons/hr
b. 825 kg/hr
c. 2.727 tons/hr
d. 2722 kg/hr
ANSWER: 825 kg/hr

Explanation:
45) An inclined belt conveyor is used for loading goods. If speed of the belt having 1500
mm width is 3 m/s then what is the volumetric capacity of the conveyor?
(For 21o, k= 2.35 x 10–4)
a. 1.19 x 10-3 m3/s

b. 1.75 x 10-3 m3/s
c. 1.5 x 10-3 m3/s
d. 2.5 x 10-3 m3/s
ANSWER: 1.19 x 10-3 m3/s

Explanation:
46) A machine tool has minimum speed of 100 r.p.m. How many speed steps are
required by it to achieve speed of 200 rpm? (Geometric progression ratio = 1.06)
a. 11
b. 12
c. 13
d. 14
ANSWER: 12
Explanation:
47) Maximum and minimum diameter of a shaft to be machined is 100 mm and 80 mm

a. 120 r.p.m
b. 127 r.p.m
c. 160 r.p.m.
d. 636 r.p.m.
ANSWER: 160 r.p.m.

Explanation:
48) Economic cutting speed is minimum if geometric ratio is _________
a. minimum
b. maximum
c. equal to economic cutting speed
ANSWER: minimum
Explanation:
49) What is the geometric progression ratio if maximum and minimum spindle speeds
are 500 r.p.m and 300 r.p.m respectively? (Number of speed steps = 7)
a. 0.91
b. 1.5
c. 1.08
d. 2.0
ANSWER: 1.08
Explanation:
50) What is the maximum percentage loss of economic cutting speed if geometric
progression ratio = 1.06 ?
a. 17.0 %
b. 11.5 %
c. 5.7 %
d. 2.9 %
ANSWER: 2.9 %
Explanation:
51) What is meant by hazard rate?

a. Number of failures per unit time per number of items when exposed for same time
b. Probability of test specimen fails between time t1 and t1 + dt1 which survives for time t1
c. Both a. and b.

Explanation:
52) What is the standard deviation of clearance population for the diameter of shaft and
hole assembly specified below?
a. 0.097 mm
b. 0.059 mm
c. 0.036 mm
d. 0.390 mm
ANSWER: 0.097 mm
Explanation:
53) Which of the following curves have the mean value equal to zero in the graph of

c. Both a. and b.
ANSWER: Standard normal distribution curve

Explanation:
54) What is the relation between standard deviation(σ) and arithmetic mean (μ) to
determine coefficient of variation (C)?
a. C = σ + μ
b. C = σ – μ
c. C = σ / μ
d. C = σ x μ
ANSWER: C = σ / μ
Explanation:
55) Assignable causes are caused due to changes in _________

b. material
d. all of the above
ANSWER: all of the above

Explanation:
56) Which stress is induced in cylinder wall due to side thrust of the piston?
a. Axial stress
b. Circumferential stress
c. Longitudinal stress
d. Bending stress
ANSWER: Bending stress

Explanation:
57) Thermal stress in cylinder liners can be reduced by _______
a. increasing the wall thickness of cylinder liner

b. increasing velocity of flowing water through jacket
c. both a. and b.
ANSWER: increasing velocity of flowing water through

jacket
Explanation:
58) Which of the following materials are used for cylinder liners?
a. Alloy cast iron

b. Grey cast iron
c. Both a. and b.

Explanation:
59) Which type of cylinder liners are used in engines having bore diameter more than
125 mm?
a. Dry liners
b. Wet liners
c. Both a. and b.
ANSWER: Wet liners

Explanation:
60) Which of the following statements is/are false if separate cylinder liner is pressed
inside the cylinder of large engines?
a. Easy replacement of liner in case of wear and tear

b. Cheap grade material cannot be used for jacket
c. Liner is to be made of heat resistant cast iron
ANSWER: Cheap grade material cannot be used for

jacket
Explanation:
61) What does Ψ mean in Lagrange's equation (LE = U + λΨ)?

a. Lagrange's multipliers
b. Functional constraints
c. Multiple variable objective

ANSWER: Functional constraints

Explanation:
62) The limit equation st = Sut / Nf is expressed as _________

a. loose limit equation

b. rigid limit equation
c. rigid on one side and loose on other side
ANSWER: rigid limit equation

Explanation:
63) Which of the following is not expressed by primary design equation?

a. Functional parameters
b. Material parameters
c. Geometrical parameters
ANSWER: None of the above

Explanation:
64) In unfired pressure vessels, category A consists of _________

ANSWER: longitudinal welded joints

Explanation:
65) Which of the following is not an unfired pressure vessel?

a. Heat exchanger
b. Storage vessels
c. Steam boilers
ANSWER: Steam boilers

Explanation:
66) What is the weld joint efficiency if pressure vessel is fabricated with single full fillet
lap joint?
a. 1.0
b. 0.55
c. 0.65
d. 0.85
ANSWER: 0.55
Explanation:
67) A cylindrical pressure vessel is subjected to an internal pressure of 3 Mpa on

internal diameter of 1000 mm. The vessel is fabricated with single weld butt joint with
back strip and is not radio-graphed. What is the thickness of flat head, if head made of
alloy steel has an ultimate tensile strength of 400 N/mm2 ? (corrosion allowance = 2)
a. 110 mm
b. 120 mm
c. 150.23 mm
d. 152.13 mm
ANSWER: 110 mm
Explanation:
68) A cylindrical pressure vessel is subjected to operating pressure of 0.55 Mpa and
a. 6.5 mm
b. 7 mm
c. 9 mm
d. 9.5 mm
ANSWER: 9 mm
Explanation:
69) Which equation is used to determine wall thickness for brittle materials?
a. Brinie's equation
b. Claviro's equation
c. Lame's equation
d. All of the above
ANSWER: Lame's equation

Explanation:
70) Claviro's equation is applicable to cylinders with _______

a. close ends
b. open ends
c. both a. and b.

ANSWER: close ends

Explanation:
71) Due to which effect, compressive residual stress of strain-hardening model is

smaller than elastic-perfectly plastic model?
a. Seeback effect
b. Peltier effect
c. Bauschinger effect
ANSWER: Bauschinger effect

Explanation:
72) Why is autofrettage process used in pressure vessels?


c. To introduce compressive residual stress in them
d. All of the above

Explanation:
73) Which equation is used to calculate thickness of an alloy steel cylinder with open
ends?
a. Clavarino's equation
b. Birnie's equation
c. Lame's equation
ANSWER: Birnie's equation

Explanation:
1) Internal pressure of 2.5 Mpa acts on a pressure vessel of thickness 15 mm and

internal diameter of 1500 mm. What is the stress induced in longitudinal direction?
a. 36.63 N/mm2
b. 59.13 N/mm2
c. 65.62 N/mm2
d. 131.25 N/mm2
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 65.62 N/mm2

Explanation:
2) Which type of formed threads are used for vertical pressure vessels in the pressure

d. All of the above
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Torispherical dished head

Explanation:
3) Design pressure for unfired pressure vessels is 1.05 times of _______

Answer Explanation
ANSWER: maximum working pressure

Explanation:
4) Class 3 pressure vessels having welded joints are __________
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: not radio-graphed

Explanation:
5) Which type of welded joints are not included in class 3 pressure vessels?
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Single full fillet lap joints

Explanation:
6) In unfired pressure vessels, category A consists of _________

Answer Explanation
ANSWER: longitudinal welded joints

Explanation:
7) Which of the following is not an unfired pressure vessel?
a. Heat exchanger
b. Storage vessels
c. Steam boilers
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Steam boilers

Explanation:
8) What is the weld joint efficiency if pressure vessel is fabricated with single full fillet
lap joint?
a. 1.0
b. 0.55
c. 0.65
d. 0.85
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 0.55
Explanation:
9) A cylindrical pressure vessel is subjected to an internal pressure of 3 Mpa on internal

diameter of 1000 mm. The vessel is fabricated with single weld butt joint with back strip
and is not radio-graphed. What is the thickness of flat head, if head made of alloy steel
has an ultimate tensile strength of 400 N/mm2 ? (corrosion allowance = 2)
a. 110 mm
b. 120 mm
c. 150.23 mm
d. 152.13 mm
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 110 mm
Explanation:
10) A cylindrical pressure vessel is subjected to operating pressure of 0.55 Mpa and
a. 6.5 mm
b. 7 mm
c. 9 mm
d. 9.5 mm
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 9 mm
Explanation:
) Which of the following principle recognizes human capabilities and limitations using
design effective handling equipment?
a. Safety principle
b. Obsolescence principle
c. Ecology principle
d. Ergonomic principle
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Ergonomic principle

Explanation:
2) What does DFMA stand for?
a. Design for Manual Assembly

b. Design for Manufacture and Assembly
c. Both a. and b.
Answer Explanation

Explanation:
3) A cylinder made of plain carbon steel has inner diameter 100 mm. What is the
thickness of cylinder if maximum internal pressure of 20 Mpa acts on it? ( σ all = 100
N/mm2 & poisson's ratio = 0.3)
a. 11 mm
b. 15.36 mm
c. 22.32 mm
d. 80 mm
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 11 mm
Explanation:
4) The ratio of di / t for thick cylinder is __________

(where di = inner diameter, t = wall thickness)
a. greater than 20
b. less than 20
c. equal to 20
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: less than 20

Explanation:
5) Which criteria of failure is used to indicate St Venent's theory?
a. Maximum principle stress theory

b. Maximum principle strain theory
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Maximum principle strain theory
Explanation:
6) Which equation is used to determine wall thickness for brittle materials?
a. Brinie's equation
b. Claviro's equation
c. Lame's equation
d. All of the above
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Lame's equation

Explanation:
7) Claviro's equation is applicable to cylinders with _______
a. close ends
b. open ends
c. both a. and b.
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: close ends

Explanation:
8) Due to which effect, compressive residual stress of strain-hardening model is smaller

than elastic-perfectly plastic model?
a. Seeback effect
b. Peltier effect
c. Bauschinger effect
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Bauschinger effect

Explanation:
9) Why is autofrettage process used in pressure vessels?

c. To introduce compressive residual stress in them
d. All of the above
Answer Explanation

Explanation:
10) Which equation is used to calculate thickness of an alloy steel cylinder with open
ends?
a. Clavarino's equation
b. Birnie's equation
c. Lame's equation
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Birnie's equation

Explanation:
1) Which of the following is a property of bulk load?

a. Hardness
b. Cake forming tendency
c. Suspension part
d. Weight
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Cake forming tendency

Explanation:
2) Which of the following is not a hoisting equipment with lifting gear?
a. Cage elevators
b. Jib cranes
c. Pulleys
d. Troughed belts
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Troughed belts

Explanation:
3) What are bulk loads?
a. Lump of material
b. Single rigid mass
c. Homogeneous particles
d. Heterogeneous particles
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Single rigid mass

Explanation:
4) Which belt conveyor prevents sliding down of material at an inclination of 55 o with
horizontal?
a. Flat belt conveyor

b. Troughed belt conveyor
c. Blanket belt conveyor
d. Woven wire belt conveyors
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Blanket belt conveyor

Explanation:
5) Which of the following statements is false for troughed belt conveyors?

3. Depth of trough decreases with increasing number of idlers
a. 1 and 2
b. 2 and 3
c. 3 and 4
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 3 and 4
Explanation:
6) Which of the following belt conveyors have low volume carrying capacity?
a. Flat belts
b. Troughed belts
c. Both a. and b.
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Flat belts

Explanation:
7) Which discharge method provides only intermediate discharge for low speed flat belt
conveyor?
a. Plow discharge
b. Tripper discharge
c. Both a. and b.
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Plow discharge

Explanation:
8) Mass capacity of a conveyor is 200 ton/hr, if speed of the belt is 4 m/s then what is
the width of horizontal flat belt conveyor carrying the load? (Surcharge factor = 0.075 & ρ
= 1000 kg/m3)
a. 499.23 mm
b. 500.0 mm
c. 533.7 mm
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 533.7 mm
Explanation:
9) What is the mass capacity of flat belt conveyor if volumetric capacity 0.55 m 3/hr? (ρ =
1500 kg/m3)
a. 825 tons/hr
b. 825 kg/hr
c. 2.727 tons/hr
d. 2722 kg/hr
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 825 kg/hr

Explanation:
10) An inclined belt conveyor is used for loading goods. If speed of the belt having 1500
mm width is 3 m/s then what is the volumetric capacity of the conveyor?
(For 21o, k= 2.35 x 10–4)
a. 1.19 x 10-3 m3/s

b. 1.75 x 10-3 m3/s
c. 1.5 x 10-3 m3/s
d. 2.5 x 10-3 m3/s
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 1.19 x 10-3 m3/s

Explanation:
1) What causes infant mortality in mechanical equipments?
a. Design errors
d. All of the above
Answer Explanation
Explanation:
2) A plain carbon steel has mean yield strength of 300 N/mm2 and standard deviation of
50 N/mm2. What is the mean and standard deviation of margin of safety, if mean tensile
stress of 250 N/mm2 and standard deviation of 65 N/mm2 acts on it?
a. 23.45 N/mm2, 50 N/mm2

b. 50 N/mm2, 82 N/mm2
c. 82 N/mm2, 7.07 N/mm2
d. 7.07 N/mm2, 50 N/mm2
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 50 N/mm2, 82 N/mm2

Explanation:
3) What is meant by mean time to failure (MTTF)?

Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Sum of survival time for number of

components divided by number of failures
Explanation:
4) If a relief valve has reliability of 0.989, how many failures are expected in testing 1000
such relief valves?
a. 111
b. 100
c. 10
d. 11
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 11
Explanation:
5) Failure rate for safety valve working for 400 hours is 3 x 10–6 failures/hour. What is
the reliability of safety valve?
a. 0.998
b. 0.989
c. 0.888
d. 0.899
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 0.998
Explanation:
6) What is meant by hazard rate?
a. Number of failures per unit time per number of items when exposed for same time
b. Probability of test specimen fails between time t1 and t1 + dt1 which survives for time t1
c. Both a. and b.
Answer Explanation

Explanation:
7) What is the standard deviation of clearance population for the diameter of shaft and
hole assembly specified below?
a. 0.097 mm
b. 0.059 mm
c. 0.036 mm
d. 0.390 mm
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 0.097 mm
Explanation:
8) Which of the following curves have the mean value equal to zero in the graph of

c. Both a. and b.
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Standard normal distribution curve

Explanation:
9) What is the relation between standard deviation(σ) and arithmetic mean (μ) to
determine coefficient of variation (C)?
a. C = σ + μ
b. C = σ – μ
c. C = σ / μ
d. C = σ x μ
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: C = σ / μ
Explanation:
10) Assignable causes are caused due to changes in _________
b. material
d. all of the above
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: all of the above

Explanation:
1) A machine tool has minimum speed of 100 r.p.m. How many speed steps are required
by it to achieve speed of 200 rpm? (Geometric progression ratio = 1.06)
a. 11
b. 12
c. 13
d. 14
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 12
Explanation:
2) What is the maximum percentage loss of economic cutting speed if geometric

progression ratio = 1.06 ?
a. 17.0 %
b. 11.5 %
c. 5.7 %
d. 2.9 %
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 2.9 %
Explanation:
3) Diameter range is high in geometric progression due to _________ spindle speed.
a. low
b. high
c. constant
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: low
Explanation:
4) What is harmonic progression?

Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Difference between reciprocal of two successive

Explanation:
5) Ratio of two spindle speeds is constant in _________ progression.
a. Arithmetic
b. Geometric
c. Harmonic
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Geometric
Explanation:
6) What is the purpose of using a gear box?
a. To increase torque
b. To increase speed
c. Converts single input speed into multiple output speeds
d. All of the above
Answer Explanation

Explanation:
7) Which of the following statements is true for structure/speed diagrams?
a. Structure diagrams gives range ratio of spindle speeds

b. Speed diagrams do not give range ratio of spindle speeds
c. Speed diagrams consider motor speed
d. All of the above
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: Speed diagrams consider motor speed

Explanation:
8) Maximum and minimum diameter of a shaft to be machined is 100 mm and 80 mm

a. 120 r.p.m
b. 127 r.p.m
c. 160 r.p.m.
d. 636 r.p.m.
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 160 r.p.m.

Explanation:
9) Economic cutting speed is minimum if geometric ratio is _________
a. minimum
b. maximum
c. equal to economic cutting speed
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: minimum
Explanation:
10) What is the geometric progression ratio if maximum and minimum spindle speeds
are 500 r.p.m and 300 r.p.m respectively? (Number of speed steps = 7)
a. 0.91
b. 1.5
c. 1.08
d. 2.0
Answer Explanation
ANSWER: 1.08
Explanation:
1. Which of the following application is a belt conveyor used for?
a) Material transportation over long distances
b) Material transportation within premises
c) Material transportation for processing
d) All of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Belt conveyors are used for all of the mentioned uses.
2. Statement 1: It is generally not possible to change the direction of flow with belt
conveyors.
Statement 2: If belt conveyors are to be used in the bent position, slat belts are used.
a) True, False
b) True, True
c) False, False
d) False, True
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: It is generally not possible to change the direction of flow with belt
conveyors. If belt conveyors are to be used in the bent position, slat belts are used.
3. Slat belts are made up of_____
a) Wood
b) Plastic
c) Metal
d) Any of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Slat belts can be made up of any of the mentioned.
4. Statement 1: Belt conveyors cannot be used in the inclined position.
Statement 2: Screw conveyors can carry more amount of load compared to belt
conveyors.
a) True, False
b) True, True
c) False, False
d) False, True
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Belt conveyors can be used in an inclined position. Belt conveyors can
carry more amount of load compared to screw conveyors. As high as 5000 tons per
hour as compared to screw conveyors which carry 4.7 m 3/minute.
5. In the specifications of a screw conveyor, the shaft length is shorter than the flight
length.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: In the specifications of a screw conveyor, the shaft length is more than
the flight length. The shaft length covers the length of the entire shaft whereas the
flight length only covers the length of the first screw (starting from one end) to the last
screw.
6. Statement 1: Chain drive rollers move faster than belt driven rollers.
Statement 2: Screw conveyors are used in the feeding of raw materials like wheat or
chilly into the grinding unit to make a powder out of it.
a) True, False
b) True, True
c) False, False
d) False, True
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Chain drive rollers move faster than belt driven rollers. Screw conveyors
are used in the feeding of raw materials like wheat or chilly into the grinding unit to
make a powder out of it.
7. Pneumatic conveying is done under which of the mentioned conditions?
a) High pressure
b) Vacuum
c) Fluidization
d) Any of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Pneumatic conveying can be done under any of the mentioned
conditions.
8. What is the flow rate of materials in a bucket conveyor dependent on?
a) Shape of the buckets
b) Spacing of the buckets
c) Speed of the conveyor
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: All of the mentioned parameters affect the flow rate of materials in a
bucket conveyor.
9. Statement 1: Bucket conveyors can be divided into close and spaced bucket
conveyors.
Statement 2: Bucket conveyors can be divided into centrifugal and positive discharge
bucket conveyors.
a) True, False
b) True, True
c) False, False
d) False, True
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Bucket conveyors can be divided both the ways based on different
parameters.
10. Which of the following is NOT an advantage of mechanical transportation?
a) Transportation is economical and quick
b) Handling is contamination free
c) No human injury
d) None of the mentioned
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Given are all advantages of mechanical transportation.
11. Fork-lift trolleys are a combination of chain hoists and interlock transfer cranes.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Interlock transfer cranes are a combination of chain hoists and fork-lift
trolleys.
12. In food industry, the animal processing sector requires mechanical transportation to
minimize human intervention and to maintain hygiene.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: In food industry, the animal processing sector requires mechanical
transportation to minimize human intervention and to maintain hygiene.
13. Statement 1: Belt and screw conveyors are in all processing units to transport the
final packed cartons.
Statement 2: The feeding in most processing units is done by screw feeders or
mechanical/oscillatory feeders.
a) True, False
b) True, True
c) False, False
d) False, True
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Belt and screw conveyors are in all processing units to transport the final
packed cartons. The feeding in most processing units is done by screw feeders or
mechanical/oscillatory feeders.
14. Which of the following does NOT include the application of material handling and
transportation in food processing?
a) Fruits and vegetables processing
b) Cereals and pulses processing
c) Spices and condiments processing
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: All of the mentioned include the application of material handling and
transportation in food processing.
15. Statement 1: Cranes and hoists have an incline up and down option.
Statement 2: Trucks can be used for continuous operations.
a) True, False
b) True, True
c) False, False
d) False, True
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Cranes and hoists do not have an incline up and down option. Trucks
can only be used for intermittent operations.
This set of Machine Design Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Belt Constructions”.
1. The layer of a belt is generally called as

a) Ply
b) Layer
c) Segment
d) Sediment
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Terminology.
2. Velocity ratio for chain drive is lesser than that for belts.
a) Yes
b) No
c) In some cases
d) Can’t be determined
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Velocity ratio for chain drives is about 15:1 while for belts it is around 7:1.
3. Fabric rubber belts are not widely used as they can’t be operated at high speeds.
a) They can’t be used at velocities 50m/s
b) They can be used at high velocities
c) Limiting velocity is 20m/s
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: These belts can be operated at 300m/s.
4. Power transmitting capacity of V belts is more than that of flat belt.
a) Yes
b) No
c) Only for V angle > 15
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Coefficient of friction is 2.92times of flat belts in V belts for identical
materials.
5. The optimum velocity of the belt for maximum transmission is given by √P/6m.
a) Yes
b) No, by replacing 6 by 3
c) Replacing 6 by 9
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: It is given by √P/3m.
6. Creep is the slight absolute motion of the belt as it passes over the pulley.
a) Yes
b) No, it is a relative motion
c) None of the listed
d) It is absolute motion
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: It is a relative and not absolute motion.
7. In horizontal belt, the loose side is generally kept on the bottom.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Loose side is kept on the top so that arc of contact increases and hence
efficiency of the drive increases.
8. Vertical drives are preferred over horizontal.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: In vertical drive, gravitational force on the belt causes slip which reduces
the efficiency.
9. The law of belting states that the centreline of the belt when it approaches a pulley
must not lie in the midplane of the pulley.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The centreline must lie in the midplane.
10. It is possible to use the belting reverse direction without violating the law of belting.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Law of belting is violated if belt is used in reverse direction.
11. A shorter centre distance is always preferred in belt drives.
a) Yes due to stability
b) No due to stability
c) Yes due to instability
d) No due to instability
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: It is more stable and compact.
12. If velocity ratio is less than 3, then centre distance is given by D+.5d.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: It is given by D+1.5d.
13. If velocity ratio is more than 3, then centre distance is given by 2D.
a) By 3D
b) By D
c) By 4D
d) By 5D
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: It is given by D.
14. Is it possible to reduce the centre distance as much as we want?
a) Yes power transmission increases
b) No
c) Can’t be cited
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: It depends on physical dimension and the minimum angle of wrap
required to transfer the required power.
15. The diameter of the shorter pulley in leather belt drive is 265mm. It is rotating at
1440 rpm. Calculate the velocity of the belt.
a) 25m/s
b) 20m/s
c) 30m/s
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: v=πdn/60×1000.
This set of Machine Design Questions for campus interviews focuses on “Belt
Construction II & V Belts”.
1. Calculate the angle of wrap if diameter of the two pulleys are 550mm and 300mm.
Also the centre distance is 2800mm.
a) 174.8⁰
b) 167.8⁰
c) 159.3⁰
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: ὰ=180 – 2sin¯¹(D-d/2C).
2. Calculate the arc of contact if diameter of the two pulleys are 550mm and 300mm.
Also the centre distance is 2800mm.
a) 1.04
b) 1.03
c) 1.01
d) 1.02
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: ὰ=180 – 2sin¯¹(D-d/2C). Factor=1+ (1.04-1)(180-174.8)/(180-170).
3. Calculate the belt length if diameter of the two pulleys are 550mm and 300mm. Also
the centre distance is 2800mm.
a) 6.5m
b) 4.66m
c) 6.94m
d) 5.26m
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: L=2C + π(D+d)/2 + (D-d)²/4C.
4. Crowns are never mounted on the pulley.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Crowns are used to avoid slip in case of misalignment or non-parallelism.
5. In a cast iron pulley minor axis is generally kept in the plane of rotation.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Keeping minor axis in plane of rotation increases the cross section.
6. The number of V belts required for a given application are given by (ignoring
correction factor for arc of contact and belt length) Transmitted power/kW rating of single
belt x Industrial Service Factor.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: It is given by Transmitted power x Industrial Service Factor /kW rating of
single belt.
7. The pitch diameter of bigger pulley D in terms of small diameter d is given by
a) dx[speed of smaller pulley/speed of bigger pulley].
b) dx[speed of bigger pulley/speed of smaller pulley].
c) d
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Product of diameter and speed of pulley is constant.
8. If maximum tension in the belt is 900N and allowable belt load is 500N. Calculate the
number of belts required to transmit power.
a) 2
b) 3
c) 4
d) 5
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: No of belts=900/500.
9. The belt tension is maximum when velocity of belt is 0.
a) It is max at v=infinity
b) True
c) It is velocity independent
d) It has a constant value
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: P₁-mv²/P₂-mv²=e^(fa/sinθ/2). Hence belt tension is maximum when v=0.
10. If belt tension in the two sides is 730N and 140N and belt is moving with a velocity of
10m/s, calculate the power transmitted.
a) 4.5kW
b) 5.9kW
c) 6.2kW
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Power=(P₁-P₂)xv.
11. If tensions in the belt are P₁ and P₂, then find P₁-mv²/P₂-mv². Contact angle for
smaller pulley is 156⁰, Groove angle is 36⁰ and coefficient of friction is 0.2.
a) 6.21
b) 5.83
c) 4.66
d) 5.36
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: P₁-mv²/P₂-mv²=e^(fὰ/sinθ/2)
“Belt Tensioning Methods”.
1. Is it possible to remove the slack from the belt?

a) Yes
b) No
c) It can be done but at the cost of strength
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: A short length of belt is cut to remove slack provided it is not an endless
belt.
2. A ribbed V belt is a negative drive.
a) Yes
b) No, it’s a positive drive
c) Zero drive
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: It is a positive drive.
3. The cross section of V belt consist of rubber backing to help engagement of teeth with
sprocket.
a) Yes
b) No, it is used for protection
c) There is no rubber packing
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: It is used for protecting the load carrying tension members.
4. Ribbed V belt is not generally recommended as the output speed keeps fluctuating.
a) True
b) No, it is generally recommended
c) No variation in output speeds
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: There is no variation in output speed in case of ribbed V belts.
5. The ribbed V belts don’t require any type of lubrication like V belts.
a) True
b) Intense lubrication is required
c) No belts require any lubrication
d) Ribbed V belts can be operated with or without lubrication
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Ribbed V belts are free from lubrication problem.
6. Ribbed V belts are very stable and can tolerate some misalignment without any
malfunctioning.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Ribbed V belts are very sensitive.
7. Toothed belt is preferred over ribbed V belt.
a) Yes
b) No
c) They both imply to same thing
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Toothed belt and ribbed V belt is same thing.
8. The idler pulley increases the power transmitting capacity of the belt drive.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Idler pulley increases the arc of contact which further increases the
power transmitting capacity.
9. Adjusting screw can be used for adjusting belt tension?
a) Yes
b) No
c) Distance can never be changed
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Adjusting screw varies the distance between electric motor and bedplate.
“Chain Drives”.
1. A chain drive consist of an endless chain wrapped around two sprockets.

a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: This is the basic definition of chain drive.
2. The chain drive is same as gear drive.
a) Yes
b) No, it is intermediate between belt and gear drive
c) It is superior to gear drive
d) It is inferior to gear drive
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Chain drive is intermediate between belt drive and gear drive.
3. Gear drives are preferred over chain drives for long centre distances.
a) Yes
b) No, they require additional idle gears.
c) No idler gears are required
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Gear drive will require additional idler gears.
4. Belt drives have compact construction as compared to chain drives.
a) Yes
b) No, chain drives have compact construction
c) Both have same construction
d) Can’t be cited
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Chain drives have overall small dimensions and hence resulting in
compact constructions.
5. The maximum achievable efficiency of the chain drives is about 80%.
a) It is about 50%
b) It is about 96-98%
c) It is about 75%
d) It is always <40%
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Maximum achievable efficiency is around 96-98%.
6. Chain drives suffer from wear problems.
a) Yes, chain might leave the sprocket
b) No, there is no wear problem
c) Wear is insignificant in chain drives
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Wear increases pitch of the chain which leads to chain leaving the
sprocket.
7. For non-parallel shafts, chain drives are highly recommended.
a) True
b) Gear drive is preferred
c) Depends on the transmission ratio
d) Can’t be stated
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Bevel or worm gears can be used in this case. Chain drives isn’t suitable
for this application.
8. The velocity of the chain is always constant in case of chain drive.
a) Yes
b) No, it can never be constant
c) It is constant above a particular value
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Velocity isn’t constant in chain drive which results in non-uniform speed
of the driven shaft.
9. Chain drives require little or no maintenance and creates no noise.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Chain drives require lubrication at proper periods and also generates
noise.
10. In roller chains, there is sliding friction between roller and sprocket teeth.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Rollers are freely fitted on the bushes and during engagement turn with
teeth. This results in rolling friction.
11. In the designation ‘04B’, pitch of the chain is?
a) 12.7mm
b) 6.35mm
c) 4mm
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Pitch=[04/16]x25.4mm.
12. The designation ‘04B’ is as per ANSI series.
a) Yes
b) No, it is as par British standards
c) One digit is missing
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The letter B indicates British Standard Series.
13. Wear ultimately results in ride in of the chain on sprocket teeth.
a) True
b) Ride out
c) Ride up
d) Ride down
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Wear causes ride out of chain.
14. Galling is a stick slip phenomenon.
a) True
b) No, it is only a stick phenomenon
c) No, it is only a slip phenomenon
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: During high tension, welds are formed at the high spot of contacting area
which are subsequently broken due to relative motion
This set of Machine Design aptitude tests focuses on “Design of Chain Drive”.
1. A gear meshes with another gear and a sprocket meshes with another sprocket.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: A sprocket meshes with with an intermediate link which further meshes
with another sprocket.
2. The number of links of the chain should be always ______
a) Odd
b) Even
c) Multiple of 3
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The odd number of teeth are meshed with even number of links.
3. In chain drives, vertical drives are generally avoided.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Sag causes the chain to leave the profile of the teeth at lower side.
4. Sum of number of links and number of teeth of the sprocket is _____
a) Odd
b) Even
c) Odd or Even
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Number of links are even while number of teeth on the sprocket are odd.
5. The driving sprocket has 19 teeth and rotates at 1100rpm. The pitch of the chain is
18mm. Calculate the velocity of the chain.
a) 5.6m/s
b) 6.3m/s
c) 5.8m/s
d) 5.1m/s
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: v=zpn/60×1000.
6. Calculate the pitch circle diameter of the driving pulley is pitch is given as 18mm and
sprocket has 19 teeth.
a) 112.33mm
b) 109.36mm
c) 102.66mm
d) 105.33mm
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: D=p/sin(180/z).
7. Driving and driven pulleys are rotating at 1000rpm and 500rpm. If number of teeth on
driving sprocket are 20, find number of teeth in the driven sprocket.
a) 41
b) 40
c) 10
d) 11
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: n₁z₁=n₂z₂.
8. If centre distance for a chain drive is 750mm with number of teeth on the driving and
driven sprockets being 40 and 20 respectively, then calculate the number of links
required. Given: Pitch is taken as 19mm.
a) 112
b) 110
c) 111
d) 109
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: 2(a/p) + (z₁+z₂)/2 +( z₂- z₁/2π)²xp/a.
9. In silent chain sprocket teeth have a rectangular profile.
a) Yes rectangular
b) No trapezoidal
c) No circular
d) No hyperbolic
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: They have a trapezoidal profile.
10. Roller chains have less reliability as compared to roller chains.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Silent chains have laminated structure and hence are more reliable
his set of Machine Design Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs) focuses on
“Cylinder Pressure Vessels”.
1. A cylinder is considered thin when the ratio of inner diameter to wall thickness is more
than 5.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: A cylinder is considered thin when the ratio of inner diameter to wall
thickness is more than 15.
2. Tangential stress in a cylinder is given by [symbols have their usual meanings].
a) PD/2t
b) 2PD/t
c) PD/4t
d) 4PD/t
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Considering equilibrium in half portion of cylinder of unit length, DP=2σt.
3. Longitudinal stress in a cylinder is given by [symbols have their usual meanings].
a) PD/2t
b) 2PD/t
c) PD/4t
d) 4PD/t
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Considering equilibrium PxπD²/4=σxπDt.
4. A seamless cylinder of storage capacity of 0.03mᵌis subjected to an internal pressure
of 21MPa. The ultimate strength of material of cylinder is 350N/mm².Determine the
length of the cylinder if it is twice the diameter of the cylinder.
a) 540mm
b) 270mm
c) 400mm
d) 350mm
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: 0.03=πd²L/4 and L=2d.
5. A seamless cylinder of storage capacity of 0.03mᵌis subjected to an internal pressure
of 21MPa. The ultimate strength of material of cylinder is 350N/mm².Determine the
thickness of the cylinder if it is twice the diameter of the cylinder.
a) 12mm
b) 4mm
c) 8mm
d) 16mm
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: t=PD/2σ.
6. Cylinder having inner diameter to wall thickness ratio less than 15 are
a) Thin cylinders
b) Thick Cylinders
c) Moderate cylinders
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Smaller dia to thickness ratio implies more thickness and hence these
are classified under thick cylinder.
7. Lame’s equation used to find the thickness of the cylinder is based on maximum strain
failure.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: It is based on maximum principal stress theory.
8. Lame’s equation is generally used for ductile materials.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Lame’s equation is used to determine thickness of the brittle as it used
principal stress theory.
9. The piston rod of a hydraulic cylinder exerts an operating force of 10kN. The
allowable stress in the cylinder is 45N/mm². Calculate the thickness of the cylinder using
Lame’s equation. Diameter of the cylinder is 40mm and pressure in cylinder is 10MPa.
a) 2.05mm
b) 4.2mm
c) 5.07mm
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: t=D/2[√[σ+ P /σ-P] -1 ].
10. The piston rod of a hydraulic cylinder exerts an operating force of 10kN. The
allowable stress in the cylinder is 70N/mm². Calculate the thickness of the cylinder using
Clavarinoe’s equation. Diameter of the cylinder is 240mm.μ=0.3 and pressure in cylinder
is 15MPa.
a) 35mm
b) 30mm
c) 27mm
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: t=D/2[√[σ+(1-2μ) P /σ-(1+μ)P] -1 ].
“Compound Cylinders & Gaskets”.
1. Autofrettage is beneficial for the high pressure cylinder.

a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: It increases pressure capacity of the cylinder and reduces compressive
stresses.
2. Autogreggate is a process of ___ stressing the cylinder.
a) Pre
b) Post
c) Over
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: It is a pre stressing phenomenon to improve pressure capacity.
3. Can we pre-stress the cylinder by subjecting cylindrical portion near inner diameter in
plastic range and outer diameter is still in the elastic range.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: On releasing the pressure, outer portion contracts exerting pressure on
the inner portion which has undergone permanent deformation. This induces residual
compressive stresses at the inner surface.
4. A compound cylinder consists of
a) 2 cylinders
b) Cylinder and a jacket
c) 2 jackets
d) At least two cylinders
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Inner diameter of jacket increase and outer diameter of cylinder
decreases when the jacket is heated.
5. A high pressure cylinder consists of a steel tube with inner and outer diameters 30
and 60mm respectively. It is jacketed by an outer steel tube, having an outer diameter of
90mm. Maximum principal stress induced is 80N/mm². Calculate the shrinkage pressure.
a) 5.88N/mm²
b) 2.28N/mm²
c) 4.56N/mm²
d) 3.66N/mm²
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: σ=P[D₃²+D₂²]/[D₃²-D₂²] where D₂=40mm and D₃=60mm.
90mm. Maximum principal stress induced is 80N/mm². Calculate the interference
[E=210kN/mm²].
a) 2.8mm
b) 4.6mm
c) 5.4mm
d) 4.8mm
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Δ=PD₂[2D₂²(D₃²-D₁²)] / Ex[(D₃²-D₂²)(D₂²-D₁²)].
90mm. Maximum principal stress induced is 80N/mm². Calculate the radial stresses due
to shrink shift in jacket.
a) +2.56[(45/r) ² – 1]
b) 1.824[(45/r) ² – 1]
c) -1.824[(45/r) ² – 1]
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: σ(r)=-PD₂²[D₃²/4r² – 1]/ [D₃²-D₂²].
90mm. Maximum principal stress induced is 80N/mm². Calculate the tangential stresses
due to shrink shift in jacket.
a) +2.56[(45/r) ² – 1]
b) 1.824[(45/r) ² – 1]
c) -1.824[(45/r) ² – 1]
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: σ(t)=+PD₂²[D₃²/4r² – 1]/ [D₃²-D₂²].
90mm. Maximum principal stress induced is 80N/mm². Calculate the radial stress due to
shrink shift in inner tube.
a) +3.04[1-(15/r) ²]
b) -3.04[1-(15/r) ²]
c) -3.04[1-(10/r) ²]
d) +3.04[1-(10/r) ²]
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: σ(r)= σ(r)=-PD₂²[1-D₁²/4r² ]/ [D₂²-D₁²].
90mm. Maximum principal stress induced is 80N/mm². Calculate the tangential stress
due to shrink shift in inner tube.
a) +3.04[1+ (15/r) ²]
b) -3.04[1+ (15/r) ²]
c) -3.04[1-(10/r) ²]
d) +3.04[1-(10/r) ²]
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: σ(r)= σ(r)=-PD₂²[1+D₁²/4r² ]/ [D₂²-D₁²].
90mm. Maximum principal stress induced is 80N/mm². In service the cylinder is further
subjected to an internal pressure of 25MPa. Calculate the radial stress in compound
cylinder.
a) -3.75[(45/r) ² – 1]
b) +3.75[(45/r) ² – 1]
c) -3.75[(45/r) ² -+1]
d) +3.75[(45/r) ² +1]
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: σ(r)=-PD₁²[D₃²/4r² – 1]/ [D₃²-D₁²]. Here P=30.
90mm. Maximum principal stress induced is 80N/mm². In service the cylinder is further
subjected to an internal pressure of 25MPa. Calculate the tangential stress in compound
cylinder.
a) -6.75[(45/r) ² + 1]
b) +3.75[(45/r) ² +1]
c) -3.75[(45/r) ² +1]
d) -3.75[(45/r) ² -1]
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: σ(t)=+PD₁²[1+ D₃²/4r² ]/ [D₃²-D₁²]. Here P=30.
13. A gasket is a device to allow easy diffusion of fluids across mating surfaces of a
mechanical assembly.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: A gasket acts as a barrier between two mating surfaces to prevent fluid
flow.
14. Asbestos gaskets like other non-metallic gaskets can be used only up to a
temperature of 70⁰C.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Asbestos can be used upto a temperature of 250⁰C while all other non-
metallic gaskets can be used only upto a temperature of 70⁰C.
This set of Machine Design Puzzles focuses on “Unfired Pressure Vessels,Oil Seals &
Wire Ropes”.
1. An unfired pressure vessel is used to carry stem, gases or fluids at pressure
a) Less than atmospheric pressure
b) Greater than atmospheric pressure
c) Equal to atmospheric pressure
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Terminology.
2. Class 1 pressure vessels are used to contain
a) Lethal substances
b) Light duties applications
c) None of the listed
d) LPG
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Class 1 pressure vessels are used exclusively for lethal substances. LPG
doesn’t fall in the category of lethal substances.
3. An oil seal is a mechanical device made of elastic material which is used to prevent
leakage of fluid between two machine components.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: It is made of elastomer material.
4. Does oil seal consist of any spring in its structure?
a) Yes
b) No
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: It consist of garter spring which exerts a radial pressure on the rotating
shaft and prevents leakage.
5. Which of the following isn’t true about oil seals?
a) Cheap
b) Can be used over a wide range of lubricating oils
c) Can’t tolerate misalignment
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Oil seals can tolerate the misalignment to some extent.
6. If magnitude of contact pressure between sealing lip and rotating shaft is very high
then
a) There is excessive friction
b) High temperature
c) Rapid wear
d) All of the listed
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: With high pressure, friction increases leading to high temperatures and
increasing wear.
7. Wire ropes have
a) High strength to weight ratio
b) Solent operation even at high velocities
c) Greater reliability
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: All of the listed are true for wire ropes.
8. Wire rope specified as 8×10. Calculate the number of strands.
a) 8
b) 10
c) 16
d) 20
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: First number indicates number of strands.
9. Wire rope is specified as 8×10. Calculate the number of steel wires in each strand.
a) 10
b) 20
c) 5
d) 8
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: Second number represents the number of steel wires in each strand.
10. If the wires in the strand are twisted in the same direction as the strands, then rope is
called a _____ lay rope.
a) Lang
b) Regular Lay
c) Ordinary
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The lay of the rope tells the manner in which the wires are helically laid
into strands and strands into rope. Same direction is indicated by Lang’s lay.
11. Which among regular lay and Lang lay are popular?
a) Regular Lay
b) Lang Lay
c) Both are equally used
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: In regular lay ropes, there is a balance resulting from opposite direction
of twisting the strands to that of the wires.
12. In Lang lay ropes, both inner and outer wires are bent on same arc of radius.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: Due to same direction of rotation, outer wires are bent on an arc of larger
radius.
This set of Statistical Quality Control Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs)
focuses on “Acceptance Sampling Introduction – 1”.
1. Which of these is not a correct statement for Acceptance Sampling?

a) Concerned with inspection of products
b) Concerned with decision making regarding products
c) One of the oldest aspects of quality assurance
d) One of the oldest aspects of quality control
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Acceptance sampling is a procedure used in quality assurance, which is
concerned with inspection of manufactured products and the decision making
regarding their state.
2. Which technique was used majorly in 1930s and 1940s for incoming or receiving
inspection?
a) SPC
b) Histogram
c) c-chart
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Acceptance sampling was one of the major components of the field of
statistical quality control, and was used primarily for incoming and receiving
inspection, in the 1930s and 1940s.
3. Decision making regarding the lot disposition is sometimes called _____________
a) Lot rejection
b) Lot acceptation
c) Lot sentencing
d) Lot wording
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: Based on the acceptance sampling information, there is decision making
regarding the lot information. This decision is either to accept or reject the lot. So it is
called, the Lot Sentencing.
4. Acceptance sampling can be used as _____________
a) Incoming inspection activity
b) Outgoing inspection activity
c) Both, incoming and outgoing inspection activity
d) Neither incoming nor outgoing inspection activity
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The Acceptance sampling is customarily thought to be the receiving or
incoming inspection activity, but there are a few cases where it can be used as the
outgoing inspection activity.
5. The purpose of Acceptance sampling is to _____________
a) Sentence lots
b) Estimate lot quality
c) Estimate lot defectives
d) Estimate lot conformity
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The Acceptance sampling procedure is necessarily a lot sentencing
procedure. It cannot be used to estimate the lot quality or lot conformity to the
standard specifications.
6. Which of these procedures doesn’t provide a direct form of quality control?
a) Control charts
c) Design of experiments
d) Cusum charts
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: The Acceptance sampling procedure doesn’t provide a direct form of
quality control. Acceptance sampling simply accepts and rejects lots; even if all lots
are of same quality, some are accepted and some are not.
7. Which of these can be used as an audit tool to ensure the output of a process
conforms to requirements?
a) Cusum charts
b) EWMA charts
c) Acceptance sampling
d) np-charts
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The most effective use of acceptance sampling is not to “inspect quality
into the product”, but rather as an audit tool to ensure that the output is similar to the
required specifications.
8. Which of these is not used in sampling?
a) 0% inspection
b) 100% inspection
c) Acceptance sampling
d) 5% inspection
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: There are generally three techniques used in the inspection of a lot; first
is 0% inspection, second is 100% inspection, and third is acceptance sampling.
9. The no-inspection alternative of sampling is used when ______________
a) The supplier’s process is so good that defective units are never encountered
b) The supplier’s process is so bad that almost every unit is defective
c) The component is extremely critical
d) The component is moderately critical
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: When the supplier’s process is so good that the defective units are never
encountered. This shows that the supplier process capability is quite high.
10. When is the 100% inspection done?
a) The supplier’s process is so good that defective units are never encountered
b) The supplier’s process is so bad that almost every unit is defective
c) The component is extremely critical
d) The component is moderately critical
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The option of full inspection is chosen only when the product component
is extremely critical, and can affect the whole product performance when used
defective, e.g. aircraft nuts and bolts.
11. Acceptance sampling is not used when _____________
a) The test is destructive
b) The cost of 100% inspection is quite high
c) The supplier’s process capability is very high
d) Although the supplier process is satisfactory but a program is needed for continuous
monitoring
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: The acceptance sampling is used when the test is destructive, or the cost
of 100% inspection is quite high, or when we need a continuous monitoring program.
12. When the inspection error rate is sufficiently high, which of these is used as the
sampling technique?
a) 0% inspection
b) 100% inspection
c) 50% inspection
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: When there are many items to be inspected and the inspection error rate
is sufficiently high, that 100% inspection might cause a high % of defective units to be
passed, the procedure of acceptance sampling is adopted.
13. Which of these is not used for a lot quality inspection purposes?
a) EWMA Control chart
b) Cusum chart
c) Shewhart control charts
d) Acceptance Sampling
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: The Acceptance sampling procedure is used for decision making of
either acceptance or rejection of a lot. It can’t be used as a lot quality estimators.
14. Designed experiments may benefit the lot quality improvement process more than
the Acceptance sampling.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: As Acceptance sampling is just a lot sentencing process, it can’t estimate
the quality of products in the lot. But designed experiments ensure good quality of the
process output before even production.
15. A good lot can be rejected through the use of acceptance sampling.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: As acceptance sampling considers only a particular number of sample
units, and does not make use of the data of other units, there is a slight possibility that
it will reject the good lot.
This set of Statistical Quality Control Puzzles focuses on “Acceptance Sampling
Introduction – 2”.
1. Which of these is not an advantage of acceptance sampling over the 100% sampling
plan?
a) Less expensive
b) Highly costly
c) Applicable to destructive testing
d) Lesser manpower is needed
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: As lesser number of units are checked while using the acceptance
sampling plan instead of the 100% sampling plan, it is less expensive, applicable to
destructive testing, and needs lesser manpower.
2. Which of these is used when the test of the component is non-destructive, cheap and
fast?
a) 0% inspection
c) 100% sampling
d) 50% sampling
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: As it will give better results in the case of 100% inspection when the test
procedure of a component is non-destructive, cheap, and fast, the full lot sampling
procedure is adopted.
3. Which has the lowest number of manpower required?
a) Acceptance sampling
b) 0% inspection
c) 100% inspection
d) 50% inspection
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: As 0% inspection does not need any equipment or personnel to check
the product component supplied by the supplier, it has the lowest number of
manpower required.
4. Which has lesser probability of handling damage in between 100% inspection, and
the acceptance sampling procedure?
a) 100% inspection
c) Both have equal handling damage
d) Can’t be predicted
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: As there is a lesser number of units used as samples in the acceptance
sampling, there is less handling of the product, and hence reduced damage is there in
the case of acceptance sampling.
5. Which of these quite successfully fulfills the following sentence?
“The rejection of entire lots as opposed to the simple return of defectives often provides
stronger motivation to the supplier for quality improvements.”
a) 0% sampling
b) 100% sampling
c) Random % of the lot sampling
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: As in the case of acceptance sampling, there are only a few units
selected to be returned to the supplier, instead of returning the whole lot, it motivates
the supplier for quality improvements.
6. Which is the most expensive for the same testing process and product component to
be tested?
b) 100% sampling
c) 0% sampling
d) 50% sampling
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: As the 100% sampling procedure requires the checking of whole lot, it
requires more resources to be devoted towards the sampling process. This makes it
the most expensive procedure of all.
7. Which generates lesser information about the products and the manufacturing
process, 100% sampling or Acceptance sampling?
a) 100% sampling
c) Both generate equal amount of information
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: As we there are lesser number of units as samples in the case of
acceptance sampling rather than the 100% sampling procedure, it generates lesser
information about the process and the product.
8. Which has the most probability of rejecting the good lot?
b) 100% sampling
c) 0% sampling
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: As the 100% inspection accepts the lot after the inspection of whole lot,
and there are rarely any defectives in the case of no-inspection, acceptance sampling
is having the highest probability of rejecting the good lot.
9. Which of these requires planning and documentation of the sampling procedure?
b) 100% sampling
c) 0% sampling
d) 50% sampling
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The 100% sampling checks the whole lot, so it does not require any
planning or documentation, whereas the acceptance sampling requires it.
10. Which of these does not require sampling documentation at all?
a) 0% sampling
b) 100% inspection
c) Acceptance inspection
d) 50% inspection
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: As there is no sampling done in the case of 0% inspection or sampling,
there is no need to do the documentation for the same. So it doesn’t require any
sampling documentation at all
is set of Statistical Quality Control Multiple Choice Questions & Answers (MCQs)
focuses on “Acceptance Sampling Introduction – 3”.
1. Why are larger lots preferred over smaller lots in the case of acceptance sampling?
a) Because it’s economical
b) Because it is costly
c) Because it is time consuming
d) Because it is complicated to sample larger lots
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: The larger lots are preferred over smaller lots as it saves time, and it is
very easy to sample larger lots. The larger lots are also mostly homogeneous.
2. Sequential sampling is an extension of ____________
a) Single sampling plan
b) Double-sampling plan
c) Multiple-sampling plan
d) 0% sampling
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: As the multiple-sampling plan is associated with the case when N
numbers of samples are taken of n units, it has an intimate extension as Sequential
sampling.
3. Which is most economical of these?
a) Single sampling plan
b) Double-sampling plan
c) Multiple-sampling plan
d) 100% sampling
View Answer
Answer: a
Explanation: As single sampling plan necessarily requires only one sample of n units,
we may say that it is the most economical of all the acceptance sampling plans.
4. How many sampling plans are there in the case of acceptance sampling?
a) 1
b) 2
c) 3
d) 5
View Answer
Answer: c
Explanation: There are only 3 sampling plans available in the case acceptance
sampling, namely: single-sampling plan, double-sampling plan, and multiple-sampling
plan.
5. What is done in single sampling plan?
a) Only one unit is checked
b) Only the first lot is checked 100%
c) Only n samples of 1 unit are checked
d) Only one sample of n units is checked
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: Single-sampling plan is a lot sentencing procedure in which one sample
of n units is selected and checked, at random from the lot. Lot is sentenced based
upon only this sample.
6. Double-sampling plan is __________
a) Only 2 units are checked
b) Only the first and last lot is checked 100%
c) Only two samples of n units are checked (necessarily)
d) Only two samples of n units are checked (conditionally)
View Answer
Answer: d
Explanation: In the double-sampling plan, there are only two samples of n units are
checked. The lot disposition is totally based upon the information from the first and
second sample. There may not be two samples necessary to make decision.
7. There are necessarily 2 samples of n units taken and checked in the case of double
sampling plan.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: In the Double sampling plan, it is not necessary to take two samples.
Sometimes we can accept or reject the lot based upon the information from the first
lot.
8. Lots in the case of acceptance-sampling plan may not be homogeneous.
a) True
b) False
View Answer
Answer: b
Explanation: It is necessary to have the lots to be homogenous in the case of
acceptance sampling. This is done by producing them on same machines by same
operators, and keeping the other environmental factors to be the same

MSD Merged

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MSD Merged

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

13872 Item Bank Name MSU Baroda//...

Permissible speed deviation is .. ± 10 (ø - 1) ± 10 (ø + 1) ± 10 (ø x 1) ± 10 (ø /1)

2. Diameter range is high in geometric progression due to _________ spindle speed.

3. What is harmonic progression?

4. What is arithmetic progression?

5. What is geometric progression?

6. What is the purpose of using a gear box?

7. Which of the following statements is true for structure/speed diagrams?

10. Economic cutting speed is minimum if geometric ratio is _________

12. Ratio of two spindle speeds is constant in _________ progression.

13. Which of the following is the need of the gearbox?

29. Loss of economic cutting speed is

32. Percentage speed deviation is given by,

37. Advantage of the arithmetic Progression is

38. Disadvantage of the arithmetic progression is

39. Advantage of the harmonic Progression is

40. Disadvantage of the arithmetic progression is

41. Advantage of the Geometric Progression is

42. Disadvantage of the geometric progression is

51. Following is a purpose of gearbox:

52. The minimum number of teeth on the pinion can be taken as

54. Vertical lines in the structure diagram represent

55. Number of vertical lines in structure diagram is equal to

a. Mean time between two successive failure components

a. Normal distribution curve

Ans E. b) frequency distribution

Ans a) Interval; nominal

Ans E. d) frequency distribution table

31 A many sided closed figure used in frequency distribution is termed as

Ans E. a) frequency polygon

Ans a) total population

62 In standard normal distribution curve, the value in X-axis is

Multiple Choice Question

Department: Mechanical Academic Year: 2019 - 2020 Semester: II

1. The histogram is a method of representing frequency distribution between

6. What is the area below normal curve from Z=-3 to Z=+3

12. Minimum factor of safety available in the components is determined by using

a Minimum strength /Maximum stress

d None of the above

Unit 4 Design of Cylinders and Pressure Vessels.

13 Radial stress in a thin shell is given by

25 According to Birnie’s equation, the thickness of cylindrical shell is given by,

26 According to Clavarino’s equation, the thickness of cylindrical shell is given by,

47 Welded joint efficiency in the design of chemical process equipment is taken as

3. In thin cylinders, the longitudinal stress is,

4. The thickness of thin cylinder is determined on the basis of,

5. The thickness of thin cylindrical shell is given by,

6. The thickness of thin spherical shell is given by,

a. remains uniform throughout

8. In thick cylinders, the radial stress across the thickness of cylinder

a. remains uniform throughout

9. In thick cylinders, the axial stress across the thickness of cylinder

a. remains uniform throughout

a. remains uniform throughout

15. Autofrettage is,

a. a surface coating process of cylinders for corrosion resistance

16. Autofrettage is achieved by,

17. A gasket is made of,

a. internal pressure is from 1 kgf/cm 2 to 200 kgf/cm 2

a. hydrocyanic acid, carbonyl chloride or mustard gas are stored

a. operating pressure is less than 17.5 kgf/cm 2

a. 1.05(maximum operating pressure)

a. single-welded butt joint with backing strip